Home

PX2-3000/4000/5000 User Guide

1. E T Paste the contents in the terminal Press Enter Verify whether the system shows the following command prompt indicating the provided CA certificate is valid config Setting the BSSID This command syntax specifies the BSSID config network wireless BSSID lt bssid gt Variables e lt bssid gt is the MAC address of the wireless access point Example The following command specifies that the BSSID is 00 14 6C 7E 43 81 config f network wireless BSSID 00 14 6C 7E 43 81 720 Raritan Raritan Chapter 7 Using the Command Line Interface Configuring the IPv4 Parameters An IPv4 configuration command begins with network ipv4 The commands are case sensitive so ensure you capitalize them correctly Setting the IP Configuration Mode This command syntax determines the IP configuration mode config f network ipv4 ipConfigurationMode mode Variables e mode is one of the modes dhcp or static Mode Description dhcp The IP configuration mode is set to DHCP static The IP configuration mode is set to static IP address Example The following command enables the Static IP configuration mode config f network ipv4 ipConfigurationMode static Setting the Preferred Host Name After selecting DHCP as the IP configuration mode you can specify the preferred host name which is optional The following is
2. 3 jussu 4 2 geci 4 Chapter 2 Rack Mounting the PDU 5 Rackmount Safety Guidelines issit ct uec aei Een eain kh aee utat n uequ nete a tin En keE ARR NN a DecRu Rad 5 Circuit Breaker Orientation Limitation essent nnne nnne ntes 5 Mounting Zero U Models Using L Brackets sssssssssssee eene nnns 6 Mounting Zero U Models Using Button Mount sse 7 Mounting Zero U Models Using Claw Foot Brackets ssssssseeeenenes 9 Mounting Zero U Models Using Two Rear Buttons ssssssssseseeeeeenenen nnn 10 Mounting 1U or 2U Models entren ttc reden du akku RENREN a HENE E EKKE SaaS 11 Chapter 3 Installation and Configuration 13 Before You Begiei DINEE N 13 Unpacking the Product and Components sss 13 Preparing the Installation SIt6 cette trei ertt neither een dna pag ERU a esed 14 zie Raritan Contents Filling Out the Equipment Setup Worksheet 0 ccscceeececeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeseeeeeeaeeeeaeeeneeeeeaas 14 Checking the Branch Circuit Ratings i ccsctecccccasiectetetaecectnedieeideeeedalietdaiedsenedleddiedancdheesiveaneda 14 Installing Cable Retention Clips on the Inlet Optional see 15 Connecting the PDU to a Power SOUIGO wrine sianie iaiaeiaeiaa aaa 15 Contigurmg Dominion PX stags tuse aaaea ae eaea aaea
3. sse 257 Sensor Threshold Configuration Commands sees 261 User Configuration Command astiassa neesii des rk etes a de dpt ent RR cn 291 Role Configuration Commands sssssssssssssss esent 303 EnergyWise Configuration Commands ssssssssseeeeeeeeee nnne 308 Asset Management Commands sess nennen nnns nennen 311 Setting the History Buffer Length enne nre 318 M lti Commarnd Syntaks c eene idet rud esi t setae et od ete inset n ad aiaa cud ie aee dee 318 Quitting the Configuration Mode ssssssseeeeeeeee eene 320 Load Shedding Configuration Commands sse 320 Enabling or Disabling Load Shedding sssssssseeeeeene 321 Power Control Operations se sorsia innana asudansieasda si iasan aaa tdaa sieas daeina innan edena ie trt tenni 321 Turpo On te QUtlet S iisisti rt ete tap edito diner repre eod anos iaa ikiii 322 THUMM the QUES rruna ea tree beady eye oe dene tedden vinagodans cede taxe etre ta 323 Power Cycling the Outlet s eseessssssssesseeess esent nnne nens 324 Unlocking a USC emer 325 Resetting Dominion PX ie coiere a iiec eiu een ERE a ER A e CX RS Exl ER eM Ra ENARE 325 Restarting the PIU ic i tnit p ree rati x Ux en t ixu ue Eu Ted n ub ES aE Fa dix 326 Resetting to Factory Default aana na ERR ed enun ta EATEN 326 Network Troubleshootiigs sciis
4. Circuit Breaker Sensor Threshold Information Environmental Sensor Threshold Information f Te dae nire Existing User Profiles sse Existing Roles nnne Load Shedding Settings sss EnergyWise Settings ssssssssseeeeeenenes Asset Management Settings Asset Sensor Settings ssssssssssssseeeeee Rack Unit Settings of an Asset Sensor sssssuuss Reliability Data Reliability Error Log eseeeeeeeenennenenennn nnn zie Raritan Contents Contents Command EISIOFy sci decreed ios data foes ees aside lait atthe elie Aine Beers 202 History Butter Eengthiuu 26i dieu HE dhe gere es EE aed ee ee eed ee 203 Example Sme eee secre asec EET L I 203 Configuring the Dominion PX Device and Network cccccceeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeseneeesnaeeeeaeeneees 204 Entering the Configuration Modeks sssrinds e ra neue dena aes 205 PDU Contiguration Commands aduentu donne tetas cn E cd ra cedet ede Eee 205 Networking Configuration Commands sse nennen 212 Security Configuration GCormatids occae niet eaii daia Ea sed 235 Outlet Configuration COM MANS sauce rer nacta eae ode rete d a nau dunes ters vanes 253 Inlet Configuration Command Ssss anksia tuaana hadean diaid 255 Circuit Breaker Configuration Commands sss eee 256 Environmental Sensor Configuration Commands
5. S 130 Setting Circuit Breaker Thresholds essesssssssssseseeeeeee nennen enne 131 What is Deassertion Hysteresis sssssssssesessessess eser entente 132 Whatis Assertion TImeoUt ica ori ett re petet pte ctae sean a due ek be xen pia 133 Configuring Event RUl6S oec tad orci ta tame due i ode Fete etus n pe ien n de bra noe ela re ranie 134 Components of an Event Rule nt et ente detnr sence a nae etn adde gn 134 Creating am Event RUNS ucc coegit dee rie one Fete de setas mede t Ree Ra asd ER ni dee 134 Sample Event RIlGS soie eoe etri dente och ef pute nde rete he eeu de Fete ea eo se ese bond euo ades 141 Modifying an Event Rule sssssssseseessssese eene entente trennen nnne nenas 143 fere riore ETE ACUO o RETE TEE DL 144 Deleting an Event Rule OF ACLOT aee tiende reden siaaa odaia pa deux 144 A Note about Untriggered Rules eee 145 MAMAGING Event Logging siise ERE 145 Viewing the Local Event Log sesssssssssssssseseeeeneene ener entren enne 145 Clearing Event Ete iretur oriri eae deat tu ed recu eae teer hans iiiaae dox Unus 146 Viewing Connected USerS iiir esecex eris ten duh aea du dice Pp ba dpa td duni ud Ra duca 146 Monitoring Server Accessibility sssssssssssssessseeeeeee enne nennen nennen enne 147 Adding IT Devices for Ping Monitoring ssssseeeneeennnn nnns 147 Editing Ping Monitoring Settings
6. Inlet Outfet my PK 102 168 84 100 ET a p LiCewet i2Comet i3Cumed LIA2Vetape LILI Vetage LILI Velage Acte Power Apparent Power Power Facts Cu Extern Sensors i gt Asset Mansgemert External Sensors 0 managed 0 unmanaged ase Srp 1 fame Reasng Sur A myPX 18216853100 E Asmaatater ainan G Last Loni 2 111 7 51 PU O unisce An inline monitor s Outlet page displays more information than a regular Dominion PX device s Outlet page including e Current per outlet Current per line for a three phase model e Voltage per outlet Voltage per line for a three phase model e Power related readings per outlet Power related readings per line for a three phase model e Threshold settings per outlet Threshold settings per line for a three phase model 335 336 Chapter 8 Inline Monitors Note Depending on your model elements shown on the same page may appear slightly different from this image 2 Raritan Dominion PX Feet Mirnpinded z eves Sees ase Danson Pt Borer WA Doshocord 4 omy PX 192 168 84 80 Bote External Sensors 4 Asset Management Mase Sir 1 Piet Outlets Settings Label ame ines Sia Current Type Ostet Lt RMS Current L2 AUS Current LARUS Current Current nsa acce Voltage Tyee Oitet 1142 RUS Vetase 124 3 AUS Vetage LILI RIS Vetaze Power A my PX 182 168 84 20 y Admeistratze admin G Last Lope 32
7. cae 48 Chapter 5 Using the Web Interface 49 Supported Web BrOWSe IS inita enden edad uda aeta dna d ea Rd RI cada dna eaa eT ut 49 Logging into the Web Interface eire sarei e datae ted tatit oe eie ene kd aag 50 COJ Men C 50 Ghanging Your PassWOEG ce eerte itte te dene ade ruin tt tue Luo rotta ese Du PPP Leto SaN 51 COJOU sess ie 52 Introduction to the Web Interface oder tae eet eee deut idees sert xe eh t E Rd na cas 53 MIS NEEE 54 Dominion PX Explorer Pane sssssssssesssseeeneeenne ener nnns 54 SS TU ETO E M 57 Slatus Barco cott nea tna cece oreet ten dut totum etfi eas ace deta cece see E a 57 Add Page GOD teneo ett ea eter n re epa Den se EV nada sa da undue 58 Logout BUON T akea ia 59 Data Im PE a iaa a E aa aa 59 More Information sssesssssssessssssessseeenne enne ananin awaa aaa nenna aeih aein 59 Viewing the Dashboard sssssssssssssseee eee nee senes innere enr sensn nnns eren en 64 Device Management sssesssssssessseseses esee nennen enn snnt sen thns terns sn nnns sn trn rens nn isis nnne 64 Displaying the PDU Information ssssssseseee nennen nnns 65 Naming the PD cm 66 i SE Raritan Contents Modifying the Network Configuration
8. 2 To show any tree item s data click on that item See Add Page Icon on page 58 Expanding the Tree The icons representing all components implemented on or connected to the Dominion PX device are expanded by default If they are hidden you may expand the tree manually to show all component icons gt To expand the tree 1 By default the PDU folder has been expanded Note The PDU folder is named my PX by default The name changes after customizing the device name See Naming the PDU on page 66 If it is not expanded click the white arrow P prior to the folder icon or double click the folder The arrow then turns into a black gradient arrow 4 and icons of components or component groups appear below the PDU folder 2 To expand any component group at the second level click the white arrow P prior to the folder icon or double click the folder The arrow then turns into a black gradient arrow 44 and icons representing individual components appear below the group folder zie Raritan P Chapter 5 Using the Web Interface Repeat Step 2 for other component groups you want to expand The expanded tree looks similar to this image ll Dashboard 4 2 my PX 192 168 57 47 Kz niet 4 El Outlets 1 G2 CE a s 4 6 Overcurrent Protectors c c 4 i External Sensors Humidity 1 4 OnlOff 1 i Temperature 1 4 i7 Asset Management 3 Asset Strip 1 Collapsing the Tree You can collapse the whole tree stru
9. Setting the Outlet Specific Power On Delay This section only applies to PDUs with the outlet switching function You can make a power on delay occur between two outlets that are turned on consecutively when the PDU turns on all outlets For example if the power up sequence is Outlet 1 through Outlet 12 and you want the PDU to wait for 5 seconds after turning on Outlet 3 before turning on Outlet 4 assign a delay of 5 seconds on Outlet 3 gt To set the outlet specific power on delay 1 Trigger the Outlet Sequence Setup dialog by doing either of the following is SE Raritan zie Raritan Chapter 5 Using the Web Interface Click the Outlets folder and the Outlets page opens in the right pane Click Sequence Setup Click the PDU folder and then the Setup button in the Outlet Sequence section 2 Click the Delay column of the outlet where a delay is intended after this outlet is turned on delete the existing value and type a new number in seconds The number can be a decimal number To disable the delay simply type the number 0 zero 3 Repeat the above step to change the delay settings of additional outlets 4 Click OK to save the changes Setting Non Critical Outlets and Load Shedding Mode This section only applies to PDUs with the outlet switching function When a UPS supplying power to the PDU switches into battery backup operation it may be desirable to switch off non critical outlets to co
10. tnter tte xar tce enara Rx de eR ida 325 Network Troubleshooting eene 326 Querying Available Parameters for a Command ss 331 Retrieving Previous Commands sss 331 Automatically Completing a Command sss 331 Logging out OF GEM Dm 332 About the Interface zie Raritan Dominion PX provides a command line interface that enables data center administrators to perform some basic management tasks Using this interface you can do the following e Reset the Dominion PX device e Display the Dominion PX and network information such as the device name firmware version IP address and so on e Configure the Dominion PX and network settings e Troubleshoot network problems You can access the interface over a serial connection using a terminal emulation program such as HyperTerminal or via a Telnet or SSH client such as PuTTY Note Telnet access is disabled by default because it communicates openly and is thus insecure To enable Telnet see Modifying the Network Service Settings on page 72 181 182 Chapter 7 Using the Command Line Interface Logging in to CLI Logging in via HyperTerminal over a serial connection is a little different than logging in using SSH or Telnet With HyperTerminal You can use any terminal emulation programs for local access to the command line interface This section illustrates HyperTerminal which is part of W
11. Accept Accepts traffic from all IP addresses Drop Discards traffic from all IP addresses without sending any failure notification to the source host Reject Discards traffic from all IP addresses and an ICMP message is sent to the source host for failure notification 4 Click OK to save the changes The new default policy is applied zie Raritan j 92 Chapter 5 Using the Web Interface Action Add a rule to the end of the rules list Creating Firewall Rules Firewall rules determine whether to accept or discard traffic intended for Dominion PX based on the IP address of the host sending the traffic When creating firewall rules keep these principles in mind Rule order is important When traffic reaches the Dominion PX device the rules are executed in numerical order Only the first rule that matches the IP address determines whether the traffic is accepted or discarded Any subsequent rules matching the IP address are ignored by Dominion PX Subnet mask may be required When typing the IP address you may or may not need to specify BOTH the address and a subnet mask The default subnet mask is 32 that is 255 255 255 255 You must specify a subnet mask only when itis not the same as the default For example to specify a single address in a Class C network use this format X X X X 24 where 24 a subnet mask of 255 255 255 0 To specify an entire subnet or range of addresses change the subn
12. config network wireless eapIdentity identity Variables e identity is your user name for the EAP authentication Example The following command sets the EAP identity to eap_user01 config network wireless eapIdentity eap user01 zie Raritan d Chapter 7 Using the Command Line Interface Setting the EAP Password This command syntax determines the EAP password config network wireless eapPassword lt password gt Variables e password is your password for EAP authentication Example The following command sets the EAP password to user01 password config fd network wireless eapPassword user01 password Providing the EAP CA Certificate You may need to provide a third party CA certificate for the EAP authentication gt To provide a CA certificate 1 Type the CA certificate command as shown below and press Enter config f network wireless eapCACertificate 2 The system prompts you to enter the contents of the CA certificate Do the following to input the contents a Open your CA certificate with a text editor b Copy the contents between the BEGIN CERTIFICATE and END CERTIFICATE lines in a certificate c Paste the certificate contents into the terminal d Press Enter Tip To remove an existing CA certificate simply press Enter without typing or pasting anything when the system prompts you to input the certificate contents 3 If the certificate is valid
13. config sensor externalsensor 3 humidity lowerWarning disable Setting the Sensor s Deassertion Hysteresis This command syntax configures the deassertion hysteresis value of a numeric environmental sensor xternalsensor lt n gt lt sensor type gt hysteresis lt value gt Variables e n is the ID number of the environmental sensor that you want to configure The ID number is assigned and shown in the Dominion PX web interface It is an integer between 1 and 16 e sensor type is one of these sensor types temperature humidity airPressure or air Flow Note If the specified sensor type does not match the type of the specified environmental sensor this error message appears Specified sensor type XXX does not match the sensor s type lt sensortype gt where XXX is the specified sensor type and sensortype is the correct sensor type e value is a numeric value that is assigned to the hysteresis for the specified environmental sensor See What is Deassertion Hysteresis on page 132 for the function of the deassertion hysteresis Example The following command sets the deassertion hysteresis of the environmental temperature sensor with the ID number 4 to 2 degrees Celsius That is the temperature must drop by at least 2 degrees Celsius below the upper threshold or rise by at least 2 degrees Celsius above the lower threshold before any threshold crossing event is deasserted config sens
14. 148 Deleting Ping Monitoring Settings sssssseseeeenenneneen nens 148 Checking Server Monitoring States sssessssssssssseseeeeee enne 149 Environmental SellSOls aoreet mean aidaa Made eden Ame etum eR MEE de need hut xt parca read 149 Identifying Environmental Sensors nnne 150 Managing Environmental SeriSOrs cote tpe reta nt een RIT a pes ER ka XR ARTE ER ERR SAE 151 Configuring Environmental Sersors nectare tet Re six tea upra ER xe ex xa aut R un 152 MES IDeEsI nde EET 155 Unmanaging Environmental Sensors eese ener nnne 159 Asset Maragetmeaett iocis amne e teh ude ceddege ei Race um ded ick emi b e axe aie aLaaa EAE 160 Configuring the Asset Sensor ttd ters ke tein EU IRE naa aas Kae RE RXM Me KKE 160 Setting Asset Sensor LED Colors ttr te ee hae Pesca ut bu epica a don 161 Changing a Specific LED s Color Settings esee 161 Displaying the Asset Sensor Information sssssssseeenenee 162 Copying Configurations with Bulk Configuration eeeeneeenee 163 Saving a Dominion PX Configuratloh itudin eeiam enda pe nce re nae eas 164 Copying a Dominion PX Configuration sessssssseeneneeeen nnne 165 Changing the Measurement Units esesssssesssseseeeeee enne nnne enne nnns nnne ens 165 Network BIEtejapre eL RS 167 Pinging
15. Normally Open The open status of the connected detector switch is considered normal Normally Closed The closed status of the connected detector switch is considered normal This is the default 5 Toset the Normal state for channel 2 repeat Step 4 for adjusting the 6 other dip switch s setting Install back the dip switch cover Note The dip switch setting must be properly configured or the sensor LED may be incorrectly lit when in the Normal state Contact Closure Sensor LEDs DPX CC2 TR is equipped with the LEDs for showing the state of the connected detectors switches The LED is lit when the associated detector switch is in the abnormal state which is the opposite of the Normal state See Configuring a Contact Closure Sensor on page 31 for how to set the Normal state The meaning of a lit LED varies depending on the Normal state settings When the Normal state is set to Closed LED Sensor state Not lit Closed Lit Open When the Normal state is set to Open LED Sensor state Not lit Open Lit Closed S Raritan Chapter 3 Installation and Configuration How to Connect Differential Air Pressure Sensors You can have a Raritan differential air pressure sensor connected to the Dominion PX device if the differential air pressure data is desired With this sensor the temperature around the sensor can be also detected because a temperature sensor is implemented inside You can cascade mul
16. This command syntax shows the specified outlet pole sensor s threshold related information show sensor outletpole lt n gt lt p gt lt sensor type gt To show detailed information add the parameter details to the end of the command show sensor outletpole lt n gt lt p gt lt sensor type gt details Variables e n isthe number of the outlet whose pole sensors you want to query e lt p gt is the label of the outlet pole whose sensors you want to query Pole Label Current sensor Voltage sensor lt p gt 1 L1 L1 L1 L2 2 L2 L2 L2 L3 3 L3 L3 L3 L1 e sensor type is one of the following sensor types Sensor type Description current Current sensor voltage Voltage sensor activePower Active power sensor apparentPower Apparent power sensor powerFactor Power factor sensor activeEnergy Active energy sensor zie Raritan M Chapter 7 Using the Command Line Interface Displayed information e Without the parameter details only the reading state threshold deassertion hysteresis and assertion delay settings of the specified outlet pole sensor are displayed e With the parameter details more sensor information is displayed including location accuracy and range e fthe requested sensor type is not supported the message Not available is displayed Inlet Sensor Threshold Information This command is not available for an inline monitor PX2 3nnn series This command
17. 2 For that rack PDU select the appropriate outlet from the Outlet Name drop down list From the Outlet Name drop down list select None Click OK That rack PDU outlet association is removed and a confirmation message is displayed gt To remove a rack PDU association if the rack PDU has been removed from the target 1 Click Device Settings gt Port Configuration and then click on the active target 2 Associate the active target to the disconnected power port This will break the disconnected target s power association 3 Finally associate the active target to the correct power port v Power Strip lame Outlet Mame Deerinion KX2_Portt6 oues onion Ponie x o none f x ate Mans maf sienne n n POT mm t amens a m at zie Raritan 361 Appendix E Integration RF Code Energy Monitoring Solution With the RF Code active RFID hardware and management software and Raritan s PDUs combined a wire free energy monitoring solution that provides a picture of power utilization is offered This combined solution does not require any additional IP address configuration or association All you need to do is plug an RF Code R170 PDU sensor tag into the SENSOR port of the Dominion PX device The RF Code R170 PDU sensor tag collects the power data generated by Raritan PDUs and sends the data to the RF Code Sensor Manager software which not only manages the power data but also make computations about the power usage
18. Changing Your Own Password 301 Changing Your Password 51 Checking Server Monitoring States 148 Checking the Branch Circuit Rating 14 Circuit Breaker Configuration Commands 255 Circuit Breaker Information 189 Circuit Breaker Orientation Limitation 5 6 7 9 10 11 369 Index Circuit Breaker Sensor Threshold Information 195 Circuit Breakers 46 Clearing Event Entries 145 CLI Command Applicability 362 Closing a Serial Connection 183 Collapsing the Tree 56 Command History 201 Commands for Circuit Breaker Sensors 280 Commands for Environmental Sensors 285 Commands for Inlet Pole Sensors 272 Commands for Inlet Sensors 266 Commands for Outlet Sensors 260 Components of an Event Rule 134 Configuration Commands 364 Configuring a Contact Closure Sensor 31 32 157 Configuring Dominion PX e xiii 16 69 Configuring Environmental Sensors 149 151 Configuring Event Rules 80 129 133 136 176 Configuring IP Protocol Settings 212 Configuring Rack PDU Power Strip Targets 355 Configuring SNMP Traps 176 Configuring the Asset Sensor 36 159 Configuring the Dominion PX Device and Network 203 Configuring the Firewall e 90 Configuring the IPv4 Parameters 220 Configuring the IPv6 Parameters 224 Configuring the SMTP Settings 80 135 Configuring the SNMP Settings 74 83 Configuring Users for Encrypted SNMP v3 74 175 Connecting a Rack P
19. Option Description enable Enables the lower critical threshold for the specified circuit breaker sensor disable Disables the lower critical threshold for the specified circuit breaker sensor A numeric value Sets a value for the lower critical threshold of the specified circuit breaker sensor and enables this threshold at the same time Example The following command sets the Lower Critical threshold for the 3rd circuit breaker to 5A It also enables the lower critical threshold if this threshold has not been enabled yet config f sensor ocp 3 current lowerCritical 5 283 Chapter 7 Using the Command Line Interface Setting the Lower Warning Threshold for a Circuit Breaker This command syntax configures the Lower Warning threshold of a circuit breaker config sensor ocp lt n gt lt sensor type gt lowerWarning lt option gt Variables e lt n gt is the number of the circuit breaker that you want to configure e sensor type is one of the following sensor types Sensor type Description current Current sensor Note If the requested sensor type is not supported the message Not available is displayed e option is one of the options enable disable or a numeric value Option Description enable Enables the lower warning threshold for the specified circuit breaker sensor disable Disables the lower warning threshold for the specified circuit breaker sensor A numeric value Sets a value for th
20. Password Led Enter new password xl Old Password Password Confirm Password Repeat new password 0K Cancel Type the current password in the Old Password field Type your new password in the Password and Confirm Password fields The password can be 4 to 32 characters long It is case sensitive 51 52 Chapter 5 Using the Web Interface Logout 4 Click OK to save the changes Tip If you have the Administrator Privileges you can change other users passwords See Modifying a User Profile on page 86 After finishing your tasks with Dominion PX you should log out to prevent others from accessing the web interface gt To log out of the web interface 1 Do one of these Click logout on the top right corner of the web interface G logout Close the web browser by clicking the Close button xh on the top right corner of the browser Close the web browser by choosing File gt Close or File gt Exit The command varies according to the version of the browser you use Choose the Refresh command or click the Refresh button on the web browser 2 Either the login page opens or the browser is closed depending on your choice in the previous step S Raritan Introduction to the Web Interface Chapter 5 Using the Web Interface The web interface provides two panes a menu bar a status bar an Add Page icon and a logout button t
21. Power Measurement Accuracy on page 337 Integration on page 355 Additional Dominion PX Information on page 363 Please see the Release Notes for a more detailed explanation of the changes applied to this version of Dominion PX Raritan Chapter 1 Product Models Product Features zie Raritan Introduction Dominion PX is an intelligent power distribution unit PDU that allows you to reboot remote servers and other network devices and or to monitor power in the data center The intended use of the Raritan Dominion PX is distribution of power to information technology equipment such as computers and communication equipment where such equipment is typically mounted in an equipment rack located in an information technology equipment room Raritan offers different types of PDUs some with the outlet switching function and others without With the outlet switching function you can recover systems remotely in the event of system failure and or system lockup eliminate the need to perform manual intervention or dispatch field personnel reduce downtime and mean time to repair and increase productivity In This Chapter Product Model Sosse maan a A EEEE EE naues 1 Product Fealuf8s cetero aa n aaa ea aa iea 1 Package GCOnlernls erneute eerie ossa i enc et nea a ecu en RR i 3 Dominion PX comes in several models that are built to stock and can be obtained almost immediately Raritan also offers custom models that
22. Type of LDAP Server Microsoft Active Directory C LDAP over SSL Port 389 SSL Port 635 Use only trusted LDAP Server Certificates Server Cercficate not set Show Remove select new certificate TY Browse Anonymous Bind O Use Bind Credentials Bind DN Bind Pessword z Confirm Bind Password l Base DN for Search dc techadssl dc com Login Name Attrbute sAMAccountNsme User Entry Object Cass user User Search Subfiter P 9 Qd Active Directory Domain techadss com a Test Connection BI cancei 350 Appendix D LDAP Configuration Illustration Note For more information on LDAP configuration see Setting Up LDAP Authentication on page 106 5 Click OK to save the changes The LDAP server is saved 6 Click OK to save the changes The LDAP authentication is activated Note If the Dominion PX clock and the LDAP server clock are out of sync the certificates are considered expired and users are unable to authenticate using LDAP To ensure proper synchronization administrators should configure Dominion PX and the LDAP server to use the same NTP server Step D Configure User Groups on the Dominion PX Device zie Raritan A role on the Dominion PX device determines the system and outlet permissions You must create the roles whose names are identical to the user groups created for Dominion PX on the AD server or authorization will fail Therefore we will create th
23. below lower critical State This state means a numeric sensor s reading is below the lower critical threshold as indicated below Reading Lower Critical Threshold m Raritan zie Raritan Chapter 5 Using the Web Interface below lower warning State This state means a numeric sensor s reading is below the lower warning threshold as indicated below Lower Critical Threshold lt Reading Lower Warning Threshold Note The symbol lt means smaller than or equal to above upper warning State This state means a numeric sensor s reading is above the upper warning threshold as indicated below Upper Warning Threshold Reading Upper Critical Threshold Note The symbol lt means smaller than lt or equal to above upper critical State This state means a numeric sensor s reading is above the upper critical threshold as indicated below Upper Critical Threshold lt Reading Note The symbol lt means smaller than or equal to Unmanaging Environmental Sensors When it is unnecessary to monitor a particular environmental factor you can unmanage or release the corresponding environmental sensor so that the Dominion PX device stops retrieving the sensor s reading and or state gt To release a managed sensor 1 Ifthe PDU folder is not expanded expand it to show all components and component groups See Expanding the Tree on page 55 Note The PDU folder is named m
24. e Current firmware and software packages information e Alinkto the Dominion PX User Guide that is the online help NS SE Raritan Raritan Chapter 5 Using the Web Interface Retrieving Software Packages Information You can check the current firmware version and the information of all open source packages embedded in the Dominion PX device through the web interface gt To retrieve the embedded software packages information 1 Choose Help gt About Dominion PX The About Dominion PX dialog appears with a list of open source packages displayed 2 Youcan click any link in the dialog to access related information or download any software package Browsing through the Online Help The Dominion PX User Guide is also provided in the form of online help and accessible over the Internet To use online help Active Content must be enabled in your browser If you are using Internet Explorer 7 you must enable Scriplets Consult your browser help for information on enabling these features gt To use the Dominion PX online help 1 Choose Help User Guide The online help opens in the default web browser 2 Toview the content of any topic click the topic in the left pane Then its content is displayed in the right pane 3 To select a different topic do any of the following To view the next topic click the Next icon in the toolbar To view the previous topic click the Previous icon OJ To vi
25. security roleBasedAccessControl rule delete lt rule_number gt Variables e rule number is the number of the existing rule that you want to remove Example The following command removes the 7th rule config f security roleBasedAccessControl rule delete 7 Outlet Configuration Commands An outlet configuration command begins with outlet Such command allows you to configure an individual outlet Changing the Outlet Name This command syntax names an outlet config f outlet n name lt name gt Variables e n is the number of the outlet that you want to configure e name is a string comprising up to 32 ASCII printable characters The name variable must be enclosed in quotes when it contains spaces Example The following command assigns the name Win XP to outlet 8 config outlet 8 name Win XP zie Raritan Chapter 7 Using the Command Line Interface Changing an Outlet s Default State This section only applies to PDUs with the outlet switching function This command syntax determines the initial power condition of an outlet after the PDU powers up config outlet lt n gt stateOnDeviceStartup lt option gt Variables e lt n gt is the number of the outlet that you want to configure e option is one of the options off on lastKnownState and pduDefined Option Description off Switches OFF the outlet when the Dominion PX device powers up on Switches ON the outle
26. 186 LAN Interface Settings This command shows the LAN interface information such as LAN interface speed duplex mode and current LAN interface status 4 show network interface Networking Mode This command shows whether the current networking mode is wired or wireless E show network mode Wireless Configuration This command shows the wireless configuration of the Dominion PX device such as the SSID parameter show network wireless To show detailed information add the parameter details to the end of the command show network wireless details SE Raritan Chapter 7 Using the Command Line Interface Network Service Settings This command shows the network service settings including the Telnet setting TCP ports for HTTP HTTPS and SSH services and SNMP settings show network services lt option gt Variables e lt option gt is one of the options all http https telnet ssh and snmp Option Description all Displays the settings of all network services including HTTP HTTPS Telnet SSH and SNMP Tip You can also type the command without adding this option all to get the same data http Only displays the TCP port for the HTTP service https Only displays the TCP port for the HTTPS service telnet Only displays the settings of the Telnet service ssh Only displays the settings of the SSH service snmp Only displays the SNMP settings PDU Configur
27. 2i 116 Chapter 5 Using the Web Interface Note The PDU folder is named my PX by default The name changes after customizing the device name See Naming the PDU on page 66 Click the Outlets folder and the Outlets page opens in the right pane Click the outlet you want in the right pane and the corresponding checkbox is selected Click On Off or Cycle A dialog for confirming the operation appears Click Yes and the outlet switches ON OFF or cycles its power Setting the Default Outlet State This section only applies to PDUs with the outlet switching function Default outlet state determines the initial power state of outlets after the Dominion PX device powers up You can set up the default outlet state for all outlets or for a specific outlet Note that the value set for an individual outlet always overrides the value set for all outlets When removing power from the PDU you must keep it unpowered for a minimum of 10 seconds Otherwise the default outlet state settings may not work properly after powering up the PDU again Setting the PDU Defined Default State This section only applies to PDUs with the outlet switching function This procedure sets the PDU defined outlet state which determines the initial power state of all outlets after powering up the Dominion PX device Tip To set a different state on a particular outlet see Setting the Outlet Specific Default State on page 117 gt To s
28. Raritan Ei Copyright O 2011 Raritan Inc DPX2 0F v2 2 E June 2011 255 80 6101 00 Safety Guidelines WARNING Read and understand all sections in this guide before installing or operating this product WARNING Connect this product to an AC power source whose voltage is within the range specified on the product s nameplate Operating this product outside the nameplate voltage range may result in electric shock fire personal injury and death WARNING Connect this product to an AC power source that is current limited by a suitably rated fuse or circuit breaker in accordance with national and local electrical codes Operating this product without proper current limiting may result in electric shock fire personal injury and death WARNING Connect this product to a protective earth ground Never use a ground lift adaptor between the product s plug and the wall receptacle Failure to connect to a protective earth ground may result in electric shock fire personal injury and death WARNING This product contains no user serviceable parts Do not open alter or disassemble this product All servicing must be performed by qualified personnel Disconnect power before servicing this product Failure to comply with this warning may result in electric shock personal injury and death WARNING Use this product in a dry location Failure to use this product in a dry location may result
29. Separate each privilege with a semi colon See All Privileges on page 304 e argumenti lt argument2 gt and the like are arguments set for a particular privilege For example the switchOutlet privilege requires arguments Separate a privilege and its argument with a colon Example The following command modifies the privileges of the role tester zie Raritan d Chapter 7 Using the Command Line Interface config 308 role modify tester addPrivileges changeAuthSettings removePrivileges firmwareUpgrade Results e The changeAuthSettings Change Authentication Settings privilege is added to the role e The firmwareUpgrade Firmware Upgrade privilege is removed from the role Deleting a Role This command syntax deletes an existing role config role delete lt name gt Example The following command deletes an existing role config role delete tester EnergyWise Configuration Commands An EnergyWise configuration command begins with energywise Enabling or Disabling EnergyWise This command syntax determines whether the Cisco EnergyWise endpoint implemented on the Dominion PX device is enabled config energywise enabled lt option gt Variables e lt option gt is one of the options true or false Option Description true The Cisco EnergyWise feature is enabled false The Cisco EnergyWise feature is disabled S Raritan Chapter 7 Using the Command Line Interf
30. The LED display of an inline monitor is the same as a regular Dominion PX model See LED Display on page 41 Automatic Mode Unlike regular Dominion PX models the inline monitor s LED display only cycles through the current readings of each outlet in the Automatic Mode Manual Mode You can switch between voltage active power and current readings of the selected outlet in the Manual Mode on an inline monitor To enter the Manual Mode press the Up or Down button gt To operate the LED display of an inline monitor 1 Press the Up or Down button until the desired outlet number is selected in the two digit row Pressing the Up button moves up one selection Pressing the Down button moves down one selection 333 Chapter 8 Inline Monitors If your inline monitor has only one outlet go to Step 2 2 Current of the selected outlet is shown in the three digit row Simultaneously the CURRENT A LED is lit See LEDs for Measurement Units on page 42 3 If desired you can press the Up and Down buttons simultaneously to switch between voltage active power and current readings The voltage appears in this format XXX V It is displayed for about five seconds after which the current reading re appears When the voltage is displayed the VOLTAGE V LED is lit The active power appears in one of the formats X XX XX X and XXX kW It is displayed for about five seconds after which the current reading re
31. configure other access control rules that are based on both IP addresses and users roles A role based access control command begins with security roleBasedAccessControl S Raritan Chapter 7 Using the Command Line Interface Modifying the Role Based Access Control Parameters There are different commands for modifying role based access control parameters gt To enable or disable the role based access control feature use this command syntax config ft security roleBasedAccessControl enabled option gt To determine the role based access control policy use this command syntax config ft security roleBasedAccessControl defaultPolicy policy Variables e option is one of the options true or false Option Description true Enables the role based access control feature false Disables the role based access control feature e policy is one of the options allow or deny Policy Description allow Accepts traffic from all IP addresses regardless of the user s role deny Drops traffic from all IP addresses regardless of the user s role Tip You can combine both commands to modify all role based access control parameters at a time See Multi Command Syntax on page 318 Example The following command sets two parameters of the role based IP access control feature zie Raritan i Chapter 7 Using the Command Line Interface config security roleBasedAccessControl enabled true defaultP
32. interface 149 Chapter 5 Using the Web Interface 3 Identify each sensor through the sensor s serial number See Identifying Environmental Sensors on page 150 4 Dominion PX should automatically manage the detected sensors Verify whether detected sensors are managed If not have them managed See Managing Environmental Sensors on page 151 5 Configure the sensors See Configuring Environmental Sensors on page 152 The steps include a Name the sensor b If the connected sensor is a Raritan contact closure sensor specify an appropriate sensor type c Mark the sensor s physical location in the rack or server room d Foranumeric sensor configure the sensor s threshold hysteresis and assertion timeout settings Note Numeric sensors use numeric values to indicate the environmental or internal conditions while discrete on off sensors use alphabetical characters to indicate the state Only numeric sensors have the threshold settings Identifying Environmental Sensors An environmental sensor includes a serial number tag on the sensor cable The serial number for each sensor appears listed in the web interface after each sensor is detected by Dominion PX gt To identify each detected environmental sensor 1 Ifthe PDU folder is not expanded expand it to show all components and component groups See Expanding the Tree on page 55 Note The PDU folder is named my PX by default The name chang
33. lt sensor type gt To show detailed information add the parameter details to the end of the command show sensor inletpole lt n gt lt p gt lt sensor type gt details Variables e n is the number of the inlet whose pole sensors you want to query lt p gt is the label of the inlet pole whose sensors you want to query Pole Label Current sensor Voltage sensor lt p gt 1 L1 L1 L1 L2 2 L2 L2 L2 L3 3 L3 L3 L3 L1 sensor type is one of the following sensor types Sensor type Description current Current sensor voltage Voltage sensor activePower Active power sensor apparentPower Apparent power sensor 195 Chapter 7 Using the Command Line Interface Sensor type Description powerFactor Power factor sensor activeEnergy Active energy sensor Displayed information e Without the parameter details only the reading state threshold deassertion hysteresis and assertion timeout settings of the specified inlet pole sensor are displayed e With the parameter details more sensor information is displayed including location accuracy and range e fthe requested sensor type is not supported the message Not available is displayed Circuit Breaker Sensor Threshold Information This command is only available for PDUs with overcurrent protection mechanism implemented This command syntax shows the specified circuit breaker sensor s threshold related information show sensor ocp lt n
34. the authentication pass phrase is identical to the user s password To specify a different authentication pass phrase disable the checkbox Type the authentication pass phrase in this field if the Use Password as Authentication Pass Phrase checkbox is disabled The pass phrase must consist of 8 to 32 ASCII printable characters Re type the same authentication pass phrase for confirmation This checkbox is configurable only if AuthPriv is selected When the checkbox is selected the privacy pass phrase is identical to the authentication pass phrase To specify a different privacy pass phrase disable the checkbox Type the privacy pass phrase in this field if the Use Authentication Pass Phrase as Privacy Pass Phrase checkbox is disabled The pass phrase must consist of 8 to 32 ASCII printable characters Re type the same privacy pass phrase for confirmation Click the drop down arrow and select the desired authentication protocol from the list Two protocols are available MD5 SHA 1 default S Raritan Chapter 5 Using the Web Interface Field Description Privacy Protocol Click the drop down arrow and select the desired privacy protocol from the list Two protocols are available DES default AES 128 7 Click the Roles tab to determine the permissions of the user Select one or multiple roles by selecting corresponding checkboxes The Admin role provides full permissions The Operator
35. the system shows the command prompt config again If not it shows a message indicating that the certificate is not valid iu Raritan Chapter 7 Using the Command Line Interface Example This section provides a CA certificate example only Your CA certificate contents should be different from the contents displayed in this example gt To provide a CA certificate 1 Make sure you have entered the configuration mode See Entering the Configuration Mode on page 205 2 Typewireless eapCACertificate and press Enter config network wireless eapCACertificate The system prompts you to enter the contents of the CA certificate Open a CA certificate using a text editor You should see certificate contents similar to the following BEGIN CERTIFICATE MIICjTCCAfigAwIBAgIEMaY gRzALBgkqhkiG9wOBAQQWwRTELMAKGA 1UEBhMCVVMx NjAOBgNVBAoTLUShdGlvbmFsIEFlcm9uY XVOaWNzIGFuZCBTCcGFjZSBBZG1pbmlz dHJhdGlvbjamFxESNjA1MjgxMzQ5MDUrMDgwMBCROTgwNTIA4MTMOOTA1KzA4MDAw ZzELMAkGA1UEBhMCVVMXxNjAOBgNVBAOTLUShdGlvbmFsIEFlcm9uY XVOaWNzIGFu ZCBTCcGFjZSBBZG1pbmlzdHJhdGlvbjEgMAkGA1UEBRMCMT Y wEwYDVQQDEwXxTdGV2 ZSBTY2hvY2gwWDALBgkqhkiG9wOBAQEDSQAwRgJBALrAw y Y dgxmzNP tsOUyf6Bp miJYktU w4NG67ULaN4B5CnEz7k57s903YY3LecETgQ5iQHmkwIYDTL2fTgVfwOC AQOjgaswgagwZAYDVROZAQH BFowWDBWMFQXxCzAJBgNVBAYTAIVTMT YwNAYDVQQK Ey10YXRpb2S5hbCBBZXIJvbmF 1dGljcyBhbmQgU3BhY 2UgQWRtaW 5pc3RyYXRpb24x DTALBgNVBAMTBENSTDEwFwYDVROBAQH BAOWC4AJODMyOT cwODEwMBgGA1UdAg
36. 11 1 04 Fe LU L2 L3 NEUTRAL Vave 294 204 204 aoa Vaus ov LJ Sate noma noma norma norat Sate format nomat nomat eminem Raritan Appendix A Specifications In This Chapter Power Measurement Accuracy eese 337 Maximum Ambient Operating Temperature s eeren 338 Serial RJ 45 Port Pinouts ccccccssccccssssscecsssececsssaeeeesssaeeeesscaeeeessnaes 338 Sensor HJ 12 Port PINGUS uie reni ote re dero La ten dl ges 338 Power Measurement Accuracy The following measurement accuracy applies to all Dominion PX models whose model names begin with PX2 Power Measurement measurement accuracy range accuracy 196 RMS voltage V 1 0 1A 0 1A to rated current RMS current A 1 20W to rated power Active power Watts 1 20VA to rated power Apparent power VA 1 Active energy Watts hour zie Raritan Appendix A Specifications Maximum Ambient Operating Temperature The maximum ambient operating temperature TMA for Dominion PX varies from 50 to 60 degrees Celsius depending on the model and certification standard CE or UL If necessary contact Raritan Technical Support for this information for your model Specification Measure Max Ambient Temperature 50 to 60 degrees Celsius Serial RJ 45 Port Pinouts RJ 45 Pin signal definition Pin No Signal Direction Description 1 DCD Input Data 2 RxD Input Receive data data in 3 TxD Ou
37. 15 second delay 5 Click OK to save the changes 119 120 Chapter 5 Using the Web Interface Setting the Initialization Delay This section only applies to PDUs with the outlet switching function The outlet initialization delay determines how long the Dominion PX device waits before providing power to all outlets during power cycling or after recovering from a temporary power loss This is useful in cases where power may not initially be stable after being restored or when UPS batteries may be charging gt 1 4 To set the initialization delay for all outlets Click the PDU folder Note The PDU folder is named my PX by default The name changes after customizing the device name See Naming the PDU on page 66 Click Setup in the Settings section The Pdu Setup dialog appears In the Outlet initialization delay on device startup field click the drop down arrow and select an option from the list Valid range is 1 second to 1 hour Time units in the list are explained below S second s min minute s h hour s Click OK to save the changes Tip When there are a large number of outlets set the value to a lower number so that you can avoid a long wait before all the outlets are available again SE Raritan zie Raritan Chapter 5 Using the Web Interface Setting the Inrush Guard Delay This section only applies to PDUs with the outlet switching function When electrical devices
38. 182 183 203 318 319 Disabling the LDAP Authentication 111 Displaying the Asset Sensor Information 161 Displaying the PDU Information 65 Dominion KX II Configuration for PX2 5000 Series 355 Dominion PX Explorer Pane 54 Downloading Diagnostic Information 168 Downloading Key and Certificate Files e 105 Downloading SNMP MIB xiii 75 175 176 177 E Editing Firewall Rules 94 Editing Ping Monitoring Settings 147 Editing Role Based Access Control Rules 100 S Raritan Editing the LDAP Server Settings 110 Enabling Data Logging 79 Enabling IPv4 or IPv6 212 Enabling LDAP and Local Authentication Services 111 Enabling Login Limitations 96 Enabling or Disabling a User Profile 294 Enabling or Disabling Data Logging 209 Enabling or Disabling EnergyWise 306 Enabling or Disabling Load Shedding 319 Enabling or Disabling SNMP v1 v2c 232 Enabling or Disabling SNMP v3 232 Enabling or Disabling SSH 231 Enabling or Disabling Strong Passwords 244 Enabling or Disabling Telnet 230 Enabling Password Aging 97 Enabling SNMP 79 174 Enabling Strong Passwords 96 Enabling the Feature 97 98 Enabling the Firewall 90 91 Enabling User Blocking 95 EnergyWise Configuration Commands 306 EnergyWise Settings 199 Entering the Configuration Mode 183 203 218 292 301 Entering the Diagnostic Mode 183 325 Environmental Sensor Configuration Comman
39. 2 4 9 11 12 13 and 15 type outlets 2 4 9 11 13 15 A range of Power cycles multiple consecutive outlets Ace an For example to specify 6 consecutive outlets 3 betwen 4 5 6 7 8 type outlets 3 8 ne 3ie Raritan Chapter 7 Using the Command Line Interface If you entered the command without y a message appears prompting you to confirm the operation Then Type y to confirm the operation OR Type n to abort the operation Example The following command power cycles these outlets 2 6 7 8 10 13 14 15 and 16 power outlets 2 6 8 10 13 16 cycle Unblocking a User If any user is blocked from accessing Dominion PX you can unblock them over a serial connection gt To unblock a user 1 Log in to the CLI interface using any terminal program via a serial connection See With HyperTerminal on page 182 2 When the Username prompt appears type unblock and press Enter Username unblock 3 When the Username to unblock prompt appears type the login name of the user to be unblocked and press Enter Username to unblock 4 Amessage appears indicating that the specified user was unblocked successfully Resetting Dominion PX You can reset Dominion PX to factory defaults or simply restart it using the CLI commands zie Raritan a Chapter 7 Using the Command Line Interface 326 Restarting the PDU This command restarts the Dominion PX device It is not a factory defau
40. 60 means the log can store the last two hours of measurements before the oldest one in log gets overwritten Whenever measurements are written to the log three values for each sensor are written the average minimum and maximum values For example if measurements are written every minute the average of all measurements that occurred during the preceding 60 seconds along with the minimum and maximum measurement values are written to the log Note Dominion PX s SNMP agent must be enabled for this feature to work See Enabling SNMP on page 175 for more details In addition using an NTP time server ensures accurately time stamped measurements Enabling Data Logging By default data logging is disabled Only users having the Administrator or Change Data Logging Settings permissions can enable or disable this feature See Setting Up Roles on page 87 gt To configure the data logging feature 1 Choose Device Settings gt Data Logging The Data Logging Options dialog appears 2 To enable the data logging feature select the enable checkbox in the Enable Data Logging field 3 Type a number in the Measurements Per Log Entry field Valid range is from 1 to 600 The default is 60 4 Verify that all sensor logging is enabled If not click Enable All in Page to have all sensors selected 5 Click OK to save the changes Note Although it is possible to selectively enable disable logging for individual sensors in S
41. Address The IP address of each user s host For the login via a serial connection lt local gt is displayed instead of an IP address Client Type The interface through which the user is being connected to Dominion PX Web GUI This refers to the Dominion PX web interface CLI This refers to the command line interface CLI The information in parentheses following CLI indicates how this user is connected to the CLI Serial This is a serial connection SSH This is a SSH connection Telnet This is a Telnet connection Raritan Chapter 5 Using the Web Interface Column Description Idle Time The length of time for which a user remains idle The unit min represents minutes To disconnect any user click the corresponding Disconnect button a Adialog appears prompting you to confirm the operation b Click Yes to disconnect the user or No to abort the operation If clicking Yes the connected user is forced to log out You may change the sorting order of the list if necessary See Changing the Sorting on page 62 Click Close to quit the dialog Monitoring Server Accessibility zie Raritan You can monitor whether specific IT devices are alive by having the Dominion PX device continuously ping them An IT device s successful response to the ping commands indicates that the IT device is still alive and can be remotely accessed Adding IT Devices for Ping Monitoring You can have Dominion PX m
42. Aging Interval field Users are required to change their password every time that number of days has passed Click OK to save the changes Setting Up Role Based Access Control Rules Role based access control rules are similar to firewall rules except they are applied to members sharing a specific role This enables you to grant System permissions to a specific role based on their IP addresses 1 2 To set up role based access control rules Enable the feature See Enabling the Feature on page 98 Set the default policy See Changing the Default Policy on page 98 Create rules specifying which addresses to accept and which ones to discard when the addresses are associated with a specific role See Creating Role Based Access Control Rules on page 98 Changes made do not affect users currently logged in until the next login 97 98 Chapter 5 Using the Web Interface Enabling the Feature You must enable this access control feature before any relevant rule can take effect gt To enable role based access control rules 1 Choose Device Settings gt Security gt Role Based Access Control The Configure Role Based Access Control Settings dialog appears 2 Select the Enable Role Based Access Control checkbox This enables the feature 3 Click OK to save the changes Changing the Default Policy The default policy is to accept all traffic from all IP addresses regardless of the role applied to
43. Asset Management folder is not expanded expand it to show the asset sensor See Expanding the Tree on page 55 2 Click the asset sensor in the left pane The asset sensor s page opens in the right pane 161 Chapter 5 Using the Web Interface Note The asset sensor is named Asset Strip 1 by default The name changes after being customized Tip The same asset sensor s page can be also opened by clicking Asset Management in the left pane and then double clicking the asset sensor in the right pane Select the rack unit whose LED settings you want to change Click Configure Rack Unit or double click the selected rack unit The setup dialog for the selected rack unit appears 5 Select either Auto or Manual Override as this rack unit s LED mode Auto based on Tag This is the default setting With this option selected the LED follows the global LED color settings See Setting Asset Sensor LED Colors on page 161 Manual Override This option differentiates this LED s behavior After selecting this option you must select an LED mode and or an LED color for the selected rack unit LED Mode Select On to have the LED stay lit Off to have it stay off Slow blinking to have it blink slowly or Fast blinking to have it blink quickly LED Color If you select On Slow blinking or Fast blinking in the LED Mode field select an LED color by either clicking a color in the color palette or typing the hexadecimal
44. Commands Most of user configuration commands begin with user except for the password change command Creating a User Profile This command syntax creates a new user profile config user create lt name gt lt option gt lt roles gt After performing the user creation command Dominion PX prompts you to assign a password to the newly created user Then 1 Type the password and press Enter 2 Re type the same password for confirmation and press Enter zie Raritan d Chapter 7 Using the Command Line Interface Variables e lt name gt is a string comprising up to 32 ASCII printable characters The lt name gt variable CANNOT contain spaces e option is one of the options enable or disable Option Description enable Enables the newly created user profile disable Disables the newly created user profile e roles is a role or a list of comma separated roles assigned to the specified user profile Example The following command creates a new user profile and sets two parameters for the new user config f user create May enable admin Hesults e Anew user profile May is created e The new user profile is enabled e The admin role is assigned to the new user profile Modifying a User Profile A user profile contains various parameters that you can modify Tip You can combine all commands to modify the parameters of a specific user profile at a time See Multi Command Syntax on page 316
45. Configuring the FIrewall etti ee caste dha tet neds aden ces tnn aru Ded a anaga 90 Setting Up User Login Controls terrre eerie redd ten tun ni Save ec tp na sadi 95 Setting Up Role Based Access Control Rules ssssssssseeeeeee 97 Setting Up an SSL Certificate esessssssssesssesssssss seen nennen itaya Eia nasiti 101 Certificate Signing Request ssssssssssssssssseeeeee ener enne rennes 101 Creating a Self Signed Certificate sese eene 103 Installing Existing Key and Certificate Files sss 104 Downloading Key and Certificate Files ssesssesseeeeeeennnerenne 105 Setting Up LDAP Authentication ecce cots cet eeu tn ti a nte re pe casa a px t Fede cnp rk aa xls x EROR TR nes 106 Gathering the LDAP Information iio one urne tenen bt ph eed cupere EXER ER ER RR IIR ausis 106 Adding the LDAP Server Settings cine ae nte spe ait ie Le repe ua tee tib espe ki ene a pesa 107 Sorting the LDAP Access Order iacet eet te eter e RARI Ed cupa Re AUR Ree Rasa ce 109 Testing the LDAP Server Connection ssesssssssssssseseeeeee ener 110 Editing the LOAP Server Settiligs aiite ceto ht e e RR tet exe A ERR e anes 110 Deleting the LDAP Server Settings sesssssssssssssseseeeee eee en tnnt 110 Disabling the LDAP Authentication ssesssssesssesesesenenee enn
46. Dominion PX turns ON all non critical outlets that were ON before entering the load shedding mode You can activate or deactivate this mode from the PDU or Outlets page gt To enter or exit from the load shedding mode from the PDU page 1 Click the PDU folder Note The PDU folder is named my PX by default The name changes after customizing the device name See Naming the PDU on page 66 2 Inthe Load Shedding section click Enable Load Shedding to enter the load shedding mode or Disable Load Shedding to deactivate the mode You are then prompted to confirm this operation If you chose to activate the mode in the previous step click Yes to turn off all non critical outlets If you chose to deactivate the mode click Yes to turn on all non critical outlets that were previously ON prior to the load shedding mode gt To enter or exit from the load shedding mode from the Outlets page 1 Ifthe PDU folder is not expanded expand it to show all components and component groups See Expanding the Tree on page 55 Click the Outlets folder and the Outlets page opens in the right pane To enter the load shedding mode select the Load Shedding checkbox To exit from the load shedding mode deselect the Load Shedding checkbox You are then prompted to confirm this operation If you chose to activate the mode in the previous step click Yes to turn off all non critical outlets If you chose to deactivate the mode click Yes to
47. EE 326 Entering the Diagnostic MOoQGe riri prn Peu aa aS aa e centages 327 DIAGNOSTIC Commands sis acti execs sud been dn inae EEEREN S ETEA AEE EKETE 327 Quitting the Diagnostic Modes sistis teisinei eek el a Ra Eaa aKa SIKRE 330 Querying Available Parameters for a Command sse 331 Retrieving PrevidUS COM MANS isis uccisi des ounce ner rien tate nian sel ste Du xe ed gx ate Rx Rr edge 331 Automatically Completing a Command sss eee 331 Logging out of Class cca 332 Chapter 8 Inline Monitors 333 ei m 333 Inline Monitor s LED Display oerte utn eue uade o rer savent tet xa veda et eek s anida 333 Automate ModE ssie 333 Manual Mode surina nenian ra Ra 333 Inline Monitors Web Interface acier te reae tede tec pant eea a aaie 334 Dashboard Page u s edet edd eets n rtr Rae eoe dd Rab a cedunt da A 335 enia M sade 335 i S Raritan Contents Appendix A Specifications 337 Power Measurement ACCULACY vs oscaccss ceti bacteria e Endet aE Aia aadA 337 Maximum Ambient Operating Temperature c ccceccceeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeceeeecaeeeeaeeseeeeeseaeeesaaeeennees 338 Serial RJ 45 Port PINGUIS iy saad edis reddet incgeedst Deeg tanen d creased den tiedn iinde Mpanaida ians ad ihun ida 338 Sensor RJ 12 Port PIMOUTS sacs
48. Firefox 3 n n where n represents a numeric digit e Safari Konqueror Note IE6 and Chrome are NOT supported 49 Chapter 5 Using the Web Interface Logging in to the Web Interface To log in to the web interface you must enter a user name and password The first time you log in to Dominion PX use the default user name admin and password raritan You are then prompted to change the password for security purposes Exception If you already changed the password for the admin account during the Initial Network Configuration on page 20 use the new password instead to log in to the web interface and Dominion PX will NOT prompt you to change the password After successfully logging in you can create user profiles for your other users These profiles define their login names and passwords See Creating a User Profile on page 82 Login The web interface allows a maximum of 16 users to log in simultaneously You must enable JavaScript in the web browser for proper operation gt To log in to the web interface 1 Open a browser such as Microsoft Internet Explorer or Mozilla Firefox and type this URL http s lt ip address gt where ip address gt is the IP address of the Dominion PX device 2 If any security alert message appears click OK or Yes to accept The Login page then opens A Login User Name Password L Login Clear 3 Type your user name in the U
49. Follow the procedure suitable for your model In This Chapter Rackmount Safety Guidelines sss 5 Circuit Breaker Orientation Limitation 5 Mounting Zero U Models Using L Brackets ssssssssss 6 Mounting Zero U Models Using Button Mount ssesss 7 Mounting Zero U Models Using Claw Foot Brackets s 9 Mounting Zero U Models Using Two Rear Buttons 10 Mounting TU or 2U MOdelS netta ete en cena te ein 11 Rackmount Safety Guidelines In Raritan products which require rack mounting follow these precautions Operation temperature in a closed rack environment may be greater than room temperature Do not exceed the rated maximum ambient temperature of the Power Distribution Units See Specifications on page 337 in the User Guide Ensure sufficient airflow through the rack environment Mount equipment in the rack carefully to avoid uneven mechanical loading Connect equipment to the supply circuit carefully to avoid overloading circuits Ground all equipment properly especially supply connections to the branch circuit Circuit Breaker Orientation Limitation zie Raritan Usually a PDU can be mounted in any orientation However when mounting a PDU with circuit breakers you must obey these rules e Circuit breakers CANNOT face down For example do not horizontally mount a Zero
50. PX See Naming the PDU on page 66 my PX 192168 84 48 e IP address The numbers enclosed in parentheses is the IP address assigned to the Dominion PX device See Initial Network Configuration on page 20 or Modifying the Network Settings on page 69 my PX 192168 84 48 Tip The presence of the device name and IP address in the status bar indicates the connection to the Dominion PX device If the connection a is lost it shows disconnected instead e Login name This is the user name you used to log in to the web interface amp Administrator admin 57 58 Chapter 5 Using the Web Interface e Last login time This shows the date and time this login name was used to log in to the device last time amp Last Login 3 24 11 9 46 PM When the mouse pointer hovers over the last login time detailed information about the last login is displayed including the access client and IP address For the login via a serial connection local is displayed instead of an IP address There are different types of access clients Web GUI This refers to the Dominion PX web interface CLI This refers to the command line interface CLI The information in parentheses following CLI indicates how this user is connected to the CLI Serial This is a serial connection SSH This is a SSH connection Telnet This is a Telnet connection e System date and time Current date year a
51. PX device the three digit LED display shows FUP The outlet LEDs flash when the relay boards are being updated Exception If the firmware update does not include the update of the relay board firmware outlet LEDs do NOT flash No users can successfully log in to Dominion PX Inthe web interface all logged in users see the Dominion PX time out message and the disconnected state is shown in the status bar S Raritan zie Raritan Chapter 5 Using the Web Interface The user management operation if any is forced to suspend 7 When the update is complete a message appears indicating the update is successful 8 The Dominion PX device resets and the Login page re appears You can now log in and resume your operation Note 1 The other logged in users are also logged out when the firmware update is complete Note 2 If you are using Dominion PX with an SNMP manager you should re download the Dominion PX MIB after the firmware update This ensures your SNMP manager has the correct MIB for the latest release you are using See Using SNMP on page 175 A Note about Firmware Upgrade Time The PDU firmware upgrade time varies from unit to unit depending on various external and internal factors External factors include but are not limited to network throughput firmware file size and speed at which the firmware is retrieved from the storage location Internal factors include the necessity of upgra
52. Raritan oa Chapter 7 Using the Command Line Interface config security roleBasedAccessControl rule modify lt rule_number gt policy lt policy gt gt To modify all contents of an existing rule use this command syntax config security roleBasedAccessControl rule modify lt rule_number gt startIpAddress start ip endIpAddress end ip role role policy policy Variables e rule number is the number of the existing rule that you want to modify e start ip is the starting IP address e end ip is the ending IP address e role is one of the existing roles e policy is one of the options allow or deny Policy Description allow Accepts traffic from the specified IP address range when the user is a member of the specified role deny Drops traffic from the specified IP address range when the user is a member of the specified role Example The following command modifies all contents of the 8th rule config f security roleBasedAccessControl rule modify 8 startIpAddress 192 168 8 8 endIpAddress 192 168 90 90 role operator policy allow Results e The starting IP address is changed to 192 168 8 8 and the ending IP address to 192 168 90 90 e The role is changed to operator e The policy now becomes allow 792 Raritan Chapter 7 Using the Command Line Interface Deleting a Role Based Access Control Rule This command removes a specific rule from the list config
53. Remove selected Action 10 Click Save to save the new event rule 140 S Raritan Raritan Chapter 5 Using the Web Interface Note If you do not click Save before quitting the current settings page a message appears Then click Yes to save the changes Discard to abort the changes or Cancel to return to the current settings page 11 Repeat Steps 2 to 10 to create additional event rules 12 Click Close to quit the dialog Sample Event Rules Sample PDU Level Event Rule In this example we want Dominion PX to record the firmware upgrade failure in the internal log when it happens The sample event rule looks like this e Event Events gt Device gt Firmware update failed e Trigger condition asserted e Actions System Event Log Action gt To create the above event rule 1 Select Events gt Device to indicate we are specifying an event at the PDU level 2 Select Firmware update failed in the submenu because we want Dominion PX to respond to the event related to firmware upgrade failure 3 Select System Event Log Action as we intend to record the firmware update failure event in the internal log 4 Select the asserted radio button since we want the selected event to be recorded only when it occurs Sample Outlet Level Event Rule In this example we want Dominion PX to send SNMP traps to the SNMP manager both when any sensor reading of outlet 3 crosses any threshold and when it returns
54. Select the enable checkbox in the SNMP v3 field to enable communication with an SNMP manager using SNMP v3 protocol Tip You can permit or disallow a user to access Dominion PX via the SNMP v3 protocol See Configuring Users for Encrypted SNMP v3 on page 176 Type the SNMP MIB II sysContact value in the sysContact field Type the SNMP MIB II sysName value in the sysName field Type the SNMP MIB II sysLocation value in the sysLocation field Click OK to save the changes Important You must download the SNMP MIB for your Dominion PX to use with your SNMP manager Click Download MIB in this dialog to download the desired MIB file For more details see Downloading SNMP MIB on page 178 Configuring Users for Encrypted SNMP v3 The SNMP v3 protocol allows for encrypted communication To take advantage of this users need to have an Authentication Pass Phrase and Privacy Pass Phrase which act as shared secrets between them and Dominion PX 1 To configure users for SNMP v3 encrypted communication Choose User Management gt Users The Manage Users dialog appears Select the user by clicking it Click Edit or double click the user The Edit User XXX dialog appears where XXX is the user name To change the SNMPv3 access permissions click the SNMPv3 tab and make necessary changes For details see Step 6 of Creating a User Profile on page 82 Click OK to save the changes The user is now set up for encry
55. This product contains a chemical known to the State of California to cause cancer birth defects or other reproductive harm Safety Instructions 1 Installation of this product should only be performed by a person who has knowledge and experience with electric power Make sure the line cord is disconnected from power before physically mounting or moving the location of this product This product is designed to be used within an electronic equipment rack The metal case of this product is electrically bonded to the line cord ground wire A threaded grounding point on the case may be used as an additional means of protectively grounding this product and the rack Examine the branch circuit receptacle that will supply electric power to this product Make sure the receptacle s power lines neutral and protective earth ground pins are wired correctly and are the correct voltage and phase Make sure the branch circuit receptacle is protected by a suitably rated fuse or circuit breaker If the product is a model that contains receptacles that can be switched on off electric power may still be present at a receptacle even when it is switched off This document contains proprietary information that is protected by copyright All rights reserved No part of this document may be photocopied reproduced or translated into another language without express prior written consent of Raritan Inc Copyright 2011 Raritan Inc All third party soft
56. To remove the self signed certificate and private key permanently from the Dominion PX device click Delete Key and Certificate 6 If you installed the self signed certificate in Step 5 after the installation completes the Dominion PX device resets and the login page re opens Installing Existing Key and Certificate Files If the SSL certificate and private key files are already available you can install them directly without going through the process of creating a CSR or a self signed certificate gt To install the existing key and certificate files 1 Choose Device Settings gt Security gt SSL Certificate The Manage SSL Certificate dialog appears 2 Click the New SSL Certificate tab S Raritan Raritan Chapter 5 Using the Web Interface Select the Upload Key and Certificate checkbox The Key File and Certificate File fields appear In the Key File field click Browse to select the private key file In the Certificate File field click Browse to select the certificate file Click Upload The selected files are installed on the Dominion PX device Tip To verify whether the certificate has been installed successtully click the Active SSL Certificate tab later Click Close to quit the dialog Downloading Key and Certificate Files You can download the key and certificate files currently installed on the Dominion PX device for backup or other operations For example you can install the fil
57. U PDU with circuit breakers on ceiling e Ifa rack is subject to shock in environments such as boats or airplanes the PDU CANNOT be mounted upside down If installed upside down shock stress reduces the trip point by 10 Note If normally the line cord is down upside down means the line cord is up Chapter 2 Rack Mounting the PDU Mounting Zero U Models Using L Brackets If your PDU has circuit breakers implemented read Circuit Breaker Orientation Limitation on page 5 before mounting it gt To mount Zero U models using L brackets 1 Align the baseplates on the rear of the Dominion PX device 2 Secure the baseplates in place Use the included L shaped hex key to loosen the hex socket screws until the baseplate is slightly fastened 3 Align the L brackets with the baseplates so that the five screw holes on the baseplates line up through the L bracket s slots The rackmount side of brackets should face either the left or right side of the Dominion PX device 4 Fasten the brackets in place with at least three screws one through each slot Use additional screws as desired S Raritan Chapter 2 Rack Mounting the PDU 5 Using rack screws fasten the Dominion PX device to the rack through the L brackets Mounting Zero U Models Using Button Mount If your PDU has circuit breakers implemented read Circuit Breaker Orientation Limitation on page 5 before mounting it gt To mount Zero U m
58. a RUF aaa 16 Connecting the PDU toa GOImbpUler occa eee nnne ret endete tatu de sux eara avheeees 17 Connecting Dominion PX to Your Network ssssssssseeeeeenneen nnne 18 Initial Network COnfIQUEaltlOli cuero deg en epe tette exta revu dll eina ea cred neu na ceu 20 Installing Cable Retention Clips on Outlets Optional seen 26 Connecting Environmental Sensors Optional essent 28 About Contact Closure SGMSOLS ce enit deerit ene an bases ada 30 How to Connect Differential Air Pressure Sensors sse 33 Connecting the Asset Management Sensor Optional sssssssseeeen 34 Attaching Asset Sensors to RACK deett tea estet i fedes ede deat 34 Connecting Asset Sensors to Dominion PX 35 Chapter 4 Using the PDU 37 Panel Components eode it prie te ce ctt ra nete a Eb Ee o cin cendres Exp a eco us REESE gels 37 uero m OO 37 enc ET 37 Connectiori POS ciini ete tene tti ALA AEAEE b Laureati a verdura exu eee ee LAM Run 39 CED DIS PLAY EE 41 Reset BUttON P EE 45 Circuli Breakers ice eor trench npn deren repe n xia ke RR e es xe ba Ra ease xke be SAARNA 46 Resetting the Button Type Circuit Breaker esssssesssseeeeee nennen 46 Resetting the Handle Type Circuit Breaker 47 sr
59. appears When the active power is displayed the POWER kW LED is lit 4 While the final outlet s active power is being displayed you can press the Up button to show the first outlet s unbalanced load The UB LOAD 96 LED is lit Then press the Up and Down buttons to switch between different outlet s unbalanced load readings if there are more than one outlet Note The LED display returns to the Automatic Mode after 20 seconds elapse since the last time any button was pressed Inline Monitor s Web Interface An inline monitor s web interface is similar to a regular Dominion PX model s web interface See Using the Web Interface on page 49 for login instructions and additional information id Raritan Raritan Chapter 8 Inline Monitors Dashboard Page After login the web interface displays the Dashboard page by default An inline monitor s Dashboard page looks slightly different from a regular Dominion PX device s Dashboard page The power status of the outlet on a three phase Y wired inline monitor is displayed on this page including e Current of L1 L2 andL3 e Voltage of L1 L2 L2 L3 and L3 L1 e Active power e Apparent power e Power factor Note Depending on your model elements shown on the same page may appear slightly different from this image Raritan Dominion PX egu User Maragenert Covice Setings Martenarce Hep gt Dormsrscn PX Eqplorer Dashboard 43 WA Doshicrd
60. are built to order and can only be obtained on request Visit the Product Selector page httpz www raritan com resources px product selector on the Raritan website or contact your local reseller for a list of available models Dominion PX models vary in sizes and features In general Dominion PX features include e For units with switching the ability to power on power off and reboot the devices connected to each outlet e The ability to monitor the following at the outlet level Status on off RMS voltage V RMS current A Active power W Sa a Chapter 1 Introduction Apparent power VA Power factor Active energy Wh Exception Outlet sensor readings are NOT available on the models without the outlet metering function such as PX2 2nnn series where n is a number The ability to monitor the following at the inlet level Active energy Wh Active power W Apparent power VA Power factor RMS current per line A RMS voltage per line pair V The ability to monitor the following at the circuit breaker level Status closed open Current drawn A Current remaining A The ability to monitor environmental factors such as external temperature and humidity User specified location attributes for environmental sensors An audible alarm beeper and a visual alarm blinking LED to indicate current overload Configurable alarm thresholds and hysteresis Configurable assertion t
61. as Raritan Raritan Chapter 7 Using the Command Line Interface Changing a User s Password This command syntax allows you to change an existing user s password if you have the Administrator Privileges config user modify lt name gt password After performing the above command Dominion PX prompts you to enter a new password Then 1 Type a new password and press Enter 2 Re type the new password for confirmation and press Enter Variables e name is the name of the user whose settings you want to change Example The following procedure illustrates how to change the password of the user May 1 Verify that you have entered the configuration mode See Entering the Configuration Mode on page 205 2 Typethe following command to start the password change for the user profile May config f user modify May password Type a new password when prompted and press Enter Type the same password for confirmation and press Enter 293 Chapter 7 Using the Command Line Interface Modifying a User s Personal Data You can change a user s personal data including the user s full name telephone number and email address gt To change a user s full name use this command syntax config user modify lt name gt fullName lt full_name gt gt To change a user s telephone number use this command syntax config f user modify name telephoneNumber lt phone_number gt gt To change a user s
62. be shared between Dominion PX devices These settings include user and role configurations thresholds event rules security settings and so on This file does NOT contain device specific information including e Device name e System name system contact and system location e Network settings IP address gateway netmask and so on e Device logs e Outlet names e Outlet status e Environmental sensor names e Environmental sensor states and values e SSL certificate Because the date and time settings are saved in the configuration file users should exercise caution when distributing the configuration file to Dominion PX devices in a different time zone than the source device gt To save a configuration file 1 Choose Maintenance gt Bulk Configuration The Bulk Configuration dialog appears Click Download Bulk Configuration When the web browser prompts you to open or save the configuration file click Save Choose a suitable location and save the configuration file to your PC The file is saved in the XML format and its content is encrypted using the AES 128 encryption algorithm bas SE Raritan Chapter 5 Using the Web Interface Copying a Dominion PX Configuration A target device is a Dominion PX device that loads another Dominion PX device s configuration file Copying a Dominion PX configuration to a target device adjusts that Dominion PX device s settings to match those of the source Dominion PX devic
63. cened ede sre ted dau tec itat duce caus sad cux cicedushstestenasdedddegsct NEU dese 338 Appendix B Equipment Setup Worksheet 340 Appendix C Resetting to Factory Defaults 344 Using the Reset siet 344 Using the GLI Cormimlnd ucsii ettet retard erotic nire rt cen esi n eds eire de ce spa cenae 345 Appendix D LDAP Configuration Illustration 347 Step A Determine User Accounts and Groups seseeee ene 347 Step B Configure User Groups on the AD Server ssssssssseenes 348 Step C Configure LDAP Authentication on the Dominion PX DeVICE eee eee 349 Step D Configure User Groups on the Dominion PX Device 351 Appendix E Integration 355 Power IQ GConflg ratiOni e oaa itte eterne a rumen xe deer iach ced e anata 355 Adding PDUs to Power IQ Management ceccececececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeceeeeeeereneneneeeaeees 355 Dominion KX II Configuration for PX2 5000 Series 357 Configuring Rack PDU Power Strip Targets iriiria aaia 357 RF Code Energy Monitoring Solution i ae iic coi parcat net hevsscteddiadasie tee bas hd Ee pace n SER ku 362 Appendix F Additional Dominion PX Information 363 IMAG PCOS T X Y 363 Altitude Correctior Factors doct ends itte tette rtr ente RR dau ace au onde p ease 363 Data for BTU Galculator certet one rent rl eere poesie td du ee neta ede Eten x des Rue scu iae eE 364 CLI GommatdApplicablility utc urere tease a
64. change its TCP port using the CLI commands A Telnet command begins with network services telnet i SE Raritan Raritan Chapter 7 Using the Command Line Interface Enabling or Disabling Telnet This command syntax enables or disables the Telnet service config network services telnet enabled lt option gt Variables e lt option gt is one of the options true or false Option Description true The Telnet service is enabled false The Telnet service is disabled Example The following command enables the Telnet service config network services telnet enabled tru Changing the Telnet Port This command syntax changes the Telnet port config network services telnet port lt n gt Variables e n isa TCP port number between 1 and 65535 The default Telnet port is 23 Example The following command syntax sets the TCP port for Telnet to 44 config f network services telnet port 44 Changing the SSH Configuration You can enable or disable the SSH service or change its TCP port using the CLI commands An SSH command begins with network services ssh 231 232 Chapter 7 Using the Command Line Interface Enabling or Disabling SSH This command syntax enables or disables the SSH service config network services ssh enabled option Variables e lt option gt is one of the options true or false Option Description true The SSH service is enabled false The SSH ser
65. closure sensor this state is the normal state you have set via the sensor s dip switch e lf the normal state is set to Normally Closed the normal state means the contact closure switch is closed e fthe normal state is set to Normally Open the normal state means the contact closure switch is open Note See Configuring a Contact Closure Sensor on page 31 for setting the normal state For a numeric sensor this state means the sensor reading is within the acceptable range as indicated below Lower Warning threshold lt Reading Upper Warning threshold Note The symbol lt means smaller than lt or equal to alarmed State This state means a discrete on off sensor is in the abnormal state which is the opposite of the normal state For acontact closure sensor the meaning of this state varies based on the sensor s normal state setting e fthe normal state is set to Normally Closed the alarmed state means the contact closure switch is open e fthe normal state is set to Normally Open the alarmed state means the contact closure switch is closed Note See Configuring a Contact Closure Sensor on page 31 for setting the normal state Tip A contact closure sensor s LED is lit when in the alarmed state If the sensor module has two channels for connecting two switches two LEDs are available Check which contact closure switch is in the abnormal status according to the channel number of the LED
66. dialog appears Select the user by clicking it Click Edit or double click the user The Edit User XXX dialog appears where XXX is the user name Make all necessary changes to the information shown To change the password type a new password in the Password and Confirm Password fields If the password field is left blank the password is not changed To change the SNMPv3 access permissions click the SNMPv3 tab and make necessary changes For details see Step 6 of Creating a User Profile on page 82 To change the permissions click the Roles tab and do one of these Select or deselect any role s checkbox To modify the permissions of any role double click the role or highlight it and then click Edit Role See Modifying a Role on page 88 To change the measurement unit for temperature length or pressure click the Preferences tab and select a different option from the drop down list Note The measurement unit change only applies to the web interface and command line interface Click OK to save the changes Deleting a User Profile Delete outdated or redundant user profiles when necessary 1 To delete user profiles Choose User Management gt Users The Manage Users dialog appears Select the user you want to delete by clicking it To make multiple selections press Ctrl click or Shift click to highlight multiple ones Click Delete A message appears prompting you to confirm the op
67. email address use this command syntax config user modify lt name gt eMailAddress lt email_address gt Variables e lt name gt is the name of the user whose settings you want to change e full name is a string comprising up to 32 ASCII printable characters The lt full_name gt variable must be enclosed in quotes when it contains spaces e lt phone_number gt is the phone number that can reach the specified user The phone numbers variable must be enclosed in quotes when it contains spaces e email address is the email address of the specified user Tip You can combine all commands to modify the parameters of a specific user profile at a time See Multi Command Syntax on page 316 Example The following command modifies two parameters for the user profile May 794 Raritan Chapter 7 Using the Command Line Interface config user modify May fullName May Turner telephoneNumber 123 4567 Results e The full name is specified as May Turner e The telephone number is set as 123 4567 Enabling or Disabling a User Profile This command syntax enables or disables a user profile A user can log in to the Dominion PX device only after that user s user profile is enabled config user modify lt name gt enabled lt option gt Variables e name is the name of the user whose settings you want to change e option is one of the options true or false Option Description true Ena
68. following command sets the IP configuration mode to the static IP address mode config f network ipv6 ipConfigurationMode static zie Raritan m Chapter 7 Using the Command Line Interface Setting the IP Address After selecting the static IP configuration mode you can use this command syntax to assign a permanent IP address to the Dominion PX device config network ipv6 ipAddress ip address gt Variables e ip address is the IP address being assigned to your Dominion PX device This value uses the IPv6 address format Example The following command assigns the static IPv6 address 3210 4179 0 8 0 800 200C 417A to the Dominion PX device config fd network ipv6 ipAddress 3210 4179 0 8 0 800 200C 417A Setting the Gateway After selecting the static IP configuration mode you can use this command syntax to specify the gateway config fd network ipv6 gateway ip address Variables e ip address is the IP address of the gateway This value uses the IPv6 address format Example The following command sets the gateway to 500 0 330 0 4 9 3 2 config f network ipv6 gateway 500 0 330 0 4 9 3 2 ii Raritan zie Raritan Chapter 7 Using the Command Line Interface Setting the Primary DNS Server After selecting the static IP configuration mode you can use this command syntax to specify the primary DNS server It is required to enable the overriding of the auto assigned DNS server before yo
69. for better viewing the data See Changing the View of a List on page 61 3 To view the details of any firmware upgrade event select it and click Details or simply double click the event The Firmware Update Details dialog appears showing detailed information of the selected event 4 Click Close to quit the dialog Full Disaster Recovery If the firmware upgrade fails causing the Dominion PX device to stop working you can recover it by using a special utility rather than returning the PDU to Raritan Contact Raritan Technical Support for the recovery utility which works in Windows XP Vista 7 and Linux In addition an appropriate Dominion PX firmware file is required in the recovery procedure Updating the Asset Sensor Firmware After connecting the asset sensor to the Dominion PX device it automatically checks its firmware version against the version of the asset sensor firmware stored in the Dominion PX firmware If the asset sensor firmware version on the Dominion PX device is different the asset sensor automatically starts upgrading its firmware in the background During the firmware upgrade the following events take place e The asset sensor is completely lit up with the blinking LEDs changing the color from red to green e A firmware upgrade process is indicated in the Dominion PX web interface e An SNMP trap is sent to indicate the firmware upgrade event Accessing the Help The Help menu provides
70. from the collected data You can use the RF Code Sensor Manager to manage the power data using e Live table views e Map views e Interactive graphing and reporting e Scheduled graphing and reporting e Alerting and thresholding T sis Raritan Appendix F MAC Address Additional Dominion PX Information In This Chapter MAC AQArESS gene eto de do Leda en Ei a aiae eaea Ea 363 Altitude Correction Factors 0 cccccccccccccecceccecesceeeeeeeeseeseeaueueeseeeeeeeananees 363 Data for BTU GalCulatiOns risiini tiakina iiuna be tete secare ones 364 CLI Command Applicability sene 364 A label is affixed to a Dominion PX device near the LED display showing both the serial number and MAC address of the PDU TURA TEE PXL 600001 If necessary you can find the PDU s IP address through the MAC address by using commonly used network tools Contact your LAN administrator for assistance Altitude Correction Factors zie Raritan If a Raritan differential air pressure sensor is attached to your device the altitude you enter for the device can serve as an altitude correction factor That is the reading of the differential air pressure sensor will be multiplied by the correction factor to get a correct reading This table shows the relationship between different altitudes and correction factors Altitude meters Altitude feet Correction factor 0 0 0 95 250 820 0 98 425 1394 1 00 500 1640 1
71. gt lt sensor type gt To show detailed information add the parameter details to the end of the command show sensor ocp lt n gt lt sensor type gt details Variables e n is the number of the circuit breaker whose sensors you want to query e lt sensor type is one of the following sensor types Sensor type Description current Current sensor im SE Raritan Chapter 7 Using the Command Line Interface Displayed information e Without the parameter details only the reading state threshold and deassertion hysteresis settings of the specified circuit breaker sensor are displayed e With the parameter details more sensor information is displayed including location accuracy and range e fthe requested sensor type is not supported the message Not available is displayed Environmental Sensor Threshold Information This command syntax shows specified environmental sensor s threshold related information show sensor externalsensor lt n gt To show detailed information add the parameter details to the end of the command show sensor externalsensor lt n gt details Variables e n is the environmental sensor number The environmental sensor number is the ID number assigned to the sensor which can be found on the External Sensors page of the PDU s web interface Displayed information e Without the parameter details only the reading state thre
72. not supported the message Not available is displayed e value is a numeric value that is assigned to the hysteresis for the specified inlet sensor See What is Deassertion Hysteresis on page 132 for the function of the deassertion hysteresis Example The following command sets the deassertion hysteresis for the inlet 1 RMS current to 0 2A That is the current must drop by at least 0 2A below the upper threshold or rise by at least 0 2A above the lower threshold before any threshold crossing event is deasserted config f sensor inlet 1 current hysteresis 0 2 ME sis Raritan zie Raritan Chapter 7 Using the Command Line Interface Setting the Inlet s Assertion Timeout This command syntax configures the assertion timeout value of an inlet config sensor inlet lt n gt lt sensor type gt assertionTimeout lt value gt Variables e lt n gt is the number of the inlet that you want to configure For a single inlet PDU lt n gt is always the number 1 e lt sensor type is one of the following sensor types Sensor type Description current Current sensor voltage Voltage sensor activePower Active power sensor apparentPower Apparent power sensor powerFactor Power factor sensor activeEnergy Active energy sensor unbalancedCurrent Unbalanced load sensor Note If the requested sensor type is not supported the message Not available is displayed e value is a number in samples that is assigned to the as
73. of the environmental sensor into the SENSOR port on your Dominion PX device Note Depending on the model you purchased the number of SENSOR ports varies gt To connect environmental sensors via an optional PX sensor hub 1 Connect a Raritan sensor hub to the Dominion PX device a Plug one end of the Raritan provided phone cable 4 wire 6 pin RJ 12 into the IN port Port 1 of the hub b Plug the other end into the SENSOR port on the Dominion PX device 2 Connect Raritan environmental sensors to any of the four OUT ports on the hub SE Raritan Raritan Chapter 3 Installation and Configuration Raritan sensor hubs CANNOT be cascaded so at most a sensor hub can be connected to each SENSOR port on the Dominion PX device This diagram illustrates a configuration with a sensor hub connected Dominion PX device Raritan provided phone cable Raritan PX sensor hub Raritan environmental sensors 6 e886 If there are any Raritan air flow sensors attached make sure that sensor faces the source of the wind such as a fan in the appropriate orientation as indicated by the arrow on that sensor 29 Chapter 3 Installation and Configuration About Contact Closure Sensors Raritan s contact closure sensor DPX CC2 TR can detect the open and closed status of the connected detectors switches It requires the integration of at least a discrete on off detector switch to work properly The types of discr
74. on all PDUs added to Power IQ 6 Select Validate and wait for discovery to complete before proceeding to check credentials and view the discovery process status as you add this PDU Optional See Validating PDU Credentials in the Power IQ User Guide 7 Click Add Note PDU discovery is complete once the PDU model type is determined SNMP fields such as contact or location values are not determined until this device is polled for the first time Once added the PDU appears in the PDU list Power IQ begins polling the PDU for sensor data You can configure how often Power IQ polls PDU See Configuring Polling Intervals in the Power IQ User Guide SE Raritan Appendix E Integration Dominion KX II Configuration for PX2 5000 Series PX2 5000 series PDUs can be connected to the Raritan s Dominion KX Il device a digital KVM switch to provide one more alternative of power control Note that this integration requires the following firmware versions e Dominion KX II 2 4 or later e PX2 5000 series 2 2 or later Dominion KX II integration requires D2CIM PWR and straight CAT5 cable For more information on Dominion KX Il see either of the following e Dominion KX Il User Guide This is available on the Raritan website s Firmware and Documentation section http www raritan com support firmware and documentation e Dominion KX Il Online Help This is available on the Product Online Help section http www raritan c
75. option gt Variables e option is one of the options off on or lastKnownState Option Description off Switches OFF all outlets when the Dominion PX device powers up on Switches ON all outlets when the Dominion PX device powers up lastKnownState Restores all outlets to the previous status before powering down the Dominion PX device when the PDU powers up again 207 Chapter 7 Using the Command Line Interface 208 Example The following command causes all outlets to return to the last power state before powering down the PDU after you power up the PDU again config pdu outletStateOnDeviceStartup lastKnownState Setting the PDU Defined Cycling Power Off Period This section only applies to PDUs with the outlet switching function This command syntax sets the power off period of the power cycling operation for all outlets config pdu cyclingPowerOffPeriod timing Variables e timing is the time of the cycling power off period in seconds which is an integer between 0 and 3600 Example The following command sets the power off period of the power cycling operation to 5 seconds config pdu cyclingPowerOffPeriod 5 Setting the Inrush Guard Delay Time This section only applies to PDUs with the outlet switching function This command syntax sets the inrush guard delay config pdu inrushGuardDelay lt timing gt Variables e timing is a delay time between 100 and 100000 mil
76. pane and the External Sensors page opens in the right pane 3 Click the sensor you want to manage Note To identify all detected sensors see Identifying Environmental Sensors on page 150 4 Click Manage The Manage sensor serial number sensor type gt dialog appears where serial number is the sensor s serial number and sensor type is the sensor s type Note For a contact closure sensor a channel number is added to the end of the sensor type 5 There are two ways to manage the sensor zie Raritan Chapter 5 Using the Web Interface 152 ye To manage this sensor by letting Dominion PX assign a number to it select Automatically assign a sensor number This method does not release any managed sensors To manage this sensor by assigning the number you want to it select Manually select a sensor number Then click the drop down arrow to select a number If the number you selected was already assigned to a sensor that sensor becomes released after losing this ID number Tip The information in parentheses following each ID number indicates whether the number has been assigned to any sensor lf it has been assigned to a sensor it shows that sensor s serial number Otherwise it shows the term unused Click OK Dominion PX starts to track and display the managed sensor s reading and or state To manage additional sensors repeat Steps 3 to 6 Note When the number of managed s
77. profile on the Dominion PX device determines the role s applied to the user and determines the permissions for the user accordingly When configured for LDAP authentication all Dominion PX users must have an account on the LDAP server Local authentication only users will have no access to Dominion PX except for the admin who always can access Dominion PX Gathering the LDAP Information It requires knowledge of your LDAP server and directory settings to configure Dominion PX for LDAP authentication If you are not familiar with the settings consult your LDAP administrator for help To configure LDAP authentication you need to check e The IP address or hostname of the LDAP server e Whether the Secure LDAP protocol LDAP over SSL is being used f Secure LDAP is in use consult your LDAP administrator for the CA certificate file e The network port used by the LDAP server e The type of the LDAP server usually one of the following options OpenLDAP f using an OpenLDAP server consult the LDAP administrator for the Bind Distinguished Name DN and password Microsoft Active Directory AD s Raritan Raritan Chapter 5 Using the Web Interface a f using a Microsoft Active Directory server consult your AD administrator for the name of the Active Directory Domain e Bind Distinguished Name DN and password if anonymous bind is NOT used e The Base DN of the server used for searching for users
78. quit the Configure IP Access Control Settings dialog or the changes are lost Sorting Firewall Rules The rule order determines which one of the rules matching the same IP address is performed gt 1 To sort the firewall rules Choose Device Settings Security IP Access Control The Configure IP Access Control Settings dialog appears Ensure the Enable IP Access Control checkbox is selected Select a specific rule by clicking it Click or to move the selected rule up or down until it reaches the desired location Click OK to save the changes Deleting Firewall Rules When any firewall rules become obsolete or unnecessary remove them from the rules list 1 To delete a firewall rule Choose Device Settings Security IP Access Control The Configure IP Access Control Settings dialog appears Ensure the Enable IP Access Control checkbox is selected Select the rule that you want to delete To make multiple selections press Cirl click or Shift click to highlight multiple ones S Raritan Raritan Chapter 5 Using the Web Interface Click Delete A message appears prompting you to confirm the operation Click Yes to remove the selected rule s from the rules list 6 Click OK to save the changes Setting Up User Login Controls You can set up login controls to make it more difficult for hackers to access Dominion PX and the devices connected to it You can arrange to lo
79. quotes when it contains spaces ue sis Raritan Raritan Chapter 7 Using the Command Line Interface Example The command assigns the name Email servers CB to the circuit breaker 3 config ocp 3 name Email servers CB Environmental Sensor Configuration Commands An environmental sensor configuration command begins with externalsensor You can configure the name and location parameters of an individual environmental sensor Changing the Sensor Name This command syntax names an environmental sensor config externalsensor lt n gt name lt name gt Variables e n is the ID number of the environmental sensor that you want to configure The ID number is assigned and shown in the Dominion PX web interface It is an integer between 1 and 16 e lt name gt is a string comprising up to 32 ASCII printable characters The name variable must be enclosed in quotes when it contains spaces Example The following command assigns the name Cabinet humidity to the environmental sensor with the ID number 4 config f externalsensor 4 name Cabinet humidity 257 Chapter 7 Using the Command Line Interface Specifying the Sensor Type Raritan s contact closure sensor DPX CC2 TR supports the connection of diverse third party detectors switches and you must specify the type of connected detector switch for proper operation Use this command syntax when you need to specify the sensor type config f
80. role provides limited permissions for frequently used functions See Setting Up Roles on page 87 for the scope of permissions This role is selected by default f no roles meet your needs you can Modify the permissions of an existing role To modify the permissions of any role double click the role or highlight it and then click Edit Role See Modifying a Role on page 88 Create a new role See Creating a Role on page 87 Note With multiple roles selected a user has the union of all roles permissions 9 Tochange any measurement units displayed in the web interface for this new user click the Preferences tab and do any of the following Inthe Temperature Unit field select C Celsius or F Fahrenheit as the measurement unit for temperatures In the Length Unit field select Meter or Feet as the measurement unit for length or height In the Pressure Unit field select Pascal or psi as the measurement unit for pressure A Pascal is equal to one newton per square meter Psi stands for pounds per square inch Note The measurement unit change only applies to the web interface and command line interface 10 Click OK to save the changes zie Raritan i 86 Chapter 5 Using the Web Interface Modifying a User Profile You can change any user profile s information except for the user name gt 1 To modify a user profile Choose User Management gt Users The Manage Users
81. rule Choose Device Settings Security Role Based Access Control The Configure Role Based Access Control Settings dialog appears Ensure the Enabled Role Based Access Control checkbox is selected Select the rule to be modified in the rules list Click Edit or double click the rule The Edit Rule dialog appears Make changes to the information shown Par on Click OK to save the changes Sorting Role Based Access Control Rules Similar to firewall rules the order of role based access control rules determines which one of the rules matching the same IP address is performed gt To sort role based access control rules 1 Choose Device Settings gt Security gt Role Based Access Control The Configure Role Based Access Control Settings dialog appears Ensure the Enabled Role Based Access Control checkbox is selected Select a specific rule by clicking it 4 Click or bd to move the selected rule up or down until it reaches the desired location 5 Click OK to save the changes Deleting Role Based Access Control Rules When any access control rule becomes unnecessary or obsolete remove it gt To delete a role based access control rule 1 Choose Device Settings Security Role Based Access Control The Configure Role Based Access Control Settings dialog appears Ensure the Enabled Role Based Access Control checkbox is selected Select the rule to be deleted in the rules list To make multiple selectio
82. sensor apparentPower Apparent power sensor powerFactor Power factor sensor activeEnergy Active energy sensor unbalancedCurrent Unbalanced load sensor Note If the requested sensor type is not supported the message Not available is displayed e option is one of the options enable disable or a numeric value Option Description enable Enables the upper warning threshold for the specified inlet sensor disable Disables the upper warning threshold for the specified inlet sensor A numeric value Sets a value for the upper warning threshold of the specified inlet sensor and enables this threshold at the same time Example The following command sets the Upper Warning threshold for the inlet 1 RMS current to 12A It also enables the upper warning threshold if this threshold has not been enabled yet config f sensor inlet 1 current upperWarning 12 269 Chapter 7 Using the Command Line Interface 270 Setting the Inlet s Lower Critical Threshold This command syntax configures the Lower Critical threshold of an inlet config sensor inlet lt n gt lt sensor type gt lowerCritical lt option gt Variables e n is the number of the inlet that you want to configure For a single inlet PDU n is always the number 1 e sensor type is one of the following sensor types Sensor type Description current Current sensor voltage Voltage sensor activePower Active power sensor apparentPower Apparent powe
83. show the current and voltage readings as described in Manual Mode on page 43 When a circuit breaker trips power flow ceases to all outlets connected to it You must manually reset the circuit breaker so that affected outlets can resume normal operation Depending on the model you purchased the circuit breaker may use a button or handle reset mechanism When a circuit breaker trips power flow ceases to all outlets connected to it You must manually reset the circuit breaker so that affected outlets can resume normal operation Depending on the model you purchased the circuit breaker may use a button or handle reset mechanism Resetting the Button Type Circuit Breaker Your button type circuit breakers may look slightly different from the images shown in this section but the reset procedure remains the same gt To reset the button type breakers 1 Locate the breaker whose ON button is up indicating the breaker has tripped S N Ers 2 Examine your Dominion PX device and the connected equipment to remove or resolve the cause that results in the overload or short circuit This step is required or you cannot proceed with the next step SE Raritan Chapter 4 Using the PDU 3 Press the ON button until it is completely down adii Resetting the Handle Type Circuit Breaker Your handle type circuit breakers may look slightly different from the images shown in this section but the reset procedure remai
84. syntax shows the specified inlet sensor s threshold related information show sensor inlet lt n gt lt sensor type gt To show detailed information add the parameter details to the end of the command show sensor inlet lt n gt lt sensor type gt details Variables e n is the number of the inlet whose sensors you want to query e lt sensor type is one of the following sensor types Sensor type current voltage activePower apparentPower powerFactor activeEnergy unbalancedCurrent 194 Description Current sensor Voltage sensor Active power sensor Apparent power sensor Power factor sensor Active energy sensor Unbalanced load sensor S Raritan zie Raritan Chapter 7 Using the Command Line Interface Displayed information e Without the parameter details only the reading state threshold deassertion hysteresis and assertion delay settings of the specified inlet sensor are displayed With the parameter details more sensor information is displayed including location accuracy and range If the requested sensor type is not supported the message Not available is displayed Inlet Pole Sensor Threshold Information This command is only available for a three phase PDU except for an inline monitor PX2 3000 series This command syntax shows the specified inlet pole sensor s threshold related information show sensor inletpole lt n gt lt p gt
85. the Command Line Interface Setting the Gateway After selecting the static IP configuration mode you can use this command syntax to specify the gateway config network ipv4 gateway lt ip address gt Variables e lt ip address is the IP address of the gateway The value ranges from 0 0 0 0 to 255 255 255 255 Example The following command sets the IPv4 gateway to 255 255 255 0 config network ipv4 gateway 255 255 255 0 Setting the Primary DNS Server After selecting the static IP configuration mode you can use this command syntax to specify the primary DNS server config network ipv4 primaryDNSServer lt ip address gt Variables e lt ip address is the IP address of the primary DNS server The value ranges from 0 0 0 0 to 255 255 255 255 Example The following command determines that the primary DNS server is 192 168 84 30 config network ipv4 primaryDNSServer 192 168 84 30 zie Raritan Chapter 7 Using the Command Line Interface 224 Setting the Secondary DNS Server After selecting the static IP configuration mode you can use this command syntax to specify the secondary DNS server config network ipv4 secondaryDNSServer lt ip address gt Variables e ip address gt is the IP address of the secondary DNS server The value ranges from 0 0 0 0 to 255 255 255 255 Note Dominion PX supports a maximum of 3 DNS servers If two IPv4 DNS servers and two IPv6 DNS servers are avail
86. the Dominion PX For information on the serial port configuration see Step 2 of Initial Network Configuration on page 20 3 Press and release the Reset button of Dominion PX while pressing the Esc key of the keyboard several times in rapid succession A prompt gt should appear after about one second Type defaults to reset the Dominion PX to its factory defaults Wait until the Username prompt appears indicating the reset is complete zie Raritan zi Appendix C Resetting to Factory Defaults This diagram shows the location of the reset button on Zero U models Tete tee a inen Note HyperTerminal is available on Windows operating systems prior to Windows Vista For Windows Vista or later versions you may use PuTTY which is a free program you can download from the Internet See PuTTY s documentation for details on configuration Using the CLI Command zieRaritan The Command Line Interface CLI provides a reset command for restoring Dominion PX to factory defaults For information on CLI see Using the Command Line Interface on page 181 gt To reset to factory defaults using the CLI command 1 Connect a computer to the Dominion PX device over a serial connection 2 Launchaterminal emulation program such as HyperTerminal Kermit or PuTTY and open a window on the Dominion PX For information on the serial port configuration see Step 2 of Initial Network Configuration on page 20 3 Login
87. the certificate with a text editor copy and paste the content into the communications program Note The content to be copied from the CA certificate does NOT include the first line containing BEGIN CERTIFICATE and the final line containing END CERTIFICATE d To determine which IP protocol is enabled and which IP address returned by the DNS server is used configure the following parameters To set IP protocol Use this command network ip protocol protocol where protocol is v4Only for enabling IPv4 v6Only for enabling IPv6 or both for enabling both IPv4 and IPv6 protocols S Raritan Chapter 3 Installation and Configuration To set Use this command Which IP network ip address dnsResolverPreferenc returned by lt address gt the DNS where address is v4Addresses for IPv4 addresses or v6Addresses for IPv6 addresses server is used e If you enabled the IPv4 protocol in the previous step configure the IPv4 network parameters To set Use this command IP network ipv4 configuration ipConfigurationMode mode method where mode is either dhcp for auto configuration default or static for specifying a static IP address For the IPv4 DHCP configuration configure this parameter To set Use this command Preferred host network ipv4 name preferredHostName name optional where name is the preferred host name Tip To override the DHCP assigned IPv4 DNS servers
88. to access the remaining LDAP LDAPS servers in the list regardless of the user authentication result gt To re sort the LDAP server access list 1 Choose Device Settings Security Authentication The Authentication Settings dialog appears 2 Select the LDAP LDAPS server whose priority you want to change 109 110 Chapter 5 Using the Web Interface 3 Click Move up or Move down until the selected server reaches the desired position in the list 4 Click OK to save the changes Testing the LDAP Server Connection You can test the connection to any LDAP LDAPS server to verify the server accessibility or the validity of the authentication settings gt To test the connection to an LDAP LDAPS server 1 Choose Device Settings gt Security gt Authentication The Authentication Settings dialog appears Select the LDAP LDAPS server that you want to test Click Test Connection to start the connection test Editing the LDAP Server Settings If the configuration on any LDAP LDAPS server has been changed such as the port number bind DN and password you must modify the LDAP LDAPS settings on the Dominion PX device accordingly or the authentication fails To modify the LDAP authentication configuration Choose Device Settings gt Security gt Authentication The Authentication Settings dialog appears Select the LDAP LDAPS server that you want to edit Click Edit The Edit LDAP Server Configuration d
89. turn on all non critical outlets that were previously ON prior to the load shedding mode 125 126 Chapter 5 Using the Web Interface Note During the load shedding mode this icon appears on all non critical outlets on the Outlets page and you CANNOT turn on any of them Inlet and Circuit Breaker Management You can name each inlet and circuit breaker or monitor their status Naming the Inlet You can customize the inlet s name for your own purpose The customized name is followed by the label in parentheses Note In this context the label refers to the inlet number such as l1 gt To name the inlet 1 Ifthe PDU folder is not expanded expand it to show all components and component groups See Expanding the Tree on page 55 2 Click Inlet 11 in the Dominion PX Explorer pane and the Inlet l1 page opens in the right pane Click Setup The Inlet 11 Setup dialog appears Type a new name in the Name field Click OK to save the changes Naming Circuit Breakers You can name each circuit breaker for easily identifying them The customized name is followed by the label in parentheses Note In this context the label refers to the circuit breaker number such as C7 gt To name a circuit breaker 1 Expand the Overcurrent Protectors folder to show all circuit breakers in the Dominion PX Explorer pane See Expanding the Tree on page 55 2 Click the desired circuit breaker in the Dominion PX Explor
90. value 1 setting 2 value 2 setting 3 gt value 3 Example 1 Combination of IP Subnet Mask and Gateway Parameters The following multi command syntax configures IPv4 address subnet mask and gateway for the network connectivity simultaneously S18 sis Raritan Chapter 7 Using the Command Line Interface config network ipv4 ipAddress 192 168 84 225 subnetMask 255 255 255 0 gateway 192 168 84 0 config sensor zie Raritan Results e The IP address is set to 192 168 84 225 e The subnet mask is set to 255 255 255 0 e The gateway is set to 192 168 84 0 Example 2 Combination of Upper Critical and Upper Warning Settings The following multi command syntax simultaneously configures Upper Critical and Upper Warning thresholds for the RMS current of the 3rd circuit breaker ocp 3 current upperCritical disable upperWarning 20 Results e The Upper Critical threshold of the 3rd circuit breaker s RMS current is disabled e The Upper Warning threshold of the 3rd circuit breaker s RMS current is set to 20A and enabled at the same time Example 3 Combination of SSID and PSK Parameters This multi command syntax configures both of SSID and PSK parameters simultaneously for the wireless feature config network wireless SSID myssid PSK encryp_key Results e The SSID value is set to myssid e The PSK value is set to encryp_key Example 4 Combination of Upper Critical Upper Warning and Lower W
91. wireless authentication method is set to EAP you must configure EAP authentication parameters including outer authentication inner authentication EAP identity password and CA certificate Setting the Outer Authentication This command syntax determines the outer authentication protocol for the EAP config network wireless eapOuterAuthentication lt outer_auth gt Variables e The value of lt outer_auth gt is PEAP because Dominion PX only supports Protected Extensible Authentication Protocol PEAP as the outer authentication xi Raritan Chapter 7 Using the Command Line Interface Example The following command determines the outer authentication protocol for the EAP authentication is Protected Extensible Authentication Protocol PEAP config network wireless eapOuterAuthentication PEAP Setting the Inner Authentication This command syntax determines the inner authentication protocol for the EAP config network wireless eapInnerAuthentication inner auth Variables e The value of inner auth is MSCHAPVv2 because Dominion PX only supports Microsoft s Challenge Authentication Protocol Version 2 MSCHAPv2 as the inner authentication Example The following command determines the inner authentication protocol for the EAP authentication is MSCHAPv2 config f network wireless eapInnerAuthentication MSCHAPv2 Setting the EAP Identity This command syntax determines the EAP identity
92. with those you specify manually type this command network ipv4 overrideDNS option where option is enable or disable See the table below for the IPv4 commands for manually specifying DNS servers For the static IPv4 configuration configure these parameters zie Raritan Chapter 3 Installation and Configuration To set Static IPv4 address Subnet mask Gateway Primary DNS server Secondary DNS server optional Use this command network ipv4 ipAddress lt ip address gt where lt ip address gt is the IP address you want to assign network ipv4 subnetMask lt netmask gt where netmask is the subnet mask network ipv4 gateway lt ip address gt where lt ip address gt is the IP address of the gateway network ipv4 primaryDNSServer lt ip address gt where lt ip address gt is the IP address of the primary DNS server network ipv4 secondaryDNSServer lt ip address gt where lt ip address gt is the IP address of the secondary DNS server f If you enabled IPv6 in Step d configure the IPv6 network parameters To set IP configuration method Use this command network ipv6 ipConfigurationMode lt mode gt where mode is either automatic for auto configuration default or static for specifying a static IP address Tip To override the DHCP assigned IPv6 DNS servers with those you specify manually type this command network ipv6 overrideDNS op
93. 01 740 2428 1 04 1500 4921 1 15 2250 7382 1 26 363 364 Appendix F Additional Dominion PX Information Altitude meters Altitude feet Correction factor 3000 9842 1 38 Data for BTU Calculation The heat generated by the Dominion PX device differs according to the model you purchased To calculate the heat BTU hr use the following power data according to your model type in the BTU calculation formula Model name Maximum power Wait PX2 1nnn series 5 PX2 2nnn series 20 PX2 3nnn series 24 PX2 4nnn series 24 PX2 5nnn series 24 The letter n included in the model names represents a number CLI Command Applicability Not every CLI command applies to all Dominion PX PDUs because features vary from model to model For example PX2 4nnn series where n is a number are not implemented with the outlet switching capability so outlet switching commands are not applicable The tables in this appendix show the command applicability for diverse Dominion PX product lines In all tables e PX2 3k represents PX2 3000 series ranging from PX2 3000 to PX2 3999 e PX2 4k represents PX2 4000 series ranging from PX2 4000 to PX2 4999 e PX2 5k represents PX2 5000 series ranging from PX2 5000 to PX2 5999 Show Commands This table indicates the show commands applicability e Y applicable e N NOT applicable S Raritan Appendix F Additional Dominion PX Information show assetStrip n show assetStripMan
94. 1390 France Monday Friday 8 30 a m 5 p m GMT 1 CET Phone 33 1 47 56 20 39 Germany Monday Friday 8 30 a m 5 30 p m GMT 1 CET Phone 49 20 17 47 98 0 Email rg support raritan com gt Melbourne Australia Monday Friday 9 00 a m 6 p m local time Phone 61 3 9866 6887 gt Taiwan Monday Friday 9 a m 6 p m GMT 5 Standard 4 Daylight Phone 886 2 8919 1333 Email support apac raritan com
95. 30 131 150 151 155 158 159 160 F Filling Out the Equipment Setup Worksheet 14 Firewall Control 235 Firmware Upgrade 164 168 Forcing a Password Change 294 Forcing HTTPS Encryption 72 90 101 Full Disaster Recovery 171 G Gathering the LDAP Information 106 Global LED Color Settings 312 314 315 H Help Command 183 History Buffer Length 201 How to Connect Differential Air Pressure Sensors 33 How to Use the Calendar 76 HTTPS Access 240 Identifying Environmental Sensors 149 151 Idle Timeout 242 Initial Network Configuration 20 50 57 67 342 343 Inlet and Circuit Breaker Management 126 Inlet Configuration Commands 254 Inlet Information 188 Inlet Pole Sensor Threshold Information 194 371 Index Inlet Sensor Threshold Information 193 Inline Monitors 331 Inline Monitor s LED Display 331 Inline Monitor s Web Interface 332 Installation and Configuration 13 Installing a CA Signed Certificate 103 Installing Cable Retention Clips on Outlets Optional 26 Installing Cable Retention Clips on the Inlet Optional xiii 15 Installing Existing Key and Certificate Files 104 Integration xiii 353 Introduction 1 Introduction to the Web Interface 53 IP Configuration 184 L LAN Interface Settings 185 Layout 178 LDAP Configuration Illustration 109 345 LED Display 41 331 LEDs for Measurement Units
96. 31 Automatically Completing a Command 329 B Beeper 48 Before You Begin 13 Browser Defined Shortcut Menu 63 Browsing through the Online Help 172 Raritan C Certificate Signing Request 101 Changing a Specific LED s Color Settings 160 Changing a User s Password 292 Changing an Outlet s Default State 253 Changing the Circuit Breaker Name 255 Changing the Column 61 Changing the Cycling Power Off Period 118 Changing the Default Policy 90 91 97 98 Changing the HTTP Port 229 Changing the HTTP S Settings 72 Changing the HTTPS Port 229 Changing the Inlet Name 255 Changing the LAN Duplex Mode 228 Changing the LAN Interface Speed 228 Changing the Measurement Units xiii 78 164 299 Changing the Outlet Name 252 Changing the Outlet Specific Cycling Power Off Period 118 119 Changing the PDU Name 204 Changing the PDU Defined Cycling Power Off Period 118 119 Changing the Role List View 89 Changing the Role s 298 Changing the Sensor Description 260 Changing the Sensor Name 256 Changing the Sorting 62 146 148 Changing the SSH Configuration 231 Changing the SSH Port 231 Changing the SSH Settings 73 Changing the Telnet Configuration 230 Changing the Telnet Port 230 Changing the Telnet Settings 73 Changing the UDP Port 308 Changing the User List View 87 Changing the View of a List 61 66 87 89 122 145 167 171
97. 42 43 332 Listing TCP Connections 167 Load Shedding Configuration Commands 318 Load Shedding Settings 199 Logging in to CLI 180 Logging in to the Web Interface 50 Logging out of CLI 330 Login 50 Login Limitation 240 Logout 52 Logout Button 59 Lowercase Character Requirement 245 M MAC Address 16 361 Managing Environmental Sensors 149 150 Managing Event Logging 144 Managing Firewall Rules 236 Managing Role Based Access Control Rules e 249 Manual Mode 43 46 331 Marking All Outlets 123 Marking an Outlet 124 Maximum Ambient Operating Temperature 14 336 Maximum Password Length 245 Menus 54 372 Minimum Password Length 244 Modifying a Firewall Rule 238 Modifying a Role 85 86 88 304 Modifying a Role Based Access Control Rule 250 Modifying a User Profile 52 86 88 291 Modifying a User s Personal Data 293 Modifying an Action 75 143 Modifying an Event Rule 142 Modifying the Firewall Control Parameters 235 Modifying the IPv4 Settings 70 Modifying the IPv6 Settings 71 Modifying the Network Configuration 66 Modifying the Network Interface Settings 66 Modifying the Network Service Settings 72 180 182 Modifying the Network Settings xiii 57 69 347 Modifying the Role Based Access Control Parameters 248 Modifying the SNMPv3 Settings 295 Monitoring All Outlets 112 Monitoring an Outlet 113 Mo
98. 5 Using the Web Interface Modifying an Action An existing action can be changed so that all event rules where this action is in volved change their behavior accordingly Exception The built in action System Event Log Action is not user configurable GL e uo 9 To modify an action Choose Device Settings Event Rules The Event Rule Settings dialog appears Click the Actions tab Select the action that you want to modify from the left list Make necessary changes to the information shown Click Save to save the changes Note If you do not click Save before quitting the current settings page a message appears Then click Yes to save the changes Discard to abort the changes or Cancel to return to the current settings page Click Close to quit the dialog Deleting an Event Rule or Action If any event rule or action is obsolete simply remove it Note You cannot delete the built in event rules and actions To delete an event rule or action Choose Device Settings Event Rules The Event Rule Settings dialog appears To delete an event rule a Ensure the Rules tab is selected If not click the Rules tab b Select the desired rule from the left list and click Delete Rule c Amessage appears prompting you to confirm the operation Click Yes to confirm the deletion To delete an action a Click the Actions tab b Select the desired action from the left list and click Delete Ac
99. 68 94 222 24 e policy is one of the options accept drop or reject Option Description accept Accepts traffic from the specified IP address es drop Discards traffic from the specified IP address es without sending any failure notification to the source host reject Discards traffic from the specified IP address es and an ICMP message is sent to the source host for failure notification Example The following command modifies all contents of the 5th rule config security ipAccessControl rule modify 5 ipMask 192 168 84 123 24 policy accept Results e The IP address is changed to 192 168 84 123 and the subnet mask to 255 255 255 0 e The policy now becomes accept Raritan d Chapter 7 Using the Command Line Interface Deleting a Firewall Rule This command removes a specific rule from the list config security ipAccessControl rule delete lt rule_number gt Variables e rule number is the number of the existing rule that you want to remove Example The following command removes the 5th rule from the IP access control list config f security ipAccessControl rule delete 5 HTTPS Access This command determines whether the HTTPS access to the Dominion PX web interface is forced If yes all HTTP access attempts are automatically directed to HTTPS config f security enforceHttpsForWebAccess option Variables e option is one of the options enable or disable Option D
100. 8 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 t2 ox uw FZ Today gt To select a date using the calendar 1 To change the year shown in the calendar a Click M which is next to the year and a list of years and months is displayed Jan Jul m 4d Feb Aug 2005 2010 Mar Sep 2006 2011 Apr Oct 2007 2012 May Nov 2008 2013 Jun Dec 2008 2014 b Select the desired year from the list to the right and click OK If the list does not show the desired year click 4 or gt to show additional years 2 Tochange the month shown in the calendar do either of the following Click Ell or EM on the top of the calendar to switch between months Tip You can press Ctrl Right arrow or Ctrl Left arrow to switch between months 77 Chapter 5 Using the Web Interface Click M to show a list of years and months Select the desired month from the list to the left and click OK Tip You can press Ctrl Up arrow or Ctrl Down arrow to switch between years 3 To select a date do either of the following Click Today if you want to select today Note On the calendar the date for today is marked with a red frame Click any date on the calendar Specifying the Device Altitude You must specify the Dominion PX device s altitude above sea level if a Raritan differential air pressure sensor is attached This is because the device s altitude is associated with the altit
101. A Note about Enabling Thresholds sss Chapter 7 Using the Command Line Interface About the Interface ssssssssee nnne nnns Logging im to CLl ec With HyperTerminal 2 n eine iot Ein o rese erp rein Eee it With SSH ot Teletrece eee eo thee tete te eie tee teen eres Different CLI Modes and Prompts sssssssseeess Closing a Serial Connection sse Help Comma sacs fie ss sdecsaties Aivena sac ttdezacd mcevyead aiatadinectn ealtaaened ne ape adeeeang SHOWING Information etri tectum eaae naai vn ener ieee nsa Network ConfigUratlOn cierre certet neret ne rentis IP GonflgutatiOric ias eire reds aire re rer uei RR HE Devas LAN Interface Settings Networking Mode ori ote cen rne epe teas Wireless Configuration siseses sideads iaaa Network Service Settings reiecit n irse iens editus PDU Configuration uii errichtet Elenco a FRE aE Outlet Information aite erect oe ete pe eee ci eve cies Inlet Informatio Masais iaceo dre o eerte Dutton eet ok esee trente Circuit Breaker Information sese Environmental Sensor Information eeeseeeeceeeee Outlet Sensor Threshold Information eee Outlet Pole Sensor Threshold Information Inlet Sensor Threshold Information esses Inlet Pole Sensor Threshold Information
102. Active power sensor Apparent power sensor Power factor sensor Active energy sensor Unbalanced load sensor 275 Chapter 7 Using the Command Line Interface Note If the requested sensor type is not supported the message Not available is displayed e option is one of the options enable disable or a numeric value Option Description enable Enables the upper warning threshold for the specified inlet pole sensor disable Disables the upper warning threshold for the specified inlet pole sensor A numeric value Sets a value for the upper warning threshold of the specified inlet pole sensor and enables this threshold at the same time Example The following command sets the Upper Warning threshold for the pole 2 L2 L3 voltage of the inlet 1 to 180V It also enables the upper warning threshold if this threshold has not been enabled yet config sensor inletpole 1 L2 voltage upperWarning 180 Setting the Lower Critical Threshold for an Inlet Pole This command syntax configures the Lower Critical threshold of an inlet pole config sensor inletpole lt n gt lt p gt lt sensor type gt lowerCritical lt option gt Variables e n is the number of the inlet whose pole sensors you want to configure e lt p gt is the label of the inlet pole that you want to configure Pole Label Current sensor Voltage sensor lt p gt 1 L1 L1 L1 L2 L2 L2 L2 L3 L3 L3 L3 L1 zi sis Raritan Chapter 7 Using t
103. CURRENT O fA VOLTAGEO vi POWER Iw a uB LOAD O uL SENSOR O OUTLET LINE C8 UB RESET 2U models DUTLET LINE CE US CURRENT O o 141 RESET VOLTAGE C BOWN ivi v pawr O kW n Losa O t sensor O The LED display consists of e A row displaying three digits e A row displaying two digits e Up and Down buttons e Five LEDs for measurement units 41 42 Chapter 4 Using the PDU Three Digit Row The three digit row shows the readings for the selected component Values that may appear include e Current voltage or active power of the selected outlet e Current of the selected circuit breaker e Active power or unbalanced load of the inlet e Current and voltage of the selected line Note L1 voltage refers to the L1 L2 or L1 N voltage L2 voltage refers to the L2 L3 or L2 N voltage and L3 voltage refers to the L3 L1 or L3 N voltage e The text FuP which indicates that the Firmware uPgrade is being performed e The text CbE which indicates the circuit breaker associated with the selected outlet has tripped LEDs for Measurement Units Five small LED indicators are on the LED display four measurement units LEDs and one Sensor LED The measurement units vary according to the readings that appear in the three digit row They are e Amp A for current e Volt V for voltage e Kilowatt kW for active power e Percentage 96 of the unbalanced load One of the measurement unit LE
104. Contact to John Krause config ft network services snmp sysContact John Krause Setting the sysName Value This command syntax sets the SNMP sysName MIB II value config f network services snmp sysName value Variables e value is a string comprising 0 to 255 alphanumeric characters Example The following command sets the SNMP MIB II sysName to Win7 system config network services snmp sysName Win7 system Seiting the sysLocation Value This command syntax sets the SNMP sysLocation MIB II value config network services snmp sysLocation lt value gt Variables e value is a string comprising 0 to 255 alphanumeric characters Example The following command sets the SNMP MIB II sysLocation to New TAIPEI config f network services snmp sysLocation New TAIPEI Security Configuration Commands A security configuration command begins with security 235 Chapter 7 Using the Command Line Interface Firewall Control You can manage firewall control features through the CLI The firewall control lets you set up rules that permit or disallow access to the Dominion PX device from specific or a range of IP addresses A firewall configuration command begins with security ipAccessControl Modifying the Firewall Control Parameters There are different commands for modifying firewall control parameters gt To enable or disable the firewall control feature use this command syntax config sec
105. D Server 346 Step C Configure LDAP Authentication on the Dominion PX Device 347 Step D Configure User Groups on the Dominion PX Device 349 Strong Passwords 243 Supported Web Browsers 49 Supported Wireless LAN Configuration 19 Switching an Outlet e 115 Switching Multiple or All Outlets 114 T Testing the LDAP Server Connection 110 Testing the Network Connectivity 327 The Dominion PX MIB 177 The Yellow or Red Highlighted Reading 60 64 113 114 127 128 Three Digit Row 42 Tracing the Network Route 166 Tracing the Route 328 Turning Off the Outlet s 321 Turning On the Outlet s e 320 Two Digit Row 43 U Unblocking a User 95 323 Unmanaging Environmental Sensors 151 158 Unpacking the Product and Components 13 Unrepeatable Historic Passwords 247 Updating the Asset Sensor Firmware 171 Updating the Dominion PX Firmware 169 Uppercase Character Requirement 245 User Blocking 242 User Configuration Commands 290 User Management 82 Using SNMP 170 174 Using the CLI Command 324 343 Using the Command Line Interface xiii 72 154 180 343 Using the PDU 37 Using the Reset Button 342 Using the Web Interface 20 49 332 V Viewing Connected Users 145 Viewing Firmware Update History 170 Viewing Sensor Data 154 375 Index Viewing the Communication Log 58 167 Viewing the Dashboard 64 Viewing the Local Event L
106. DU 355 Connecting Asset Sensors to Dominion PX 35 Connecting Dominion PX to Your Network 18 66 68 Connecting Environmental Sensors Optional xiii 28 149 Connecting the Asset Management Sensor Optional 34 40 159 Connecting the PDU to a Computer 17 Connecting the PDU to a Power Source 15 Connecting Third Party Detectors Switches to DPX CC2 TR 30 Connection Ports e xiii 39 Contact Closure Sensor LEDs 32 Copying a Dominion PX Configuration 164 370 Copying Configurations with Bulk Configuration 162 Creating a Certificate Signing Request 101 Creating a Role 85 87 301 Creating a Self Signed Certificate 103 Creating a User Profile 50 82 86 87 88 165 175 290 Creating Actions 134 Creating an Event Rule 134 Creating Firewall Rules 90 92 Creating Role Based Access Control Rules 97 98 Creating Rules xiii 136 D Dashboard Page 333 Data for BTU Calculation 362 Data Pane 59 Deleting a Firewall Rule 239 Deleting a Role 89 306 Deleting a Role Based Access Control Rule e 252 Deleting a User Profile 86 300 Deleting an Event Rule or Action 143 Deleting Firewall Rules 94 Deleting Ping Monitoring Settings 148 Deleting Role Based Access Control Rules 100 Deleting the LDAP Server Settings 110 Describing the Sensor Location 152 154 Device Management 64 Diagnostic Commands 325 Different CLI Modes and Prompts 181
107. Disabling Load Shedding This section only applies to PDUs with the outlet switching function This command syntax determines whether the load shedding feature is enabled loadshedding lt option gt After performing the above command Dominion PX prompts you to confirm the operation Press y to confirm or n to abort the operation To skip the confirmation step you can add the y parameter to the end of the command so that the operation is executed immediately loadshedding lt option gt y Variables e option is one of the options enable or disable Option Description enable The load shedding feature is enabled disable The load shedding feature is disabled Example The following command enables the load shedding feature config f loadshedding enable Power Control Operations zie Raritan This section only applies to PDUs with the outlet switching function Outlets on the Dominion PX device can be turned on or off or power cycled through the CLI You must perform this operation in the administrator mode See Different CLI Modes and Prompts on page 184 321 Chapter 7 Using the Command Line Interface Turning On the Outlet s This section only applies to PDUs with the outlet switching function This command syntax turns on one or multiple outlets power outlets lt numbers gt on To quicken the operation you can add the parameter y to the end of the command which conf
108. Ds will be lit to indicate the unit for the value currently shown in the three digit row The Sensor LED is lit only when Dominion PX detects the physical connection of any environmental sensor The five LEDs look similar to this diagram but may slightly vary according to the model you purchased PHBREMS Oo MPLIAGE Oo ch UB pone O SENSOR O 3ie Raritan Raritan Chapter 4 Using the PDU Two Digit Row The two digit row shows the number of the currently selected outlet line or circuit breaker Values that may appear include e Two digit numbers This indicates the selected outlet For example 03 indicates outlet 3 e Cx This indicates the selected circuit breaker where x is the circuit breaker number For example C1 represents Circuit Breaker 1 e n This indicates the neutral line on a three phase Y wired PDU e Lx This indicates the selected line of a single inlet PDU where x is the line number For example L2 represents Line 2 Note For a single phase model L1 current represents the Unit Current e AP This indicates the selected inlet s active power e UL This represents the selected inlet or outlet s Unbalanced Load which is only available for a three phase PDU Automatic Mode When left alone the LED display cycles through the line readings and circuit breaker readings at intervals of 10 seconds as available for your Dominion PX This is the Automatic Mode Manual Mode You can press the Up o
109. EnergyWise Configuration xiii 81 Setting the Gateway 222 225 Setting the History Buffer Length 316 Setting the Initialization Delay 120 Setting the Inlet Pole s Assertion Timeout 279 Setting the Inlet Pole s Deassertion Hysteresis e 277 Setting the Inlet s Assertion Timeout 272 Setting the Inlet s Deassertion Hysteresis 271 Setting the Inlet s Lower Critical Threshold 269 Setting the Inlet s Lower Warning Threshold e 270 Setting the Inlet s Upper Critical Threshold 267 Setting the Inlet s Upper Warning Threshold e 268 Setting the Inner Authentication 216 Setting the Inrush Guard Delay 121 Setting the Inrush Guard Delay Time 208 Setting the IP Address 221 225 Setting the IP Configuration Mode 220 224 Setting the LAN Interface Parameters 227 Setting the LED Operation Mode 314 Setting the Lower Critical Threshold for a Circuit Breaker 282 Setting the Lower Critical Threshold for an Inlet Pole 275 Setting the Lower Warning Threshold for a Circuit Breaker 283 374 Setting the Lower Warning Threshold for an Inlet Pole 276 Setting the Network Service Parameters 229 Setting the Networking Mode 211 Setting the Outer Authentication 215 Setting the Outlet Power On Sequence 121 205 Setting the Outlet Power On Sequence Delay 205 Setting the Outlet s Assertion Timeout 266 Setting the Outlet s Deassertion Hysteresis 265 Setting the Outlet s Lower Critic
110. Enter new password 5 Re type the new password for confirmation and press Enter when the following prompt appears Re type new password Role Configuration Commands A role configuration command begins with role zie Raritan s Chapter 7 Using the Command Line Interface Creating a Role This command syntax creates a new role with a list of semicolon separated privileges assigned to the role config role create lt name gt lt privilegel gt lt privilege2 gt lt privilege3 gt If a specific privilege contains any arguments that privilege should be followed by a colon and the argument s config role create lt name gt lt privilegel gt lt argument1l gt lt argument2 gt lt privilege2 gt lt argument1 gt lt argument2 gt lt privilege3 gt lt argument1 gt lt argument2 gt Variables e lt name gt is a string comprising up to 32 ASCII printable characters e lt privilege1 gt lt privilege2 gt lt privilege3 gt and the like are names of the privileges assigned to the role Separate each privilege with a semi colon See All Privileges on page 304 e argumenti lt argument2 gt and the like are arguments set for a particular privilege For example the switchOutlet privilege requires arguments Separate a privilege and its argument with a colon All Privileges This table lists all privileges Note that available privileges vary according to the model you purchase
111. Highlighted Reading on page 60 Monitoring an Outlet To view a particular outlet s detailed information follow this procedure gt To monitor an outlet 1 Ifthe Outlets folder is not expanded expand it to show all outlets See Expanding the Tree on page 55 2 Click the outlet you want in the Dominion PX Explorer pane and the outlet s details are shown in the right pane including Outlet label number Outlet name Outlet status on off Note The outlet status is not available for a Dominion PX device without the outlet switching function Line pair associated with this outlet Circuit breaker that protects this outlet Outlet state on device startup Power off period during power cycle Outlet sensor readings RMS voltage V RMS current A Active power W Apparent power VA Power factor Active energy Wh The outlet readings turn to zero if the associated circuit breaker trips zie Raritan us 114 Chapter 5 Using the Web Interface Note Outlet sensor readings are NOT available on the models without the outlet metering function such as PX2 2nnn series where n is a number Note If your Dominion PX device is not implemented with any circuit breaker the overcurrent protector information is not available Note If a sensor reading row is colored it means the sensor reading already crosses one of the thresholds or the circuit breaker has tripped See The Yellow or Red Hi
112. IT equipment should be powered up gt To set the outlet power on sequence 1 Trigger the Outlet Sequence Setup dialog by doing either of the following Click the Outlets folder and the Outlets page opens in the right pane Click Sequence Setup 121 Chapter 5 Using the Web Interface Click the PDU folder and then the Setup button in the Outlet Sequence section Note The PDU folder is named my PX by default The name changes after customizing the device name See Naming the PDU on page 66 The Outlet Sequence Setup dialog appears with the current power up sequence indicated by the outlet order in the list 2 Tochange the priority of an outlet select it from the list and click one of the following buttons 0 Moves the outlet to the top of the list making it the first outlet to receive power 2 Moves the outlet up one position in the list 9 Moves the outlet down one position in the list Moves the outlet to the bottom of the list making it the final outlet to receive power c Restores the list to the default power up sequence that is the ascending order 3 You can re sort the list or change the columns displayed See Changing the View of a List on page 61 Note that re sorting the list makes changes to the outlet power up sequence 4 Click OK to save the changes Next time when power cycling the PDU it will turn on all outlets based on the new order of the list
113. Line Interface config security strongPasswords enforceAtLeastOneLowerCaseCharacter lt option gt Variables e option is one of the options enable or disable Option Description enable At least one lowercase character is required disable No lowercase character is required Example This command syntax determines that a password must include at least a lowercase character config f security strongPasswords enforceAtLeastOneLowerCaseCharacter enable Uppercase Character Requirement This command syntax determines whether a strong password includes at least a uppercase character config f security strongPasswords enforceAtLeastOneUpperCaseCharacter option Variables e option is one of the options enable or disable Option Description enable At least one uppercase character is required disable No uppercase character is required Example This command determines a password must comprise at least one uppercase character config f security strongPasswords enforceAtLeastOneUpperCaseCharacter enable Numeric Character Requirement This command syntax determines whether a strong password includes at least a numeric character sis Raritan Chapter 7 Using the Command Line Interface config security strongPasswords enforceAtLeastOneNumericCharacter lt option gt Variables e option is one of the options enable or disable Option Description enable At least one numeric char
114. MIB The SNMP MIB file for asset management ENERGYWISE MIB The SNMP MIB file for Cisco EnergyWise management Click Save to save the file onto your computer S Raritan Chapter 6 Using SNMP gt To download the file from the Device Information dialog Choose Maintenance gt Device Information The Device Information dialog appears 2 Click the download link in the PDU MIB ASSETMANAGEMENT MIB or ENERGYWISE MIB field to download the desired SNMP MIB file PDU MIB The SNMP MIB file for Dominion PX s power management ASSETMANAGEMENT MIB The SNMP MIB file for asset management ENERGYWISE MIB The SNMP MIB file for Cisco EnergyWise management 3 Click Save to save the file onto your computer Layout Opening the MIB reveals the custom objects that describe the Dominion PX system at the unit level as well as at the individual outlet level As standard these objects are first presented at the beginning of the file listed under their parent group The objects then appear again individually defined and described in detail PD MIB Notepad Fie Edt Famy View bep neasurenentsGroup OBJECT GROUP ONJECTS 4 measurements nitSensorisfheailable neasurenentsUnitSensorState neasurenentslnitSensorlalue neasurenmentsinitSensorTineStamp neasurementsInletSensorisQvailable neasurementsInletSensorState neasurenentsInletSensorValue neasurenentsInletSensorTineStamp neasurenentsInletPoleSensorishvai
115. MP v3 protocol is enabled disable The SNMP v3 protocol is disabled Example The following command enables the SNMP v3 protocol config f network services snmp v3 enable zie Raritan dn 234 Chapter 7 Using the Command Line Interface Setting the SNMP Read Community This command syntax sets the SNMP read only community string config f network services snmp readCommunity lt string gt Variables e string is a string comprising 4 to 64 ASCII printable characters e The string CANNOT include spaces Example This command syntax sets the SNMP read only community string to public config ft network services snmp readCommunity public Setting the SNMP Write Community This command syntax sets the SNMP read write community string config f network services snmp writeCommunity lt string gt Variables e lt string gt is a string comprising 4 to 64 ASCII printable characters e The string CANNOT include spaces Example The following command sets the SNMP read write community string to private config network services snmp writeCommunity private Setting the sysContact Value This command syntax sets the SNMP sysContact MIB II value config network services snmp sysContact lt value gt Variables e value is a string comprising 0 to 255 alphanumeric characters SE Raritan Raritan Chapter 7 Using the Command Line Interface Example The following command sets the SNMP MIB II sys
116. OUTLET 17 OUTLET 18 MODEL MODEL MODEL SERIAL NUMBER SERIAL NUMBER SERIAL NUMBER USE USE USE OUTLET 19 OUTLET 20 OUTLET 21 MODEL MODEL MODEL SERIAL NUMBER SERIAL NUMBER SERIAL NUMBER 342 Raritan Appendix B Equipment Setup Worksheet OUTLET 22 OUTLET 23 OUTLET 24 MODEL MODEL MODEL SERIAL NUMBER SERIAL NUMBER SERIAL NUMBER zie Raritan Types of adapters Types of cables Name of software program 343 Appendix C Resetting to Factory Defaults For security reasons the Dominion PX device can be reset to factory defaults only at the local serial console Important Exercise caution before resetting Dominion PX to its factory defaults This erases any existing information and customized settings such as user profiles and threshold values You can use either the reset button or the command line interface CLI to reset Dominion PX In This Chapter Using the Reset Butomus erem pe triti tet d ertnn 344 Using the GLI ComliTiand u ccce tet ers nep eoe eres 345 Using the Reset Button This section describes how to reset the Dominion PX device via the reset button gt To reset to factory defaults using the reset button 1 Connect a computer to the Dominion PX device over a serial connection 2 Launch a terminal emulation program such as HyperTerminal Kermit or PuTTY and open a window on
117. QR MA8ECT gzMjk3MDgyM4ACBSAwDQY DVROKBAY wBAMCBkAwCw Y JKoZIhvcNAQEEA4GB AH2y1VCEw A4zaxXzSYZJTTUi3uawbbFiS2yxHvgf28 8JsOOHXk1H1w2d6qOHH21 X82tZXd 0JtGOg1T9usFFBDvYK8OOebgz P5ELJnBL2 atObEuJy 12ZZOpBDWINR3 WKkDNLCGITkCKpOF5EWIrVDwh54NNevkCQRZita z4IBO END CERTIFICATE 5 Select and copy the contents between the starting line BEGIN CERTIFICATE and the ending line END CERTIFICATE as illustrated below zie Raritan di Chapter 7 Using the Command Line Interface MIICjTCCAfigAwIBAgIEMaYgRzALBgkqhkiG9wOBAQQwRTELMAk GAIlUEBhMCVVMXxNjAOBgNVBAoTLU5hdGlvbmFsIEFlcm9uYXVOaW NzIGFuZCBTcGFjZSBBZGlpbmlzdHJhdGlvbjAmFxE5NjA1MjgxM zObMDUrMDgwMBCROTgwNTIA4MTMOOTA1KzAA4MDAwZZzEL kGAlUE BhMCVVMxNjAOBgNVBAOoTLU5hdGlvbmFsIEFlcm9uYXVOaWNzIGFE uZCBTcGFjZSBBZGlpbmlzdHJhdGlvbjEgMAkGA1UEB Ew YDVOODEwxTdGV2ZSBTY2hvY2gwWDALBgkqhkiG9wOBAQEDSQAw gJBALrAwyYdgxmzNP tsOUyf6BpmiJYktU w4NG67ULaNA4B5Cn Z7k57s903YY3LecETgO5iOHmkwlYDTL2fTgVfwOCAQOjgaswgag wZAYDVROZAOQH BFowWDBWMFOXxCZzAJBgNVBAYTAlVTMTYwNAYDVO OKEylOYXRpb25hbCBBZXJvbmFl1dGljcyBhbmOgU3BhY2UgOWRta W5pc3RyYXRpb24xDTALBgNVBAMTBENSTDEwFwYDVROBAQH BAOw C4AJODMy OT cwODEWMBgGA1UdAgQRMA8ECTgzMjk3MDgyM4ACBSA wDQYDVROKBAYwBAMCBkAwCwYJKoZ IhvcNAQEEA4GBAH2y1VCEw A4zaXzSYZJTTUi3uawbbFiS2yxHvgf28 8Js0OHXk1H1w2d6qOH H21X82tZXd 0JtGO0glT9usFFBDvYK80O0ebgz P5ELJnBL2 atOb EuJylZZOpBDWINR3WkDNLCGiTkCKpOF5EWIrVDwh54NNevkCORZ ita z4IBO E PS Z Qupmost E H lt El Ww
118. RGB value of a color in the accompanying text box 6 Click OK to save the changes Displaying the Asset Sensor Information The hardware and software information of the connected asset sensor is available through the web interface gt To display the asset sensor information 1 Choose Maintenance Device Information The Device Information dialog appears Click the Asset Strips tab where the asset sensor data is displayed Click Close to quit the dialog Hs Raritan Chapter 5 Using the Web Interface Copying Configurations with Bulk Configuration Raritan The Bulk Configuration feature lets you save the settings of a configured Dominion PX device to your PC You can use this configuration file to e Copy that configuration to other Dominion PX devices of the same model e Restore the settings of the same Dominion PX device to previous configuration Users saving and copying Dominion PX configurations require the Administrator Privileges 3 Bulk Configuration Save Bulk Configuration x Download Bulk Configuration Copy Bulk Configuration Bulk Configuration File r TAN Upload amp Resiore Bulk Configuration Close 163 Chapter 5 Using the Web Interface Saving a Dominion PX Configuration A source device is an already configured Dominion PX device that is used to create a configuration file containing the settings that can
119. This Chapter Power IQ Configuration essent 355 Dominion KX Il Configuration for PX2 5000 Series 357 RF Code Energy Monitoring Solution sssssssss 362 Power IQ Configuration zie Raritan Raritan s Power IQ is a software application that collects and manages the data from different PDUs installed in your server room or data center With this software you can e Do bulk configuration for multiple PDUs e Name outlets on different PDUs e Switch on off outlets on outlet switching capable PDUs For more information on Power IQ see either of the following e Power IQ User Guide This is available on the Raritan website s Firmware and Documentation section http www raritan com support firmware and documentation e Power IQ Online Help This is available on the Product Online Help section http www raritan com support online help Adding PDUs to Power IQ Management Once Power IQ is configured add Dominion PX or other PDUs to its management Power IQ can then gather data from these PDUs You can also add PDUs to Power IQ by uploading a CSV file containing the information See Adding PDUs in Bulk with CSV Files in the Power IQ User Guide To add PDUs to Power IQ management Click the PDUs tab then click Add Enter the IP address of the PDU If the PDU is in a daisy chained configuration or console server configuration enter the PDU s position nu
120. This chapter explains how to use the Dominion PX device It describes the LEDs and ports on the PDU and explains how to use the LED display panel It also explains how the circuit breaker overcurrent protector works and when the beeper sounds In This Chapter Panel Gombpohients sc tetti ccd REM se tu pokes aaa a aN ai 37 CIRCUIT Breakers acini etre e n a RR SERERE es xu EE Eu aEE 46 zr EL 48 Panel Components Dominion PX comes in Zero U 1U and 2U sizes All types of models come with the following components on the outer panels e Power cord e Outlets e Connection ports e LED display e Reset button Power Cord Most of Raritan PDUs come with an installed power cord which is ready to be plugged into an appropriate receptacle for receiving electricity Such devices cannot be rewired by the user Connect each Dominion PX device to an appropriately rated branch circuit See the label or nameplate affixed to your Dominion PX device for appropriate input ratings or range of ratings There is no power switch on the Dominion PX device To power cycle the PDU unplug it from the branch circuit wait 10 seconds and then plug it back in Outlets The total number of outlets varies from model to model zie Raritan 2 38 Chapter 4 Using the PDU LED state Not lit Red Red flashing Green Green flashing Red and Green flashing alternatively Cycling through Red Green and Yell
121. U defined power off period determines how long it takes for all outlets to turn on after they are turned OFF during the power cycle The default PDU defined power off period is 10 seconds 10 s Note To set a different power off period on a particular outlet see Changing the Outlet Specific Cycling Power Off Period on page 119 gt To set the power off period for all outlets 1 Click the PDU folder Note The PDU folder is named my PX by default The name changes after customizing the device name See Naming the PDU on page 66 Click Setup in the Settings section The Pdu Setup dialog appears In the Power off period during power cycle field click the drop down arrow and select an option from the list Valid range is zero second to one hour Time units in the list are explained below S second s min minute s h hour s You can also type a value if the desired time is not listed For example type 15 s if you want a 15 second delay 4 Click OK to save the changes S Raritan zie Raritan Chapter 5 Using the Web Interface Tip When there are a large number of outlets set the value to a lower number so that you can avoid a long wait before all the outlets are available again Changing the Outlet Specific Cycling Power Off Period This section only applies to PDUs with the outlet switching function When the power cycling occurs the default power off period of each outlet follows the PD
122. U defined setting You can adjust the power off period of a particular outlet so that it is turned back on after a different power off period Setting the power off period for a particular outlet to a value other than PDU defined overrides the PDU defined setting on that outlet gt To set the power off period for a specific outlet 1 Ifthe Outlets folder is not expanded expand it to show all outlets See Expanding the Tree on page 55 2 Click the outlet you want in the Dominion PX Explorer pane The page specific to that outlet opens in the right pane 3 Click Setup in the Settings section The setup dialog for the selected outlet appears Tip When the Outlets folder is selected you can also trigger the same dialog by highlighting the outlet on the Outlets page and then clicking Setup 4 Inthe Power off period during power cycle field click the drop down arrow and select an option from the list Valid range is zero second to one hour Time units in the list are explained below S second s min minute s h hour s To make the outlet s power off period identical to the PDU defined setting select the PDU defined option See Changing the PDU Defined Cycling Power Off Period on page 118 Tip The information in parentheses following the option PDU defined indicates the current PDU defined selection You can also type a value if the desired time is not listed For example type 15 s if you want a
123. Unit on page 317 and Setting an LED Mode for a Rack Unit on page 317 to set different LED settings Example The following command allows the rack unit 25 on the asset sensor 1 to have a different LED color and mode config f rackUnit 1 25 LEDOperationMode manual 2 sis Raritan zie Raritan Chapter 7 Using the Command Line Interface Setting an LED Color for a Rack Unit This command syntax sets the LED color for a specific rack unit on the specified asset sensor You need to set a rack unit s LED color only when the LED operation mode of this rack unit has been set to manual config rackUnit lt n gt lt rack_unit gt LEDColor lt color gt Variables e n is the connected asset sensor s ID number shown on the Asset Management page e rack unit is the ID number of the rack unit whose LED mode you want to configure The ID number is shown on the Asset Strip page e Color is the hexadecimal RGB value of a color in HTML format The color variable ranges from 000000 to FFFFFF Note A rack unit s LED color setting overrides the global LED color setting on it See Global LED Color Settings on page 314 Example The following command sets the LED color of the rack unit 25 on the asset sensor 1 to PINK that is FFOOFF config rackUnit 1 25 LEDColor FFOOFF Setting an LED Mode for a Rack Unit This command syntax sets the LED mode for a specific rack unit on the specified asset sen
124. Web Interface Field Key Length Self Sign Validity in days Type this information Select the key length bits from the drop down list in this field A larger key length enhances the security but slows down the Dominion PX device s response Ensure this checkbox is selected which indicates that you are creating a self signed certificate This field appears after the Self Sign checkbox is selected Type the number of days for which the self signed certificate is valid in this field Note All fields in the Subject section are mandatory except for the Organization Organizational Unit and Email Address fields A password is not required for a self signed certificate so the Challenge and Confirm Challenge fields disappear after the Self Sign checkbox is selected 4 Click Create New SSL Key to create both the self signed certificate and private key This may take several minutes to complete 5 You can also do any of the following Click Install Key and Certificate to immediately install the self signed certificate and private key When any confirmation and security messages appear click Yes to continue Tip To verify whether the certificate has been installed successfully click the Active SSL Certificate tab later To download the self signed certificate or private key click Download Certificate or Download Key You are prompted to open or save the file Click Save to save it on your computer
125. What is Assertion Timeout When the assertion timeout is enabled the Dominion PX device asserts any warning or critical condition only after a specified number of consecutive samples that cross a particular threshold are generated This prevents a number of threshold alerts from being generated if the measurements return to normal immediately after rising above any upper threshold or dropping below any lower threshold zie Raritan ae Chapter 5 Using the Web Interface Configuring Event Rules A benefit of the product s intelligence is its ability to notify you of and react to a change in conditions This event notification or reaction is an event rule Dominion PX is shipped with two built in event rules which cannot be deleted e System Event Log Rule This rule causes ANY event occurred to Dominion PX to be recorded in the internal log The rule is enabled by default e System SNMP Trap Rule This rule causes SNMP traps to be sent to specified IP addresses or hosts when ANY event occurs to Dominion PX The rule is disabled by default If these two do not satisfy your needs you can create additional rules to respond to different events Note Internet Explorer 8 IE8 does not use compiled JAVA script When using IE8 to create or change event rules the CPU performance may be degraded resulting in the appearance of the connection time out message When this occurs click Ignore to continue Components of an Event Rul
126. X web interface It is an integer between 1 and 16 e sensor type is one of these sensor types temperature humidity airPressure or air Flow Note If the specified sensor type does not match the type of the specified environmental sensor this error message appears Specified sensor type XXX does not match the sensor s type lt sensortype gt where XXX is the specified sensor type and sensortype is the correct sensor type ue sis Raritan config sensor Chapter 7 Using the Command Line Interface e option is one of the options enable disable or a numeric value Option Description enable Enables the upper critical threshold for the specified environmental sensor disable Disables the upper critical threshold for the specified environmental sensor A numeric value Sets a value for the upper critical threshold of the specified environmental sensor and enables this threshold at the same time Example The following command sets the Upper Critical threshold of the environmental temperature sensor with the ID number 2 to 40 degrees Celsius It also enables the upper critical threshold if this threshold has not been enabled yet config ft sensor externalsensor 2 temperature upperCritical 40 Setting the Sensor s Upper Warning Threshold This command syntax configures the Upper Warning threshold of a numeric environmental sensor zie Raritan xternalsensor n sensor type upperW
127. X to generate a warning and send an SNMP trap when certain parameters are exceeded See Setting Power Thresholds on page 129 fora description of how thresholds work Note When configuring the thresholds via SNMP set commands ensure the value of upper critical threshold is higher than that of upper warning threshold Retrieving Energy Usage You can discover how much energy an IT device consumes by retrieving the Active Energy for the outlet this IT device is plugged into The Active Energy values are included in the outletSensorMeasurementsTable along with other outlet sensor readings A Note about Enabling Thresholds When enabling previously disabled thresholds via SNMP make sure you set a correct value for all thresholds that are supposed to be enabled prior to actually enabling them Otherwise you may get an error message SE Raritan Chapter 7 Using the Command Line Interface This section explains how to use the command line interface CLI to administer a Dominion PX device In This Chapter About the Interface sssssssssssseseeererennenn enne 181 LOO GING LO ejt ec NEEDED 182 Help COMMA cies esac m 184 Showing Me tenuem 185 Configuring the Dominion PX Device and Network 204 Load Shedding Configuration Commands sussusss 320 Power Control Operations uerit tetro nte tiennie iaaa 321 Unblocking a DET e m 325 Resetting Dominion PX
128. a Type the recipient s email address in the Recipient Email Address field b Click Send Test Email Click OK to save the changes Check if the recipient receives the email successfully S Raritan Chapter 5 Using the Web Interface Setting the EnergyWise Configuration If a Cisco EnergyWise energy management architecture is implemented n your place you can enable the Cisco EnergyWise endpoint implemented on the Dominion PX device so that the PDU becomes part of the Cisco EnergyWise domain The Cisco EnergyWise feature implemented on the PDU is disabled by default gt 1 ra To set the Cisco EnergyWise configuration Choose Device Settings EnergyWise The EnergyWise Configuration dialog appears In the Enable EnergyWise field select the enable checkbox to enable the Cisco EnergyWise feature In the Domain name field type the name of a Cisco EnergyWise domain where the Dominion PX belongs The domain name comprises up to 127 printable ASCII characters Spaces and asterisks are NOT acceptable In the Domain password field type the authentication password secret for entering the Cisco EnergyWise domain The password comprises up to 127 printable ASCII characters Spaces and asterisks are NOT acceptable In the Port field type a User Datagram Protocol UDP port number for communication in the Cisco EnergyWise domain The port ranges from 1 to 65535 Default is 43440 In the Pollin
129. a ale 167 Tracing the Network ROUT is issiiici iadaaa porti ed pe trea Rae en mte o3 s dece xe LER neg uo 167 Listing TOP COMMECHO MNS uu e iie inre xri eaa exec ku Fc sae EE Ebr ere EY ERE ad una ovd 168 Viewing the Communication OQ creed terii trn ge rni nn nain e eR anrea ER Da as Re x inen ad 168 Downloading Diagnostic Information ssssssssesesesesenee eene 169 Firmware Upgrade a etae enr er abaci ea ee E e saca rie Pur Y xd desea 169 Updating the Dominion PX FiriTIWate ccci citta tnn tru ee tra eto aas 170 Viewing Firmware Update HISEOTY x 22e Lerner datu Eee ap ER udo cepe reatu une tut ratas 171 Full Disaster FHeGOVOry sector ee ea ER ct er prep riae eau Re ed orna Te ket E EE nias 172 Updating the Asset Sensor Firmware esssssssssesee eene enne nnne 172 Accessing thie Help eder pectet ta teetetu cua di acu dtu a d dpud a 172 Retrieving Software Packages Information sessssseeeennens 173 iis Raritan Browsing through the Online Help sees Chapter 6 Using SNMP Enabling SNMP criteria det are ree er e E Configuring Users for Encrypted SNMP v3 ssssssssse Configuring SNMP Traps sssssssseseeenemeeenen nennen SNMP Gets and Sets erit stp niet aed dea etd Poner egeepanthdvealoadinnnets The Dominion PX MIB ssssssseseeeeeeenenens Retrieving Energy Usage sssseeeeeennnenns
130. able Dominion PX only uses the primary IPv4 and IPv6 DNS servers Example The following command determines that the secondary DNS server is 192 168 84 33 config f network ipv4 secondaryDNSServer 192 168 84 33 Overriding the DHCP Assigned DNS Server After specifying the primary secondary DNS server you can use this command to override the DHCP assigned DNS server with the one you specified config f network ipv4 overrideDNS option Variables e option is one of the options enable or disable Option Description enable This option overrides the DHCP assigned DNS server with the primary secondary DNS server you assign disable This option resumes using the DHCP assigned DNS server S Raritan Chapter 7 Using the Command Line Interface Example The following command overrides the DHCP assigned DNS server with the one you specified config network ipv4 overrideDNS enabl Configuring the IPv6 Parameters An IPv6 configuration command begins with network ipv6 The commands are case sensitive so ensure you capitalize them correctly Setting the IP Configuration Mode This command syntax determines the IP configuration mode config f network ipv6 ipConfigurationMode mode Variables e mode is one of the modes automatic or static Mode Description automatic The IP configuration mode is set to automatic static The IP configuration mode is set to static IP address Example The
131. abled Use settings from LDAP server Leave the checkbox deselected Type of LDAP Server Select Microsoft Active Directory from the drop down list LDAP over SSL Have the checkbox deselected since the SSL encryption is not applied in this example Port Ensure the field is set to 389 SSL Port and Server Certificate Skip the two fields since the SSL encryption is not enabled a Use Bind Credentials Do NOT select this checkbox because anonymous bind is used Bind DN Bind Password and Confirm Bind Password Skip the three fields because anonymous bind is used 349 Appendix D LDAP Configuration Illustration Base DN for Search Type dc techadss1 dc comas the starting point where your search begins on the AD server Login Name Attribute Ensure the field is set to sAMAccountName because the LDAP server is Microsoft Active Directory User Entry Object Class Ensure the field is set to user because the LDAP server is Microsoft Active Directory User Search Subfilter The field is optional The subfilter information is also useful for filtering out additional objects in a large directory structure In this example we leave it blank Active Directory Domain Type techadssl com PS USCS INO E eer bx IP Address Hostname 192 168 56 3 e _ Use settings from LDAP Server Select LDAP Server iv
132. ace Example The following command enables the Cisco EnergyWise feature config energywis nabled tru Specifying the EnergyWise Domain This command syntax specifies to which Cisco EnergyWise domain the Dominion PX device belongs config energywise domain lt name gt Variables e name is a string comprising up to 127 ASCII printable characters Spaces and asterisks are NOT acceptable Example The following command configures the Dominion PX device to belong to the Cisco EnergyWise domain named helloDomain config energywise domain helloDomain Specifying the EnergyWise Secret This command syntax specifies the password secret to enter the Cisco EnergyWise domain config energywise secret lt password gt Variables e password is a string comprising up to 127 ASCII printable characters Spaces and asterisks are NOT acceptable zie Raritan id 310 Chapter 7 Using the Command Line Interface Example The following command specifies password5233 as the Cisco EnergyWise domain secret password config energywise secret password5233 Changing the UDP Port This command syntax specifies the UDP port for communications in the Cisco EnergyWise domain config energywise port lt port gt Variables e port is the UDP port number ranging between 1 and 65535 Example The following command specifies 10288 as the UDP port for Cisco EnergyWise config f
133. ace Route results Click Close to quit the dialog 167 168 Chapter 5 Using the Web Interface Listing TCP Connections You can use the List TCP Connections to display a list of TCP connections gt 1 Viewing the Communi To trace the route for a host Choose Maintenance gt Network Diagnostics gt List TCP Connections The TCP connections dialog appears Click Close to quit the dialog cation Log Dominion PX allows you to inspect all communications occurred between the Dominion PX device and its graphical user interface GUI The information is usually useful for a technical support engineer only and you may not need to view it This feature is accessible only by users with Administrative Privileges gt 1 To view the communication log Choose Maintenance gt View Communication Log The Communication Log dialog appears The dialog shows the final page by default You can Switch between different pages by doing one of the following Click I4 or PI to go to the first or final page Click 4 or P to go to the prior or next page Type a number in the Page text box and press Enter to go to a specific page Select a log entry from the list and click Show Details or simply double click the log entry to view detailed information Note Sometimes when the dialog is too narrow the icon x takes the Oo gx Pe p place of the Show Details button In that case click and s
134. act sysName sysLacation Download MIB SGT Cancel 2 Select the enable checkbox in the SNMP v1 v2c field to enable communication with an SNMP manager using SNMP v1 or v2c protocol Type the SNMP read only community string in the Read Community String field Usually the string is public Type the read write community string in the Write Community String field Usually the string is private 3 Select the enable checkbox in the SNMP v3 field to enable communication with an SNMP manager using SNMP v3 protocol Tip You can permit or disallow a user to access Dominion PX via the SNMP v3 protocol See Configuring Users for Encrypted SNMP v3 on page 176 Type the SNMP MIB II sysContact value in the sysContact field Type the SNMP MIB II sysName value in the sysName field Type the SNMP MIB II sysLocation value in the sysLocation field noo Ol oe Click OK to save the changes S Raritan zie Raritan Chapter 5 Using the Web Interface Important You must download the SNMP MIB for your Dominion PX to use with your SNMP manager Click Download MIB in this dialog to download the desired MIB file For more details see Down oading SNMP MIB on page 178 5 To configure SNMP managers Choose Device Settings Network Services SNMP The SNMP Settings dialog appears Click the Traps tab Select the Enabled checkbox in the System Snmp Trap Event Rule fiel
135. act closure sensor is a discrete sensor so it switches between three states only unavailable alarmed and normal Note Numeric sensors use numeric values to indicate the environmental or internal conditions while discrete on off sensors use alphabetical characters to indicate the state Sensor state Applicable to unavailable All sensors alarmed Discrete sensors normal All sensors below lower critical Numeric sensors below lower warning Numeric sensors above upper warning Numeric sensors above upper critical Numeric sensors unavailable State The unavailable state means the connectivity to the sensor is lost Dominion PX pings all managed sensors at regular intervals in seconds If it does not detect a particular sensor for three consecutive scans the unavailable state is displayed for that sensor When the communication with a contact closure sensor s processor is lost all detectors that is all switches connected to the same sensor module show the unavailable state Note When the sensor is deemed unavailable the existing sensor configuration remains unchanged For example the ID number assigned to the sensor remains associated with it Dominion PX continues to ping unavailable sensors and moves out of the unavailable state after detecting the sensor for two consecutive scans zie Raritan n Chapter 5 Using the Web Interface normal State This state indicates the sensor is in the normal state For acontact
136. acter is required disable No numeric character is required Example The following command determines that a password must comprise at least one numeric character config f security strongPasswords enforceAtLeastOneNumericCharacter enable Special Character Requirement This command syntax determines whether a strong password includes at least a special character config security strongPasswords enforceAtLeastOneSpecialCharacter lt option gt Variables e option is one of the options enable or disable Option Description enable At least one special character is required disable No special character is required Example The following command determines that a password must comprise at least one special character config f security strongPasswords enforceAtLeastOneSpecialCharacter enable zie Raritan e Chapter 7 Using the Command Line Interface 248 Unrepeatable Historic Passwords This command syntax determines the number of previous passwords that CANNOT be repeated when changing the password config security strongPasswords passwordHistoryDepth lt value gt Variables e value is an integer between 1 and 12 Example The following command determines that the previous 7 passwords CANNOT be re used when changing the password config security strongPasswords passwordHistoryDepth 7 Role Bassed Access Control In addition to firewall access control based on IP addresses you can
137. age 178 zie Raritan n 178 Chapter 6 Using SNMP SNMP Gets and Sets In addition to sending traps Dominion PX is able to receive SNMP get and set requests from third party SNMP managers Get requests are used to retrieve information about Dominion PX such as the system location and the current on a specific outlet Set requests are used to configure a subset of the information such as the SNMP system name Note The SNMP system name is the Dominion PX device name When you change the SNMP system name the device name shown in the web interface is also changed Dominion PX does NOT support configuring IPv6 related parameters using the SNMP set requests Valid objects for these requests are limited to those found in the SNMP MIB II System Group and the custom Dominion PX MIB The Dominion PX MIB The SNMP MIB file is required for using your Dominion PX device with an SNMP manager An SNMP MIB file describes the SNMP functions Downloading SNMP MIB The SNMP MIB file for Dominion PX can be easily downloaded from the web interface There are two ways to download the SNMP MIB file gt 1 To download the file from the SNMP Settings dialog Choose Device Settings gt Network Services gt SNMP The SNMP Settings dialog appears Click Download MIB A submenu of MIB files appear Select the desired MIB file to download PDU MIB The SNMP MIB file for Dominion PX s power management ASSETMANAGEMENT
138. agement show energywise show externalsensors n details show history show history bufferlength show inlets n details show loadshedding show network details show network mode show network services option show network wireless details show ocp n details 1 show outlets n details show pdu details show reliability data show reliability errorlog n show roles role name show security details show sensor externalsensor n details show sensor inlet n sensor type details show sensor inletpole n p sensor type details show sensor ocp n sensor type details Y show sensor outlet n sensor type details Y Y show sensor outletpole n p sensor type details show user user name details show network wireless details URN ANN NEN NN a NEN NN C C Notes zie Raritan 1 After performing the show outlets lt n gt command the following outlet information is not available for PX2 3000 and PX2 4000 series 365 Appendix F Additional Dominion PX Information State on device power up Cycling power off period 2 After performing the show pdu details command the following PDU information is not available for PX2 3000 and PX2 4000 series Default outlet state on startup Outlet power sequence Outlet power sequence delay Configura
139. ailable Parameters for a Command on page 331 SE Raritan Chapter 7 Using the Command Line Interface Showing Information You can use the show commands to view current settings or status of the Dominion PX device or part of it such as the IP address networking mode firmware version circuit breaker state inlet ratings and so on Some show commands have two formats one with the parameter details and the other without The difference is that the command without the parameter details displays a shortened version of information while the other displays in depth information After typing a show command press Enter to execute it Note Depending on your login name the prompt may be replaced by the prompt Network Configuration This command shows the network configuration such as the IP address networking mode and MAC address show network IP Configuration This command shows the IP related configuration such as IPv4 and IPv6 configuration address es gateway and subnet mask show network ip lt option gt Variables e option is one of the options all v4 or v6 Option Description all This options shows both of IPv4 and IPv6 settings Tip You can also type the command without adding this option all to get the same data v4 This option shows the IPv4 settings only v6 This option shows the IPv6 settings only zie Raritan ns Chapter 7 Using the Command Line Interface
140. al Threshold 263 Setting the Outlet s Lower Warning Threshold 264 Setting the Outlet s Upper Critical Threshold 261 Setting the Outlet s Upper Warning Threshold 262 Setting the Outlet Specific Default State 116 117 Setting the Outlet Specific Power On Delay xiii 122 Setting the PDU Defined Cycling Power Off Period 207 254 Setting the PDU Defined Default Outlet State 206 253 Setting the PDU Defined Default State 116 117 Setting the Polling Interval 308 Setting the Preferred Host Name 220 Setting the Primary DNS Server 222 226 Setting the PSK 215 Setting the Secondary DNS Server 223 226 Setting the Sensor s Assertion Timeout 289 Setting the Sensor s Deassertion Hysteresis 289 Setting the Sensor s Lower Critical Threshold 287 Setting the Sensor s Lower Warning Threshold 288 Setting the Sensor s Upper Critical Threshold 285 Setting the Sensor s Upper Warning Threshold 286 Setting the SNMP Configuration 232 Setting the SNMP Read Community 233 Setting the SNMP Write Community 233 Setting the SSID 214 Setting the Subnet Mask 221 S Raritan Setting the sysContact Value 234 Setting the sysLocation Value 234 Setting the sysName Value 234 Setting the Upper Critical Threshold for a Circuit Breaker 280 Setting the Upper Critical Threshold for an Inlet Pole 273 Setting the Upper Warning Threshold for a Circuit Breaker 281 Setting t
141. an Chapter 5 Using the Web Interface To select multiple outlets select the checkbox of each desired outlet one by one To select a single outlet select that outlet s checkbox Click On Off or Cycle A dialog for confirming the operation appears Click Yes and all outlets switch ON OFF or cycle their power 42 Outlet State Change Do you really want to switch on all outlets Switching an Outlet This section only applies to PDUs with the outlet switching function You can turn on or off or power cycle any outlet regardless of the outlet s current state Power cycling the outlet s turns the outlet s off and then back on There are different ways to turn an outlet on or off or cycle its power gt To control an outlet with a particular outlet icon selected 1 Ifthe Outlets folder is not expanded expand it to show all outlets See Expanding the Tree on page 55 2 Click the outlet you want in the PX Explorer pane and locate the Control section in the right pane Click On Off or Cycle A dialog for confirming the operation appears Click Yes and the outlet switches ON OFF or cycles its power 42 Outlet State Change Do you really want to switch off Outlet 1 Yes gt To control an outlet with the Outlets folder icon selected 1 Ifthe PDU folder is not expanded expand it to show all components and component groups See Expanding the Tree on page 55 zie Raritan
142. ands to configure multiple parameters at a time For example network interface LANInterfaceSpeed option LANInterfaceDuplexMode mode c Forthe wireless network mode you must configure the Service Set Identifier SSID parameter To set Use this command SSID network wireless SSID ssid where ssid is the SSID string If necessary configure more wireless parameters shown in the following table To set Use this command BSSID network wireless BSSID bssid where bssid is the AP MAC address Authentication network wireless authMethod method method where method is psk for Pre Shared Key or eap for Extensible Authentication Protocol PSK network wireless PSK lt psk gt where lt psk gt is the PSK string 21 22 Chapter 3 Installation and Configuration To set EAP outer authentication EAP inner authentication EAP identity EAP password EAP CA certificate Use this command network wireless apOuterAuthentication lt outer_auth gt where lt outer_auth gt is PEAP network wireless apInnerAuthentication lt inner_auth gt where inner auth is MSCHAPVv2 network wireless eapIdentity identity where identity is your user name for EAP authentication network wireless eapPassword password where password is your password for EAP authentication network wireless eapCACertificate When prompted to enter the CA certificate open
143. are available in the Server Reachability dialog after specifying servers for the Dominion PX device to monitor gt 1 To check the server monitoring states and results Choose Device Settings gt Server Reachability The Server Reachability dialog appears The column labeled Ping Enabled indicates whether the monitoring for the corresponding server is activated or not Sf This icon denotes that the monitoring for the corresponding server is enabled X This icon denotes that the monitoring for the corresponding server is disabled The column labeled Status indicates the accessibility of each monitored server Status Description Reachable The server is accessible Unreachable The server is inaccessible Waiting for reliable The connection between the Dominion PX device connection and the server is not established yet You may change the sorting order of the list if necessary See Changing the Sorting on page 62 Click Close to quit the dialog Environmental Sensors zie Raritan Dominion PX can monitor the environmental conditions such as temperature and humidity where environmental sensors are placed 1 To add environmental sensors Physically connect environmental sensors to the Dominion PX device See Connecting Environmental Sensors Optional on page 28 Log in to the Dominion PX web interface Dominion PX should have detected the connected sensors and display them in the web
144. are turned on they can initially draw a very large current known as inrush current Inrush current typically lasts for 20 40 milliseconds The inrush guard delay feature prevents a circuit breaker trip due to the combined inrush current of many devices turned on at the same time For example if the inrush guard delay is set to 100 milliseconds and two or more outlets are turned on at the same time the PDU will sequentially turn the outlets on with a 100 millisecond delay occurring between each one gt To set the inrush guard delay time 1 Click the PDU folder Note The PDU folder is named my PX by default The name changes after customizing the device name See Naming the PDU on page 66 Click Setup in the Settings section The Pdu Setup dialog appears In the Inrush Guard Delay field click the drop down arrow and select an option from the list Valid range is from 100 milliseconds to 100 seconds Time units in the list are explained below ms millisecond s S second s 4 Click OK to save the changes Setting the Outlet Power On Sequence This section only applies to PDUs with the outlet switching function By default the outlets are sequentially powered on in ascending order from outlet 1 to the highest numbered outlet when turning ON or power cycling all outlets on the Dominion PX device You can change the order in which the outlets power ON This is useful when there is a specific order in which the connected
145. arning option Variables e n is the ID number of the environmental sensor that you want to configure The ID number is assigned and shown in the Dominion PX web interface It is an integer between 1 and 16 e sensor type is one of these sensor types temperature humidity airPressure or air Flow Note If the specified sensor type does not match the type of the specified environmental sensor this error message appears Specified sensor type XXX does not match the sensor s type lt sensortype gt where XXX is the specified sensor type and sensortype is the correct sensor type e option is one of the options enable disable or a numeric value Option Description enable Enables the upper warning threshold for the specified environmental sensor 287 Chapter 7 Using the Command Line Interface 288 config sensor Option Description disable Disables the upper warning threshold for the specified environmental sensor A numeric value Sets a value for the upper warning threshold of the specified environmental sensor and enables this threshold at the same time Example The following command enables the Upper Warning threshold of the environmental temperature sensor with the ID number 4 config sensor externalsensor 4 temperature upperWarning enable Setting the Sensor s Lower Critical Threshold This command syntax configures the Lower Critical threshold of a numeric environmen
146. arning Settings The following multi command syntax configures Upper Critical Upper Warning and Lower Warning thresholds for the outlet 5 RMS current simultaneously 319 Chapter 7 Using the Command Line Interface config sensor outlet 5 current upperCritical disable upperWarning enable lowerWarning 1 0 Results e The Upper Critical threshold of outlet 5 RMS current is disabled e The Upper Warning threshold of outlet 5 RMS current is enabled e The Lower Warning threshold of outlet 5 RMS current is set to 1 0A and enabled at the same time Quitting the Configuration Mode Both of apply and cancel commands let you quit the configuration mode The difference is that apply saves all changes you made in the configuration mode while cancel aborts all changes gt To quit the configuration mode use either command config apply OR config cancel The prompt appears after pressing Enter indicating that you have entered the administrator mode Load Shedding Configuration Commands This section only applies to PDUs with the outlet switching function A load shedding configuration command begins with oadsheading Unlike other CLI configuration commands the load shedding configuration command is performed in the administrator mode rather than the configuration mode See Different CLI Modes and Prompts on page 184 Raritan Chapter 7 Using the Command Line Interface Enabling or
147. ate The Manage SSL Certificate dialog appears Click the New SSL Certificate tab Provide the information requested In the Subject section Field Type this information Country ISO Code The country where your company is located Use the standard ISO country code For a list of ISO codes visit the ISO website httpz www iso org iso counitry codes iso 3166 code lists htm State or Province The full name of the state or province where your company is located Locality The city where your company is located zie Raritan di Chapter 5 Using the Web Interface Field Organization Organizational Unit Common Name Email Address Field Key Length Self Sign Challenge Confirm Challenge 102 Type this information The registered name of your company The name of your department The fully qualified domain name FQDN of your Dominion PX device An email address where you or another administrative user can be reached Note All fields in the Subject section are mandatory except for the Organization Organizational Unit and Email Address fields If you generate a CSR without values entered in the required fields you cannot obtain third party certificates In the Key Creation Parameters section Do this Select the key length bits from the drop down list in this field A larger key length enhances the security but slows down the Dominion PX device s response For requesting a certificate signed by
148. ating Device IP Address Device MAC Address Board ID Firmware Version Hardware Revsion PDU MIB ASSETMANAGEMENT MIB ENERGYWISE MIB 2 Click the tab containing the information you want to view The number of available tabs varies according to the model you purchased Tab Device Information Data General PDU information such as model name serial number firmware version hardware revision and so on Outlets Each outlet s receptacle type operating voltage and rated current Inlets Each inlet s plug type rated voltage and current Overcurrent Protectors Each circuit breaker s type rated current and the outlets that it protects Controllers Each inlet or outlet controller s serial number firmware and hardware version 65 66 Chapter 5 Using the Web Interface Tab Data Asset Strips The connected asset sensor s hardware ID boot version application version and protocol version Note An outlet s operating voltage is derived from the inlet s rated voltage The result of this calculation is rounded off mathematically to the nearest integer in volt For example if the calculation for the minimum voltage is 380 sqrt 3 219 39 the web interface displays 219 V Enlarge the dialog if necessary See Resizing a Dialog on page 62 You can re sort the list or change the columns displayed See Changing the View of a List on page 61 5 Click Close to quit the dialog Tip The firmwar
149. ation This command shows the PDU configuration such as the device name firmware version and model type show pdu To show detailed information add the parameter details to the end of the command show pdu details zie Raritan d Chapter 7 Using the Command Line Interface Outlet Information This section does not apply to models without outlet sensors implemented such as PX2 2nnn series where n represents a number This command syntax shows the outlet information show outlets lt n gt To show detailed information add the parameter details to the end of the command show outlets lt n gt details Variables e n is one of the options all or a number Option Description all Displays the information for all outlets Tip You can also type the command without adding this option all to get the same data A specific outlet Displays the information for the specified outlet number only Displayed information e Without the parameter details only the outlet state is displayed e With the parameter details more outlet information is displayed in addition to the state such as the name rated current operating voltage and outlet settings mm SE Raritan Chapter 7 Using the Command Line Interface Inlet Information This command syntax shows the inlet information show inlets lt n gt To show detailed information add the pa
150. ation for the specified circuit breaker number breaker only Displayed information e Without the parameter details only the circuit breaker status and name are displayed e With the parameter details more circuit breaker information is displayed in addition to status such as the rating and RMS current value i sis Raritan Chapter 7 Using the Command Line Interface Environmental Sensor Information This command syntax shows the environmental sensor s information show externalsensors lt n gt To show detailed information add the parameter details to the end of the command show externalsensors n details Variables e n is one of the options all or a number Option Description all Displays the information for all environmental sensors Tip You can also type the command without adding this option all to get the same data A specific Displays the information for the specified environmental environmental sensor only sensor number The environmental sensor number is the ID number assigned to the sensor which can be found on the External Sensors page of the PDU s web interface Displayed information e Without the parameter details only the sensor ID sensor type and reading are displayed Note A discrete on off sensor displays the sensor state instead of the reading e With the parameter details more environmental sensor information is displayed in addition to t
151. ax on page 318 Enabling or Disabling Strong Passwords This command syntax enables or disables the strong password feature config security strongPasswords enabled lt option gt Variables e lt option gt is one of the options true or false Option Description true Enables the strong password feature false Disables the strong password feature Example This command syntax enables the strong password feature config security strongPasswords enabled true Raritan Chapter 7 Using the Command Line Interface Minimum Password Length This command syntax determines the minimum length of the password config security strongPasswords minimumLength lt value gt Variables e lt lt value gt is an integer between 8 and 32 Example This command syntax determines a password must comprise at least 8 characters config security strongPasswords minimumLength 8 Maximum Password Length This command syntax determines the maximum length of the password config security strongPasswords maximumLength lt value gt Variables e value is an integer between 16 and 64 Example This command syntax determines that a password must NOT comprise more thant 20 characters config security strongPasswords maximumLength 20 Lowercase Character Requirement This command syntax determines whether a strong password includes at least a lowercase character zie Raritan Chapter 7 Using the Command
152. b Interface Browser Defined Shortcut Menu A shortcut menu which is built in the web browser may appear when right clicking anywhere in the Dominion PX web interface The shortcut menu functions are defined by the browser For example the Back command on the Internet Explorer IE shortcut menu works the same as the Back button in the IE browser Both of these functions take you to the previous page For information on each shortcut menu command or item see the online help or documentation accompanying your web browser Below is the illustration of the IE browser s shortcut menu Available menu commands or items may slightly differ based on your web browser version Back Select All Create Shortcut Add to Favorites View Source Encoding Print Refresh Append to Existing PDF Convert to Adobe PDF Export to Microsoft Excel Properties 63 Chapter 5 Using the Web Interface Viewing the Dashboard When you log in to the web interface the Dashboard page is displayed by default This page provides an overview of the Dominion PX device s status The page is divided into various sections according to the component type such as inlet s outlets and circuit breakers Note If a sensor reading row is colored it means the sensor reading already crosses one of the thresholds or the circuit breaker has tripped See The Yellow or Red Highlighted Reading on page 60 After clicking any other icon in t
153. back Note The combined asset sensors can be mounted in any orientation For example you can mount the asset sensors upside down Connecting Asset Sensors to Dominion PX You need both of asset sensors and asset tags for tracking IT devices Asset tags which are affixed to IT devices provide an ID for each IT device while the asset sensors transmit ID and positioning information to the Dominion PX device gt Toconnect asset sensors to Dominion PX 1 Affix an asset tag to each IT device through the tape on the tag s back zie Raritan Chapter 3 Installation and Configuration 2 Plug the connector on each asset tag into the corresponding tag port ont he asset sensor 3 Connect the asset sensor on the rack to the Dominion PX device by following this procedure a Connect one end of the Category 5e 6 cable to the RJ 45 connector on the MASTER asset sensor Connect the other end of the cable to the FEATURE port on the Dominion PX device The Dominion PX device supplies power to asset sensors through the Category 5e 6 cable m B LI Letter A B C D Hf f Item Dominion PX device Asset sensors Asset tags IT devices such as servers Note The PDU cannot detect how many rack units the connected asset sensor s support You must provide the information to the PDU manually See Configuring the Asset Sensor on page 160 36 S Raritan Chapter 4 Using the PDU
154. bles the specified user profile false Disables the specified user profile Example The following command enables the user profile May config user modify May enabled true Forcing a Password Change This command syntax determines whether the password change is forced when a user logs in to the specified user profile next time zie Raritan on Chapter 7 Using the Command Line Interface config user modify lt name gt forcePasswordChangeOnNextLogin lt option gt Variables e lt name gt is the name of the user whose settings you want to change e lt option gt is one of the options true or false Option Description true A password change is forced on the user s next login false No password change is forced on the user s next login Example The following command enforces a password change on May s next login config user modify May forcePasswordChangeOnNextLogin true Modifying the SNMPv3 Settings There are different commands to modify the SNMPv3 parameters of a specific user profile You can combine all of the following commands to modify the SNMPv3 parameters at a time See Multi Command Syntax on page 318 gt To enable or disable the SNMP v3 access to Dominion PX for the specified user config f user modify name snmpV3Access optionl Variables e name is the name of the user whose settings you want to change e option is one of the options enabled or disabled Option Descript
155. both authentication services are enabled Dominion PX follows these rules for authentication Outlet Management When any of the LDAP LDAPS servers in the access list is accessible Dominion PX authenticates against the connected LDAP LDAPS server only When the connection to every LDAP LDAPS server fails Dominion PX allows authentication against the local database To enable both authentication services Choose Device Settings gt Security gt Authentication The Authentication Settings dialog appears Ensure the LDAP radio button has been selected Select the Use Local Authentication if Remote Authentication service is not available checkbox Click OK to save the changes Dominion PX allows you to remotely monitor and control the outlets and manage outlet settings through the web interface zie Raritan 111 112 Chapter 5 Using the Web Interface Naming Outlets You can give each outlet a unique name up to 32 characters long to identify the equipment connected to it The customized name is followed by the label in parentheses Note In this context the label refers to the outlet number such as 1 2 3 and so on gt To name an outlet 1 Ifthe Outlets folder is not expanded expand it to show all outlets See Expanding the Tree on page 55 2 Click the outlet you want in the Dominion PX Explorer pane The page specific to that outlet opens in the right pane 3 Click Setup in the Settings se
156. cate File field click Browse to select the certificate file provided by the CA 4 Click Upload The certificate is installed on the Dominion PX device Tip To verify whether the certificate has been installed successtully click the Active SSL Certificate tab later 5 Click Close to quit the dialog Creating a Self Signed Certificate When appropriate certificate and key files for the Dominion PX device are unavailable the alternative other than submitting a CSR to the CA is to generate a self signed certificate gt To create and install a self signed certificate 1 Choose Device Settings gt Security gt SSL Certificate The Manage SSL Certificate dialog appears Click the New SSL Certificate tab Provide the information requested Field Type this information Country ISO Code The country where your company is located Use the standard ISO country code For a list of ISO codes visit the ISO website httpz www iso org iso counitry codes iso 3166 code lists htm State or Province The full name of the state or province where your company is located Locality The city where your company is located Organization The registered name of your company Organizational Unit The name of your department Common Name The fully qualified domain name FQDN of your Dominion PX device Email Address An email address where you or another administrative user can be reached zie Raritan i 104 Chapter 5 Using the
157. cated on the top 313 Chapter 7 Using the Command Line Interface Orientation Description bottomConnector This option indicates that the asset sensor is mounted with the RJ 45 connector located on the bottom Example The following command specifies the orientation of the asset sensor s RJ 45 connector to be on the top config fd assetStrip 1 assetStripOrientation topConnector Global LED Color Settings The command that sets the colors of all LEDs on an asset sensor begins with assetStripManagement Setting LED Colors for Connected Tags This command syntax sets the LED color for all rack units on the connected asset sensor s to indicate the presence of a connected asset tag config f assetStripManagement LEDColorForConnectedTags color Variables e Color is the hexadecimal RGB value of a color in HTML format The color variable ranges from 000000 to FFFFFF Example The following command sets the LED color for all rack units to RED that is FF0000 to indicate the presence of a connected asset tag config f assetStripManagement LEDColorForConnectedTags FF0000 BS SE Raritan Raritan Chapter 7 Using the Command Line Interface Setting LED Colors for Disconnected Tags This command syntax sets the LED color for all rack units on the connected asset sensor s to indicate the absence of a connected asset tag config assetStripManagement LEDColorForDisconnectedTags
158. ccess page To use this feature you will need e Raritan remote rack PDU s e Power CIMs D2CIM PWR gt To make power associations associate rack PDU outlets to KVM target servers Note When a rack PDU is associated to a target server port the outlet name is replaced by the target server name even if you assigned another name to the outlet 1 Choose the rack PDU from the Power Strip Name drop down list 2 For that rack PDU choose the outlet from the Outlet Name drop down list Repeat steps 1 and 2 for all desired power associations Click OK A confirmation message is displayed gt To change the port name 1 Type something descriptive in the Name field For example the name of the target server would be a likely candidate The name can be up to 32 alphanumeric characters and can include special characters 2 Click OK S Raritan Appendix E Integration Removing Power Associations When disconnecting target servers and or rack PDUs from KXII all power associations should first be deleted When a target has been associated with a rack PDU and the target is removed from the KX Il the power association remains When this occurs you are not able to access the Port Configuration for that disconnected target server in Device Settings so that the power association can be properly remove gt To remove a rack PDU association 1 Select the appropriate rack PDU from the Power Strip Name drop down list
159. ces for the user May user modify May preferredTemperatureUnit F preferredLengthUnit feet preferredPressureUnit psi Results e The preferred temperature unit is set to Fahrenheit e The preferred length unit is set to feet e The preferred pressure unit is set to psi Deleting a User Profile This command syntax deletes an existing user profile config user delete lt name gt Example The following command deletes the user profile May config user delete May S Raritan Chapter 7 Using the Command Line Interface Changing Your Own Password Every user can change their own password via this command syntax if they have the Change Own Password privilege Note that this command does not begin with user config password After performing this command Dominion PX prompts you to enter both current and new passwords respectively Important After the password is changed successfully the new password is effective immediately no matter you type the command apply or not to save the changes Example This procedure changes your own password 1 Verify that you have entered the configuration mode See Entering the Configuration Mode on page 205 2 Type the following command and press Enter config password 3 Type the existing password and press Enter when the following prompt appears Current password 4 Type the new password and press Enter when the following prompt appears
160. cess the Manage Roles dialog by clicking the Manage Roles button in the Edit User XXX dialog Click New The Create New Role dialog appears Type the role s name in the Role Name field Type a description for the role in the Description field Qu ON Click the Privileges tab to assign one or multiple permissions 87 88 Chapter 5 Using the Web Interface 6 Click Add The Add Privileges to new Role dialog appears Select the permission you want from the Privileges list c Ifthe permission you selected contains any argument setting the Arguments list is shown to the right Then select one or multiple arguments For example if the Switch Outlet permission is selected the Arguments list shows all outlets for you to determine which outlets this role can control Select the desired outlets checkboxes or select the checkbox labeled all if you want to select all outlets d Click Add to add the selected permission and arguments if any e Repeat Steps ato d until you add all necessary permissions Click OK to save the changes Now you can assign the new role to any users See Creating a User Profile on page 82 or Modifying a User Profile on page 86 Modifying a Role You can change an existing role s settings except for the name 1 To modify a role Choose User Management Roles The Manage Roles dialog appears Tip You can also access the Manage Holes dialog by clicking the Manage Role
161. cifying the Number of Rack Units This command syntax specifies the total number of rack units on an asset sensor connected to the Dominion PX device config assetStrip lt n gt numberOfRackUnits lt number gt Variables e n is the connected asset sensor s ID number shown on the Asset Management page e number is the total number of rack units available on the connected asset sensor This value ranges from 8 to 48 Example The following command specifies the total number of rack units on an asset sensor to 48 rack units config f assetStrip 1 numberOfRackUnits 48 Specifying the Rack Unit Numbering Mode This command syntax specifies the numbering mode of rack units on the asset sensors connected to the Dominion PX device config f assetStrip n rackUnitNumberingMode mode Variables e n is the connected asset sensor s ID number shown on the Asset Management page e mode is one of the numbering modes topDown or bottomUp Mode Description topDown The rack units on the asset sensor are numbered in the ascending order from the highest to the lowest rack unit bottomUp The rack units on the asset sensor are numbered in the descending order from the highest to the lowest rack unit Note Top refers to the highest rack unit on the asset sensor and bottom refers to the lowest rack unit dii SE Raritan Raritan Chapter 7 Using the Command Line Interface Example The follow
162. ck See Connecting the Asset Management Sensor Optional on page 34 Warning This is not an RS 232 port so do NOT plug in an RS 232 device or damages can be caused to the device Establishing a serial connection between a computer and the Dominion PX device This is a standard DTE RS 232 port You can use a null modem cable with two DB9 connectors on both ends to connect Dominion PX to the computer Connection to Raritan s environmental sensors For Zero U products a sensor hub is required if you want to connect more than one environmental sensor Connecting the Dominion PX device to your company s network Connect a standard Cat5e 6 UTP cable to this port and connect the other end to your network This connection is necessary to administer or access the Dominion PX device remotely using the web interface There are two small LEDs adjacent to the port Green indicates a physical link and activity Yellow indicates communications at 10 100 BaseT speeds S Raritan Raritan Chapter 4 Using the PDU LED Display The LED display is located on the side where outlets are available These diagrams show the LED display on different types of PDUs Note that the LED display might slightly vary according to the PDU you purchased Zero U models OUTLET LINE CB U3 cumeut a 4i O voLTAGE w SOUR o o Ow RESET O un iaaa sensor 4 UF BOTA DOWN b 1U models ony BOTH un DOWN v
163. ck persons out after a specified number of failed logins limit the number of persons who log in using the same user name at the same time and force users to create strong passwords Enabling User Blocking User blocking determines how many times a user can attempt to log in to Dominion PX and fail authentication before the user s login is blocked Note that this function applies only to local authentication instead of authentication through external AA servers Note If any user blocking event occurs you can unblock that user manually by using the unblock CLI command via a serial connection See Unblocking a User on page 325 gt To enable user blocking 1 Choose Device Settings gt Security gt Login Settings The Login Settings dialog appears Locate the User Blocking section To enable the user blocking feature select the Block user on login failure checkbox 4 Type a number in the Maximum number of failed logins field This is the maximum number of failed logins the user is permitted before the user s login is blocked from accessing the Dominion PX device 5 To determine how long the login is blocked select the desired length of time from the drop down list in the Block timeout field The following describes available options Infinite This option sets no time limit on blocking the login X min This type of option sets the time limit to X minutes where X is a number X h This type of op
164. ck the outlet you want in the Dominion PX Explorer pane The page specific to that outlet opens in the right pane 3 Click Setup in the Settings section The setup dialog for the selected outlet appears Tip When the Outlets folder is selected you can also trigger the same dialog by highlighting the outlet on the Outlets page and then clicking Setup 4 Inthe Threshold Configuration table click the sensor whose thresholds you want to configure 5 Click Edit A threshold setup dialog for the selected sensor appears Tip You can also double click the desired sensor in the Threshold Configuration table to trigger this dialog zie Raritan id 130 Chapter 5 Using the Web Interface 9 10 11 Configure the Lower Critical Lower Warning Upper Warning and Upper Critical thresholds respectively To enable any threshold select the corresponding checkbox To disable a threshold deselect the checkbox After any threshold is enabled type an appropriate numeric value in the accompanying text box To enable the deassertion hysteresis for all thresholds type a numeric value other than zero in the Deassertion Hysteresis field See What is Deassertion Hysteresis on page 132 To enable the assertion timeout for all thresholds type a numeric value other than zero in the Assertion Timeout samples field See What is Assertion Timeout on page 133 Click OK in the threshold setup dialog to retain the changes To se
165. cket screws until the baseplate is slightly fastened 3 Align the claw foot brackets with the baseplates so that the five screw holes on the baseplates line up through the bracket s slots The rackmount side of brackets should face either the left or right side of the Dominion PX device 4 Fasten the brackets in place with at least three screws one through each slot Use additional screws as desired Raritan 10 Chapter 2 Rack Mounting the PDU 5 Using rack screws fasten the Dominion PX device to the rack through the claw foot brackets Mounting Zero U Models Using Two Rear Buttons The following describes how to mount a PDU using two buttons only If your PDU has circuit breakers implemented read Circuit Breaker Orientation Limitation on page 5 before mounting it gt To mount Zero U models using two buttons 1 Turn to the rear of the PDU Locate two screw holes on the rear panel one near the bottom and the other near the top the side of cable gland SE Raritan Chapter 2 Rack Mounting the PDU 3 Screw a button in the screw hole near the bottom The recommended torque for the button is 1 96 N m 20 kgf cm 4 Screw a button in the screw hole near the top The recommended torque for the button is 1 96 N m 20 kgf cm 5 Ensure that the two buttons can engage their mounting holes in the rack or cabinet simultaneously 6 Press the Dominion PX device forward pushing the mounting butto
166. coordinate is a string comprising up to 24 ASCII printable characters and it must be enclosed in quotes Rack units coordinate is an integer number in rack units Note To specify the Z coordinate using the rack units See Setting the Z Coordinate Format for Environmental Sensors on page 21 1 Example The following command sets the value The 5th rack to the Z coordinate of the environmental sensor with the ID number 4 after the Z coordinate s format is set to freeForm config externalsensor 4 zlabel The 5th rack S Raritan Chapter 7 Using the Command Line Interface Changing the Sensor Description This command syntax provides a description for a specific environmental sensor config externalsensor lt n gt description lt description gt Variables e n is the ID number of the environmental sensor that you want to configure The ID number is assigned and shown in the Dominion PX web interface It is an integer between 1 and 16 e description is a string comprising up to 64 ASCII printable characters and it must be enclosed in quotes Example The following command gives the description humidity detection to the environmental sensor with the ID number 4 config externalsensor 4 description humidity detection Sensor Threshold Configuration Commands A sensor configuration command begins with sensor You can use the commands to configure the threshold hysteresis and assertion
167. ction The setup dialog for the selected outlet appears Tip When the Outlets folder is selected you can also trigger the same dialog by highlighting the outlet on the Outlets page and then clicking Setup Type a name in the Outlet Name field Click OK to save the changes Outlet Monitoring The Dominion PX Explorer pane provides quick access to the outlet information The outlet information such as RMS current active power power factor and so on is displayed immediately after an outlet icon in the tree is selected Note RMS refers to Root Mean Square a statistical method for measuring certain types of variables In this context it gives the value of current that is equivalent to a DC value Monitoring All Outlets You can view the current status of all outlets at a time gt To monitor all outlets 1 Ifthe PDU folder is not expanded expand it to show all components and component groups See Expanding the Tree on page 55 2 Click the Outlets folder and the Outlets page opens in the right pane showing all outlets with the following information Outlet number S Raritan Chapter 5 Using the Web Interface a Outlet name Outlet status on off Outlet sensor readings RMS current A Active power W Power factor Tip If a sensor reading row is colored it means the sensor reading already crosses one of the thresholds or the circuit breaker has tripped See The Yellow or Red
168. cture or a specific component group to hide all or partial tree items gt To collapse the whole tree e Click the black gradient arrow 44 prior to the PDU folder icon or double click the folder Note The PDU folder is named my PX by default The name changes after customizing the device name See Naming the PDU on page 66 The arrow then turns into a white arrow P and all items below the PDU folder disappear gt To hide some tree items 1 Click the black gradient arrow 44 prior to the component group folder that you want to collapse or double click the folder a zie Raritan zie Raritan Chapter 5 Using the Web Interface The arrow then turns into a white arrow P and all items below the folder disappear 2 Repeat Step 1 for other component groups you want to collapse Adjusting the Pane You can change the width of the pane to make the area larger or smaller gt To adjust the pane s width 1 Move the mouse pointer to the right border of the Dominion PX Explorer pane 2 When the mouse pointer turns into a two way arrow drag the border horizontally to widen or shrink the pane Setup Button The Setup button is available for most tree items It triggers a setup dialog where you can change settings for the selected tree item Status Bar The status bar shows five pieces of information from left to right e Device name This is the name assigned to the Dominion PX device The default is my
169. d Specify SNMP managers destinations by doing the following a You can specify up to 3 SNMP managers in the Host x fields where x is a number between 1 and 3 b Specify a port number for each SNMP manager in the Port x fields where x is a number between 1 and 3 c Specify a community string for each SNMP manager in the Community x fields where x is a number between 1 and 3 Click OK to save the changes Tip The SNMP manager settings can be also set in the Event Rule Settings dialog See Modifying an Action on page 144 Setting the Date and Time You can set the internal clock on the Dominion PX device manually or link to a Network Time Protocol NTP server and let it set the date and time for Dominion PX 1 To set the date and time Choose Device Settings gt Date Time The Configure Date Time Settings dialog appears In the Time Zone field click the drop down arrow and select your time zone from the list If the daylight saving time applies to your time zone verify the Automatic Daylight Saving Time Adjustment checkbox is selected If the daylight saving time rules are not available for the selected time zone the checkbox is not configurable Choose one of the methods to set the date and time 75 76 Chapter 5 Using the Web Interface To customize the date and time select the User Specified Time radio button and then enter the date and time in appropriate fields Use the yyyy
170. d For example a PDU without the outlet switching function does not have the privilege switchOutlet Privilege Description adminPrivilege Administrator Privileges changeAssetStripConfiguration Change Asset Strip Configuration changeAuthSettings Change Authentication Settings changeDataRetrieval Change Data Logging Settings changeDataTimeSettings Change Date Time Settings changeEventSetup Change Event Settings changeExternalSensorsConfiguratio Change External Sensors n Configuration E 3ie Raritan Raritan Privilege changeNetworkSettings changePassword changePduConfiguration changeSecuritySettings changeSnmpSettings changeUserSettings clearLog firmwareUpdate performReset switchOutlet viewDataRetrieval viewEventSetup viewLog viewSecuritySettings viewSnmpSettings viewUserSettings Chapter 7 Using the Command Line Interface Description Change Network Settings Change Own Password Change Pdu Inlet Outlet amp Overcurrent Protector Configuration Change Security Settings Change SNMP Settings Change Local User Management Clear Local Event Log Firmware Update Reset Warm Start Switch Outlet View Data Logging Settings View Event Settings View Local Event Log View Security Settings View SNMP Settings View Local User Management The switchOutlet privilege requires an argument that is separated with a colon The argument could be e All outlets that is swit chOutlet all e A
171. d Aging Interval 242 PDU Configuration 186 PDU Configuration Commands 204 Pinging a Host 166 Power Control Operations 319 Power Cord 37 Power Cycling the Outlet s 322 Power IQ Configuration 353 Power Measurement Accuracy xiii 335 Preparing the Installation Site 14 Product Features xiii 1 Product Models 1 Providing the EAP CA Certificate 217 PX2 3000 4000 Series 38 PX2 5000 Series 38 Q Querying Available Parameters for a Command 183 329 Querying the DNS Servers 325 Quitting the Configuration Mode 204 318 Quitting the Diagnostic Mode 328 zieRaritan Index R Rack Unit Configuration 313 Rack Unit Settings of an Asset Sensor 200 Rackmount Safety Guidelines 5 Rack Mounting the PDU xiii 5 Rebooting the Dominion PX Device 82 Reliability Data 200 Reliability Error Log 201 Reset Button 45 Resetting Dominion PX 323 Resetting the Button Type Circuit Breaker 46 Resetting the Handle Type Circuit Breaker 47 Resetting to Factory Defaults 45 324 342 Resizing a Dialog 62 66 145 167 Restarting the PDU 324 Retrieving Energy Usage 179 Retrieving Previous Commands 329 Retrieving Software Packages Information 172 RF Code Energy Monitoring Solution 360 Role Bassed Access Control 247 Role Configuration Commands 301 Role of a DNS Server 72 347 S Safety Guidelines ii Safety Instructions iii 14 Sampl
172. d all necessary permissions To change a specific permission s arguments do this a Select the permission by clicking it b Click Edit The Edit arguments of privilege XXX dialog appears where XXX is the privilege name Note If the permission you selected does not contain any arguments the Edit button is disabled c Select the argument you want You can make multiple selections d Click OK Click OK to save the changes Deleting a Role You can delete any role other than the Admin role 1 To delete a role Choose User Management Roles The Manage Roles dialog appears Tip You can also access the Manage Roles dialog by clicking the Manage Roles button in the Edit User XXX dialog Select the role you want to delete by clicking it To make multiple selections press Ctrl click or Shift click to highlight multiple ones Click Delete A message appears prompting you to confirm the operation Click Yes to confirm the deletion Changing the Role List View You may change the number of displayed columns or re sort the list for better viewing the data See Changing the View of a List on page 61 89 Chapter 5 Using the Web Interface Access Security Control Dominion PX provides tools to control access You can require HTTPS encryption enable the internal firewall and create firewall rules and create login limitations Tip You can also create and install the certificate or set up
173. d energywise port 10288 Setting the Polling Interval This command syntax determines the polling interval at which the Cisco EnergyWise domain queries the Dominion PX device config f energywise polling timing Variables e timing is an integer number in seconds It ranges between 30 and 600 seconds Example The following command determines the polling interval to query the Dominion PX device is 300 seconds config fd energywise polling 300 S Raritan Raritan Chapter 7 Using the Command Line Interface Asset Management Commands You can use the CLI commands to change the settings of the connected asset sensor if any or the settings of LEDs on the asset sensor Asset Sensor Management An asset sensor management configuration command begins with assetStrip Naming an Asset Sensor This command syntax names or change the name of an asset sensor connected to the Dominion PX device config assetStrip lt n gt name lt name gt Variables e lt n gt is the connected asset sensor s ID number shown on the Asset Management page e lt name gt is a string comprising up to 32 ASCII printable characters The lt name gt variable must be enclosed in quotes when it contains spaces Example This command syntax names or changes the name of an asset sensor connected to the Dominion PX device config assetStrip 1 name Red Rack 311 Chapter 7 Using the Command Line Interface Spe
174. d externalsensor n sensorSubType type Variables e n is the ID number of the environmental sensor that you want to configure The ID number is assigned and shown in the Dominion PX web interface It is an integer between 1 and 16 e type is one of these types contact smokeDetection waterDetection or vibration Type Description contact The connected detector switch is for detection of door lock or door closed open status smokeDetection The connected detector switch is for detection of the smoke presence waterDetection The connected detector switch is for detection of the water presence vibration The connected detector switch is for detection of the vibration Example The following indicates that a smoke detector is being connected to Raritan s contact closure sensor DPX CC2 TR whose ID number shown in the Dominion PX web interface is 2 config externalsensor 2 sensorSubType smokeDetection Ex SE Raritan Raritan Chapter 7 Using the Command Line Interface Setting the X Coordinate This command syntax specifies the X coordinate of an environmental sensor config externalsensor lt n gt xlabel lt coordinate gt Variables e n is the ID number of the environmental sensor that you want to configure The ID number is assigned and shown in the Dominion PX web interface It is an integer between 1 and 16 e coordinate is a string comprising up to 24 ASCII printable cha
175. d for alerting users For a discrete on off sensor the row changes the background color when the sensor enters the abnormal state If any circuit breaker trips the circuit breaker s row is also highlighted in red See the table for the meaning of each color Color State White The reading is between the lower and upper warning thresholds or the reading is unavailable Yellow The reading drops below the lower warning threshold or rises above the upper warning threshold Red The meaning of the red color varies depending on the sensor type e Foranumeric sensor this color indicates the reading drops below the lower critical threshold or rises above the upper critical threshold e Fora discrete on off sensor this color indicates the sensor is in the alarmed state e Fora circuit breaker trip sensor it means the circuit breaker has tripped To find the exact meaning of the alert read the information shown in the State or Status column of the same row e lower critical The numeric sensor s reading drops below the lower critical threshold e lower warning The numeric sensor s reading drops below the lower warning threshold e upper critical The numeric sensor s reading exceeds the upper critical threshold e upper warning The numeric sensor s reading exceeds the upper warning threshold e alarmed The discrete sensor is NOT in the normal state e Open The circuit breaker has tripped For informatio
176. d loading the outlet LEDs show a steady color and the LED display illuminates 3ie Raritan Chapter 4 Using the PDU Connection Ports Depending on the model you purchased the total number of ports available varies e For most of Zero U models there are 6 ports located on the front panel as shown below FOATURG usop STNSOR aoe MM c ETHERNET B584 CONSOLE MODEM e For most of 1U and 2U models there are 7 ports located on front and back panels respectively Front panel ports 1U 2U ca us88 o 5 Q COKSOLE MODEM COHSOLE MODEM oO Oo Back panel ports L SENSOR 1 SENSOR 2 The only port difference between Zero U 1U and 2U models is that Zero U models provide only one sensor port while 1U and 2U models provide two The table below explains the function of each port Port Used for USB B Establishing a USB connection between a computer and the Dominion PX device You need such a connection when serial ports are NOT available on your computer zie Raritan 40 Chapter 4 Using the PDU Port USB A FEATURE CONSOLE MODEM SENSOR ETHERNET Used for Connecting a USB device This is a host port which is powered per USB 2 0 specifications Connection to some Raritan access products such as Dominion KX II through the use of a power CIM OR Connection to a Raritan Asset Management Sensor which allows you to track the locations of the IT devices in the ra
177. d page opens in the right pane 2 Locate the External Sensors section on the Dashboard page The section shows Total number of managed sensors Total number of unmanaged sensors Information of each managed sensor including Name Reading State 155 Chapter 5 Using the Web Interface To view both of managed and unmanaged environmental sensors If the PDU folder is not expanded expand it to show all components and component groups See Expanding the Tree on page 55 Note The PDU folder is named my PX by default The name changes after customizing the device name See Naming the PDU on page 66 Click External Sensors in the Dominion PX Explorer pane and the External Sensors page opens in the right pane Detailed information for each connected sensor is displayed including Label number Serial number Sensor type Name Reading State Channel for a contact closure sensor only Sensor Measurement Accuracy Raritan environmental sensors are with the following factory specifications Calibration is not required for environmental sensors 156 Temperature 2 Humidity 5 Differential air pressure 1 5 Air flow 6 5 SE Raritan Chapter 5 Using the Web Interface States of Managed Sensors An environmental sensor shows the state after being managed Available sensor states vary depending on the sensor type numeric or discrete For example a cont
178. d syntax configures the Upper Critical threshold of a circuit breaker config sensor ocp lt n gt lt sensor type gt upperCritical lt option gt Variables e n is the number of the circuit breaker that you want to configure e lt sensor type is one of the following sensor types Sensor type Description current Current sensor Note If the requested sensor type is not supported the message Not available is displayed e option is one of the options enable disable or a numeric value Option Description enable Enables the upper critical threshold for the specified circuit breaker sensor 281 Chapter 7 Using the Command Line Interface 282 Option Description disable Disables the upper critical threshold for the specified circuit breaker sensor A numeric value Sets a value for the upper critical threshold of the specified circuit breaker sensor and enables this threshold at the same time Example The following command sets the Upper Critical threshold for the 3rd circuit breaker to 16A It also enables the upper critical threshold if this threshold has not been enabled yet config sensor ocp 3 current upperCritical 16 Setting the Upper Warning Threshold for a Circuit Breaker This command syntax configures the Upper Warning threshold of a circuit breaker config sensor ocp lt n gt lt sensor type gt upperWarning lt option gt Variables e n is the number of the circuit breaker t
179. de config network interface LANInterfaceDuplexMode lt mode gt Variables e mode is one of the modes auto half or full Option Description auto Dominion PX selects the optimum transmission mode through auto negotiation half Half duplex Data is transmitted in one direction to or from the Dominion PX device at a time full Full duplex Data is transmitted in both directions simultaneously Example The following command lets Dominion PX determine the optimal transmission mode through auto negotiation config f network interface LANInterfaceDuplexMode auto Setting the Network Service Parameters A network service command begins with network services zie Raritan iil Chapter 7 Using the Command Line Interface Changing the HTTP Port This command syntax changes the HTTP port config network services http lt n gt Variables e lt n gt is a TCP port number between 1 and 65535 The default HTTP port is 80 Example The following command sets the HTTP port to 81 config f network services http 81 Changing the HTTPS Port This command syntax changes the HTTPS port config f network services https n Variables e n isa TCP port number between 1 and 65535 The default HTTPS port is 443 Example The following command sets the HTTPS port to 333 config f network services https 333 Changing the Telnet Configuration You can enable or disable the Telnet service or
180. different measurement units displayed according to their preferences The other alternatives for each measurement unit include Temperature degrees in Fahrenheit F 165 Chapter 5 Using the Web Interface Length or height feet ft Air pressure psi To change the measurement unit setting you must have the administrator privileges gt To set the preferred measurement units 1 Choose User Management gt Users The Manage Users dialog appears Select the user by clicking it Click Edit or double click the user The Edit User XXX dialog appears where XXX is the user name Click the Preferences tab To change the temperature unit select the desired option in the Temperature Unit field C This option displays the temperature in Celsius a F This option displays the temperature in Fahrenheit 6 Tochange the length or height unit select the desired option in the Length Unit field Meter This option displays the length or height in meters Feet This option displays the length or height in feet 7 Tochange the pressure unit select the desired option in the Pressure Unit field Pascal This option displays the pressure value in Pascals Pa A Pascal is equal to one newton per square meter psi This option displays the pressure value in psi Psi stands for pounds per square inch 8 Click OK to save the changes Tip You can determine the desired measurement unit when creatin
181. ding the firmware on the microcontroller and the number of microcontrollers that require upgrade which depends on the number of outlets The microcontroller is upgraded only when required Therefore the length of firmware upgrade time ranges from approximately 3 minutes without any microcontroller updated to almost 7 minutes with all microcontrollers for 48 outlets updated Take the above factors into account when estimating the PDU s firmware upgrade time The time indicated in this note is for web interface based upgrades Upgrades through other management systems such as Raritan s Power IQ may take additional time beyond the control of the PDU itself This note does not address the upgrades using other management systems Viewing Firmware Update History The firmware upgrade history if available is permanently stored on the Dominion PX device This history indicates when a firmware upgrade event occurred the prior and new versions associated with the firmware upgrade event and the upgrade result gt To view the firmware update history 1 Choose Maintenance gt View Firmware Update History The Firmware Update History dialog appears with the following information displayed Date and time of the firmware upgrade event 171 Chapter 5 Using the Web Interface Previous firmware version Update firmware version Firmware upgrade result 2 You may change the number of displayed columns or re sort the list
182. domain name 18 To verify if the LDAP LDAPS configuration is done correctly you may click Test Connection to check whether Dominion PX can connect to the LDAP LDAPS server successfully Tip You can also do this by using the Test Connection button in the Authentication Settings dialog 19 Click OK to save the changes The new LDAP server is listed in the Authentication Settings dialog 20 To add additional LDAP LDAPS servers repeat Steps 3 to 19 21 Click OK to save the changes The LDAP authentication is now in place Note If the Dominion PX clock and the LDAP server clock are out of sync the certificates are considered expired and users are unable to authenticate using LDAP To ensure proper synchronization administrators should configure Dominion PX and the LDAP server to use the same NTP server More Information about AD Configuration For more information about the LDAP configuration using Microsoft Active Directory see LDAP Configuration Illustration on page 347 Sorting the LDAP Access Order The order of the LDAP list determines the access priority of remote LDAP LDAPS servers Dominion PX first tries to access the top LDAP LDAPS server in the list for authentication then the next one if the access to the first one fails and so on until the Dominion PX device successfully connects to one of the listed LDAP LDAPS servers Note After successfully connecting to one LDAP LDAPS server Dominion PX STOPS trying
183. ds 256 Environmental Sensor Information 190 Environmental Sensor Threshold Information 196 Environmental Sensors 149 Equipment Setup Worksheet 14 338 Example 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 239 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 250 251 252 253 254 255 256 257 258 259 260 261 262 263 264 265 266 267 268 269 270 271 272 274 275 276 277 278 280 281 282 283 284 285 286 287 288 289 290 291 292 293 294 298 300 301 304 305 306 307 308 309 310 311 312 313 314 315 316 319 321 322 323 325 326 327 328 When Hysteresis is Useful 132 When to Disable Hysteresis 133 Example 1 Basic PDU Information 202 Example 1 Combination of IP Subnet Mask and Gateway Parameters 316 zie Raritan Index Example 2 Combination of Upper Critical and Upper Warning Settings 317 Example 2 In Depth PDU Information 202 Example 3 Basic Security Information 202 Example 3 Combination of SSID and PSK Parameters 317 Example 4 Combination of Upper Critical Upper Warning and Lower Warning Settings 317 Example 4 In Depth Security Information 203 Examples 201 Existing Roles 198 Existing User Profiles 197 Expanding the Tree 55 112 113 114 115 117 119 124 125 126 127 128 129 1
184. e An event rule defines what Dominion PX does in certain situations and is composed of two parts e Event This is the situation where Dominion PX or part of it meets a certain condition For example the inlet s voltage exceeds the warning threshold e Action This is the response to the event For example Dominion PX notifies the system administrator of the event and records the event in the log Creating an Event Rule The best way to create a new set of event rule in sequence is e Create actions for responding to one or multiple events e Create rules to determine what actions are taken when these events occur He Raritan Raritan Chapter 5 Using the Web Interface Creating Actions Dominion PX comes with two built in actions System Event Log Action This action records the selected event in the internal log when the event occurs System SNMP Trap Action This action sends SNMP traps to one or multiple IP addresses after the selected event occurs Note No IP addresses are specified for the System SNMP Trap Action by default so you must specify IP addresses before applying this action to any event rule The built in actions cannot be deleted If these actions do not satisfy your needs then create new ones gt 1 To create new actions Choose Device Settings gt Event Rules The Event Rule Settings dialog appears Click the Actions tab Click New Action In the Action name fie
185. e In order to successfully copy a Dominion PX configuration e The user must be the Admin user Or the Admin role is assigned to the user e The target Dominion PX device must be of the same model type as the source Dominion PX device e The target Dominion PX device must be running the same firmware version as the source Dominion PX device gt To copy a Dominion PX Configuration 1 Login to the target device s web interface 2 Ifthe target device s firmware version does not match that of the source device update the target s firmware See Firmware Upgrade on page 169 3 Choose Maintenance gt Bulk Configuration The Bulk Configuration dialog appears 4 Inthe Copy Bulk Configuration section click Browse and select the configuration file stored on your PC Click Upload amp Restore Bulk Configuration to copy the file A message appears prompting you to confirm the operation Click Yes to confirm the operation 7 Wait until the Dominion PX device resets and the Login page re appears indicating that the configuration copy is complete Changing the Measurement Units zie Raritan By default the following measurement units are applied to all data shown in Dominion PX web interface Temperature degrees in Celsius C Length or height meters m Air pressure pascal pa The Dominion PX web interface allows shows different measurement units based on the login name That is different users may see
186. e Non critical outlets pane and click to move it into the Critical outlets pane To make multiple selections press Ctrl click or Shift click to highlight multiple ones Click OK to save the changes Marking an Outlet Th is section only applies to PDUs with the outlet switching function You can also choose to mark a specific outlet as a critical or non critical outlet in its setup dialog 1 To mark an outlet If the Outlets folder is not expanded expand it to show all outlets See Expanding the Tree on page 55 Click the outlet you want in the Dominion PX Explorer pane The page specific to that outlet opens in the right pane Click Setup in the Settings section The setup dialog for the selected outlet appears Tip When the Outlets folder is selected you can also trigger the same 124 dialog by highlighting the outlet on the Outlets page and then clicking Setup In the Non Critical field select an option from the drop down list True This option marks the outlet as a non critical outlet False This option marks the outlet as a critical outlet Click OK to save the changes SE Raritan zie Raritan Chapter 5 Using the Web Interface Activating or Deactivating the Load Shedding Mode This section only applies to PDUs with the outlet switching function When entering the load shedding mode Dominion PX turns OFF all non critical outlets When exiting from the load shedding mode
187. e specified outlet sensor and enables this threshold at the same time Example The following command sets the Upper Critical threshold of the outlet 5 RMS current to 18A It also enables the upper critical threshold if this threshold has not been enabled yet config sensor outlet 5 current upperCritical 18 Sm Raritan Chapter 7 Using the Command Line Interface Setting the Outlet s Upper Warning Threshold This command syntax configures the Upper Warning threshold of an outlet config sensor outlet lt n gt lt sensor type gt upperWarning lt option gt Variables e lt n gt is the number of the outlet that you want to configure e lt sensor type is one of the following sensor types Sensor type Description current Current sensor voltage Voltage sensor activePower Active power sensor apparentPower Apparent power sensor powerFactor Power factor sensor activeEnergy Active energy sensor unbalancedCurrent Unbalanced load sensor Note If the requested sensor type is not supported the message Not available is displayed e option is one of the options enable disable or a numeric value Option Description enable Enables the upper warning threshold for the specified outlet sensor disable Disables the upper warning threshold for the specified outlet sensor A numeric value Sets a value for the upper warning threshold of the specified outlet sensor and enables this threshold at the same time Exa
188. e Event Rules 140 Sample Inlet Level Event Rule 141 Sample Outlet Level Event Rule 141 Sample PDU Level Event Rule 140 Saving a Dominion PX Configuration 163 Security Configuration Commands 235 Security Settings 197 Selecting IPv4 or IPv6 Addresses 213 Selecting the Internet Protocol 69 70 71 Sensor Measurement Accuracy xiii 155 Sensor RJ 12 Port Pinouts 336 Sensor Threshold Configuration Commands 260 Serial RJ 45 Port Pinouts 336 Setting an LED Color for a Rack Unit 314 315 Setting an LED Mode for a Rack Unit 314 315 Setting an Outlet s Cycling Power Off Period 254 Setting an Outlet s Thresholds 129 Setting Asset Sensor LED Colors 160 161 Setting Circuit Breaker Thresholds 131 Setting Data Logging 79 209 373 Index Setting Inlet Thresholds 130 Setting LED Colors for Connected Tags 312 Setting LED Colors for Disconnected Tags 313 Setting Non Critical Outlets and Load Shedding Mode 123 208 Setting Power Thresholds 60 129 179 Setting the Authentication Method 214 Setting the BSSID 219 Setting the Circuit Breaker s Assertion Timeout e 284 Setting the Circuit Breaker s Deassertion Hysteresis 284 Setting the Data Logging Measurements Per Entry 209 Setting the Date and Time 75 Setting the Default Outlet State 116 Setting the EAP Identity e 216 Setting the EAP Parameters 215 Setting the EAP Password 217 Setting the
189. e Network Configuration dialog appears 2 The Interface Settings tab should have been selected If not click the Interface Settings tab 3 Inthe Network Interface field click the drop down arrow and select Wired from the list 4 To change the LAN speed click the drop down arrow in the Speed field and select an option from the list Auto System determines the optimum LAN speed through auto negotiation 10 Mbit s The LAN speed is always 10 Mbps 100 Mbit s The LAN speed is always 100 Mbps 5 To change the duplex mode click the drop down arrow in the Duplex field and select an option from the list Auto Dominion PX selects the optimum transmission mode through auto negotiation Full Data is transmitted in both directions simultaneously Half Data is transmitted in one direction to or from the Dominion PX device at a time 6 Click OK to save the changes Tip You can check the LAN status in the Current State field including the speed and duplex mode Wireless Network Settings Wireless SSID PSK and BSSID parameters were set during the installation and configuration process See Initial Network Configuration on page 20 You can change them via the web interface gt To modify the wireless interface settings 1 Choose Device Settings gt Network The Network Configuration dialog appears 67 68 Chapter 5 Using the Web Interface The Interface Settings tab should have been select
190. e RJ 45 connector located on the top Bottom Connector This option indicates that the asset sensor is mounted with the RJ 45 connector located on the bottom 9 Click OK to save the changes Setting Asset Sensor LED Colors Each LED on the asset sensor indicates the presence and absence of a connected asset tag by changing its color You can configure or change the color settings for all LEDs on an asset sensor by following the procedure below This feature is accessible only by users with Administrative Privileges gt Toconfigure all LED colors 1 Choose Device Settings Asset Management The Configure Asset Management Settings dialog appears 2 Tochange the LED color denoting the presence of a connected tag either click a color in the color palette or type the hexadecimal RGB value of the color in the Color with connected Tag field 3 Tochange the LED color denoting the absence of a connected tag either click a color in the color palette or type the hexadecimal RGB value of the color in the Color without connected Tag field 4 Click OK to save the changes Tip To make a specific LED s color settings different from other LEDs see Changing a Specific LED s Color Settings on page 161 Changing a Specific LED s Color Settings You can change the color settings of a specific LED on the asset sensor so that this LED is different from other LEDs gt To change a specific LED s settings 1 Ifthe
191. e The login name attribute or AuthorizationString e The user entry object class e The user search subfilter or BaseSearch Adding the LDAP Server Settings To activate and use external LDAP LDAPS server authentication enable LDAP authentication and enter the information you have gathered for any LDAP LDAPS server Note An LDAPS server refers to an SSL secured LDAP server gt To add the LDAP LDAPS server settings 1 Choose Device Settings Security Authentication The Authentication Settings dialog appears 2 Selectthe LDAP radio button to activate remote LDAP LDAPS server authentication 3 Click New to add an LDAP LDAPS server for authentication The Create new LDAP Server Configuration dialog appears 4 P Address Hostname Type the IP address or hostname of your LDAP LDAPS authentication server Important Without the SSL encryption enabled you can type either the domain name or IP adaress in this field but you must type the fully qualified domain name if the SSL encryption is enabled 5 Type of external LDAP LDAPS server Choose from among the options available OpenLDAP Microsoft Active Directory Active Directory is an implementation of LDAP LDAPS directory services by Microsoft for use in Windows environments 6 LDAP over SSL Select this checkbox if you would like to use SSL Secure Sockets Layer SSL is a cryptographic protocol that allows Dominion PX to communicate securely with
192. e field Valid range is 1 to 65535 To enable the SSH application select the Enable SSH Access checkbox To disable it deselect the checkbox Click OK to save the changes Changing the Telnet Settings You can enable or disable the Telnet access to the command line interface or change the default TCP port for the Telnet service 1 zie Raritan To change the Telnet service settings Choose Device Settings Network Services Telnet The Telnet Settings dialog appears To use a different port type a new port number in the field Valid range is 1 to 65535 To enable the Telnet application select the Enable Telnet Access checkbox To disable it deselect the checkbox Click OK to save the changes 73 74 Chapter 5 Using the Web Interface Configuring the SNMP Settings You can enable or disable SNMP communication between an SNMP manager and the Dominion PX device Enabling SNMP communication allows Dominion PX to send SNMP trap events to the manager as well as allows the manager to retrieve and control the power status of each outlet gt To configure the SNMP communication 1 Choose Device Settings gt Network Services gt SNMP The SNMP Settings dialog appears SNMP Settings x cener 5555 SNMP v1 v2c Settings SNMP v1 v2c enable Read Community String pubic Write Community String private SNMP v3 Settings SNMP v3 O enable MIB II System Group sysCant
193. e interface see Using the Command Line Interface on page 181 By default SSH is enabled Telnet is disabled and all TCP ports for supported services are set to standard ports You can change default settings if necessary Note Telnet access is disabled by default because it communicates openly and is thus insecure In addition Dominion PX also supports SNMP protocol Changing the HTTP S Settings HTTPS uses Secure Sockets Layer SSL technology to encrypt all traffic to and from the Dominion PX device so it is a more secure protocol than HTTP By default any access to Dominion PX via HTTP is automatically redirected to HTTPS See Forcing HTTPS Encryption on page 90 gt Tochange the HTTP or HTTPS port settings 1 Choose Device Settings gt Network Services gt HTTP The HTTP Settings dialog appears SE Raritan Chapter 5 Using the Web Interface To use a different port for HTTP or HTTPS type a new port number in the corresponding field Valid range is 1 to 65535 Warning Different network services cannot share the same TCP port Click OK to save the changes Changing the SSH Settings You can enable or disable the SSH access to the command line interface or change the default TCP port for the SSH service 1 4 To change the SSH service settings Choose Device Settings Network Services SSH The SSH Settings dialog appears To use a different port type a new port number in th
194. e lower warning threshold of the specified circuit breaker sensor and enables this threshold at the same time Example The following command enables the Lower Warning threshold for the 3rd circuit breaker config f sensor ocp 3 current lowerWarning enable d SE Raritan Chapter 7 Using the Command Line Interface Setting the Circuit Breaker s Deassertion Hysteresis This command syntax configures the deassertion hysteresis value of a circuit breaker config sensor ocp lt n gt lt sensor type gt hysteresis lt value gt Variables e n is the number of the circuit breaker that you want to configure e lt sensor type is one of the following sensor types Sensor type Description current Current sensor Note If the requested sensor type is not supported the message Not available is displayed e value is a numeric value that is assigned to the hysteresis of the specified circuit breaker sensor See What is Deassertion Hysteresis on page 132 for the function of the deassertion hysteresis Example The following command sets the deassertion hysteresis of the RMS current of the 3rd circuit breaker to 0 2A That is the current must drop by at least 0 2A below the upper threshold or rise by at least 0 2A above the lower threshold before any threshold crossing event is deasserted config sensor ocp 3 current hysteresis 0 2 Setting the Circuit Breaker s Assertion Timeout This command syntax c
195. e nnne 111 Enabling LDAP and Local Authentication Services 111 Outlet Management aiu er eret e ep eor e EE co ttd xg rena taxa tae esta M nua akian dtd GR Td OE 111 DEINISSESIICIM C E E 112 Outlet MONLOG Ee 112 Outlet Swit hi P aia aie edni iddaa aaa kaavi avad NEE ania EEEE 114 Setting the Default Outlet State esssssssssssseseseeeee nennen tnn nnne Eiai 116 Changing the Cycling Power Off Period ssssssssseeeeeeeeeennenns 118 Setting the Initialization Delay uere rine ertet rhet nri CE ee o cernis 120 Setting the Inrush Guard Delay iicet nett ocean certet ween i edu ner rts 121 Setting the Outlet Power On Sequence mrima aasia inaani 121 Setting the Outlet Specific Power On Delay sssssseseeenmerenes 122 Setting Non Critical Outlets and Load Shedding Mode 123 Inlet and Circuit Breaker Management isisisi torte red Geta alta suc e ER kd rca gage 126 Naming TSM ST ae T 126 Naming Circuit Breakers 3 testen erint de Geni deed IRE eR tet ede RH e RP ead ER RR Na Ese 126 an elonteneBurdhllmee P 127 zie Raritan M Contents Monitoring Circuit Breakers ui Haie a E ed uod PEE dill india Rea 127 Setting Powel Thresholds cniri uiian 2 211 eI Desire ees a uc lie Rossa DEOR ERI YES ERR DO Pas 129 Setting an Outlets Thresholds 5 creer terr ders bres ret ere ez i toe Fete den eb aee ges 129 f mnpneanissib jc
196. e roles named PX User and PX Admin on the PDU In this illustration we assume e Users assigned to the PX User role can neither configure Dominion PX nor access the outlets e Users assigned to the PX Admin role have the Administrator permissions so they can both configure Dominion PX and access the outlets gt Tocreate the PX User role with appropriate permissions assigned 1 Choose User Management Roles The Manage Roles dialog appears Tip You can also access the Manage Roles dialog by clicking the Manage Roles button in the Edit User XXX dialog Click New The Create New Role dialog appears Type PX User in the Role Name field Type a description for the PX User role in the Description field In this example we type The role can only view PX settings to describe the role 5 Click the Privileges tab to select all View XXX permissions where XXX is the name of the setting A View XXX permission lets users view the XXX settings without the capability to configure or change them a Click Add The Add Privileges to new Role dialog appears 351 Appendix D LDAP Configuration Illustration b Select a permission beginning with the word View from the Privileges list such as View Event Settings c Click Add d Repeat Steps a to c to add all permissions beginning with View de eate I Tots db Cre ate New Role B Manage Roles amare defined administrator role including all privileges Pr
197. e version is also available by clicking the PDU folder in the Dominion PX Explorer pane Naming the PDU The default name for Dominion PX is my PX You may give it a unique device name gt To change the device name 1 Click the PDU folder Note The PDU folder is named my PX by default The name changes after customizing the device name See Naming the PDU on page 66 Click Setup in the Settings section The Pdu Setup dialog appears Type a new name in the Device Name field Click OK to save the changes Modifying the Network Configuration The network settings you can change via the web interface include wired wireless IPv4 and or IPv6 settings Modifying the Network Interface Settings Dominion PX supports two types of network interfaces wired and wireless You should configure the network interface settings according to the networking mode that applies See Connecting Dominion PX to Your Network on page 18 S Raritan zie Raritan Chapter 5 Using the Web Interface Wired Network Settings The LAN interface speed and duplex mode were set during the installation and configuration process See Initial Network Configuration on page 20 By default the LAN speed and duplex mode are set to Auto automatic which works in nearly all scenarios You can change them if there are special local requirements gt To modify the network interface settings 1 Choose Device Settings gt Network Th
198. eaker s details including its Label number Name Status closed open Lines associated with the circuit breaker Sensor readings 127 Chapter 5 Using the Web Interface Current drawn A Current remaining A Note If a sensor reading row is colored it means the sensor reading already crosses one of the thresholds or the circuit breaker has tripped See The Yellow or Red Highlighted Reading on page 60 You can view the summary of all circuit breakers at a time or the status of individual circuit breakers gt To view all circuit breakers status You can check the status of all circuit breakers at a time via either the Dashboard or Overcurrent Protectors page Using the Dashboard page a Click the Dashboard icon in the Dominion PX Explorer pane and the Dashboard page opens in the right pane b Locate the Overcurrent Protectors section on the Dashboard page Using the Overcurrent Protectors page a If the PDU folder is not expanded expand it to show all components and component groups See Expanding the Tree on page 55 b Click Overcurrent Protectors in the Dominion PX Explorer pane and the Overcurrent Protectors page opens in the right pane gt To view a circuit breaker s details 1 Expand the Overcurrent Protectors folder to show all circuit breakers in the Dominion PX Explorer pane See Expanding the Tree on page 55 2 Click the desired circuit breaker in the Domini
199. ed If not click the Interface Settings tab In the Network Interface field click the drop down arrow and select Wireless from the list Check the Hardware State field to ensure that the Dominion PX device has detected a wireless USB LAN adapter If not verify whether the USB LAN adapter is firmly connected or whether it is supported See Connecting Dominion PX to Your Network on page 18 Type the name of the wireless access point AP in the SSID field If the BSSID is available select the Force AP BSSID checkbox and type the MAC address in the BSSID field Note BSSID refers to the MAC address of an access point in the 8 wireless network In the Authentication field click the drop down arrow and select an appropriate option from the list Option Description No Authentication Select this option when no authentication data is required PSK A Pre Shared Key is required for this option Inthe Pre Shared Key field type the PSK string EAP PEAP PEAP stands for Protected Extensible Authentication Protocol The following authentication data is required Inner Authentication Only Microsoft s Challenge Authentication Protocol Version 2 MSCHAPv2 is supported allowing authentication to databases that support MSCHAPv2 Identity Type your user name for EAP authentication Password Type your password for EAP authentication CA Certificate A third party CA certificate must be provided for EAP au
200. edetined operator role The role can only view PX settings nen ei ee 7 Keep the Manage Roles dialog opened to create the PX Admin role i Raritan Appendix D LDAP Configuration Illustration To create the PX_Admin role with full permissions assigned Click New The Create New Role dialog appears Type PX_Admin in the Role Name field on gt y Type a description for the PX_Admin role in the Description field In this example we type The role includes all privileges to describe the role 4 Click the Privileges tab to select the Administrator permission The Administrator permission allows users to configure or change all Dominion PX settings a Click Add The Add Privileges to new Role dialog appears b Select the permission named Administrator Privileges from the Privileges list c Click Add y Edit Role EMX Admin x Administrator Privileges Raritan Appendix D LDAP Configuration Illustration 5 Click OK to save the changes The PX_Admin role is created d Manage Roles Description System defined administrator role including all privileges Predefined operator role The role includes all privileges The role can only view PX settings 6 Click Close to quit the dialog un si amp Raritan Appendix E Integration The Dominion PX device can work with certain Raritan or non Raritan products to provide diverse power solutions In
201. ee Quitting the Configuration Mode on page 320 PDU Configuration Commands A PDU configuration command begins with pdu You can use the PDU configuration commands to change the settings that apply to the whole Dominion PX device The commands are case sensitive so ensure you capitalize them correctly Changing the PDU Name This command syntax changes the Dominion PX device s name config pdu name lt name gt Variables e lt name gt is a string comprising up to 32 ASCII printable characters The lt name gt variable must be enclosed in quotes when it contains spaces 205 Chapter 7 Using the Command Line Interface 206 Example The following command assigns the name my px12 to the PDU config pdu name my px12 Setting the Outlet Power On Sequence This section only applies to PDUs with the outlet switching function This command syntax sets the outlet power on sequence when the PDU powers up config pdu outletSequence lt option gt Variables e lt option gt is one of the options default or a comma separated list of outlet numbers Option Description default All outlets are switched ON in the ASCENDING order from outlet 1 to the final outlet when the Dominion PX device powers up A comma All outlets are switched ON in the order you specify separated list of using the comma separated list puller numbers The list must include all outlets on the PDU Example The followi
202. elect Show Details to view details To immediately update the communication log click H To save the communication log on your computer click i Enlarge the dialog if necessary See Resizing a Dialog on page 62 You can re sort the list or change the columns displayed See Changing the View of a List on page 61 Click Close to quit the dialog SE Raritan Chapter 5 Using the Web Interface Downloading Diagnostic Information This function is for use by Raritan Field Engineers or when you are directed by Raritan Technical Support You can download the diagnostic file from the Dominion PX device to a client machine The file is compressed into a tgz file and should be sent to Raritan Technical Support for interpretation This feature is accessible only by users with Administrative Privileges gt To retrieve a diagnostic file 1 Choose Maintenance gt Download Diagnostic Information The File Download dialog appears File Download Do you want lo open of save this file za Name diag data tgz Type WinRAR archive From 192 168 84 57 While files from the Intemet can be useful some files can potentialy ham your computer If you do nol bust the source do not open or save this file What s the tisk 2 Click Save The Save As dialog appears 3 Navigate to the desired directory and click Save 4 E mail this file as instructed by Raritan Technical Support Firmware Upgrade You may upgrade your Domi
203. en the power cycling operation is performed config ft outlet 8 cyclingPowerOffPeriod 3 Inlet Configuration Commands An inlet configuration command begins with inlet You can configure an inlet by using the inlet configuration command 255 Chapter 7 Using the Command Line Interface Changing the Inlet Name This command syntax names an inlet config inlet lt n gt name lt name gt Variables e n is the number of the inlet that you want to configure For a single inlet PDU n is always the number 1 The value is an integer between 1 and 50 e lt name gt is a string comprising up to 32 ASCII printable characters The lt name gt variable must be enclosed in quotes when it contains spaces Example The following command assigns the name AC source to the inlet 1 If your Dominion PX device contains multiple inlets this command names the 1st inlet config inlet 1 name AC source Circuit Breaker Configuration Commands A circuit breaker configuration command begins with ocp The command configures an individual circuit breaker Changing the Circuit Breaker Name This command syntax names a circuit breaker config ocp lt n gt name lt name gt Variables e n is the number of the circuit breaker that you want to configure The value is an integer between 1 and 50 e name is a string comprising up to 32 ASCII printable characters The name variable must be enclosed in
204. ensors reaches the maximum you CANNOT manage additional sensors until you remove or replace any managed sensors To remove a sensor see Unmanaging Environmental Sensors on page 159 Configuring Environmental Sensors You may change the default name for easily identifying the managed sensor and describe its location with X Y and Z coordinates 1 To configure environmental sensors If the PDU folder is not expanded expand it to show all components and component groups See Expanding the Tree on page 55 Note The PDU folder is named my PX by default The name changes after customizing the device name See Naming the PDU on page 66 Click External Sensors in the Dominion PX Explorer pane and the External Sensors page opens in the right pane Select the sensor that you want to configure Click Setup The Setup of external sensor serial number sensor type dialog appears where serial number is the serial number of this sensor and sensor type is the sensor s type Tip You can also trigger the same setup dialog by selecting the desired environmental sensor icon in the Dominion PX Explorer pane and then clicking Setup on that sensor s page opened in the right pane SE Raritan Chapter 5 Using the Web Interface 5 Ifthe selected environmental sensor is the Raritan contact closure sensor connected with a third party detector switch select the appropriate sensor type in the Binary Senso
205. er Of Managed By Members Active Directory Folder techadssl com Users techadssl com ServicesApps raritan S Raritan Appendix D LDAP Configuration Illustration Step C Configure LDAP Authentication on the Dominion PX Device zie Raritan You must enable and set up LDAP authentication properly on the Dominion PX device to use external authentication In the illustration we assume e The DNS server settings have been configured properly See Modifying the Network Settings on page 69 and Role of a DNS Server on page 72 e The AD server s domain name is techadssl com and its IP address is 192 168 56 3 e The AD protocol is NOT encrypted over SSL e The AD server uses the default TCP port 389 e Anonymous bind is used gt To configure LDAP authentication 1 Choose Device Settings gt Security gt Authentication The Authentication Settings dialog appears 2 Select the LDAP radio button to activate remote LDAP LDAPS server authentication 3 Click New to add an LDAP LDAPS server for authentication The Create new LDAP Server Configuration dialog appears 4 Provide Dominion PX with the information about the AD server IP Address Hostname Type the domain name techadssl com or IP address 192 168 56 3 Important Without the SSL encryption enabled you can type either the domain name or IP address in this field but you must type the fully qualified domain name if the SSL encryption is en
206. er pane and the page for this circuit breaker opens in the right pane Click Setup The Overcurrent Protector Setup dialog appears Type a new name in the Name field Click OK to save the changes SE Raritan Chapter 5 Using the Web Interface zie Raritan Monitoring the Inlet You can view the inlet s details including its Label number Customized name Inlet sensor readings Active energy Wh Active power W Apparent power VA Power factor RMS current per line A RMS voltage per line pair V Note If a sensor reading row is colored it means the sensor reading already crosses one of the thresholds or the circuit breaker has tripped See The Yellow or Red Highlighted Reading on page 60 There are two ways to access the inlet information gt To get the overview of the inlet status 1 Click the Dashboard icon in the Dominion PX Explorer pane and the Dashboard page opens in the right pane 2 Locate the Inlet section on the Dashboard page gt To view the inlet s details 1 Ifthe PDU folder is not expanded expand it to show all components and component groups See Expanding the Tree on page 55 2 Click Inlet 1 in the Dominion PX Explorer pane and the Inlet 11 page opens in the right pane Monitoring Circuit Breakers Each circuit breaker on the Dominion PX device delivers power to a bank of outlets and draws power from one or two lines You can view the circuit br
207. eration Click Yes to confirm the deletion S Raritan Setting Up Roles zie Raritan Chapter 5 Using the Web Interface Changing the User List View You may change the number of displayed columns or re sort the list for better viewing the data See Changing the View of a List on page 61 A role defines the operations and functions a user is permitted to perform Or access Every user must be assigned at least a role Dominion PX is shipped with two built in roles Admin and Operator e The Admin role provides full permissions You can neither modify nor delete this role e The Operator role provides limited permissions for frequently used functions You can modify or delete this role By default the Operator role contains these permissions View Event Settings View Local Event Log Change Event Settings Change Pdu Inlet Outlet amp Overcurrent Protector Configuration Change Own Password Switch Outlet all outlets Note PX2 3nnn and PX2 4nnn series where n is a number does NOT have the outlet switching function implemented so the Switch Outlet permission is not available The Operator role is assigned to a newly created user profile by default See Creating a User Profile on page 82 Creating a Role Create a new role when you need a new combination of permissions gt To create a role 1 Choose User Management Roles The Manage Roles dialog appears Tip You can also ac
208. eresis lt value gt Variables e n is the number of the inlet whose pole sensors you want to configure e lt p gt is the label of the inlet pole that you want to configure Pole Label Current sensor Voltage sensor p 1 L1 L1 L1 L2 2 L2 L2 L2 L3 3 L3 L3 L3 L1 e sensor type is one of the following sensor types Sensor type Description current Current sensor voltage Voltage sensor activePower Active power sensor apparentPower Apparent power sensor powerFactor Power factor sensor activeEnergy Active energy sensor unbalancedCurrent Unbalanced load sensor Note If the requested sensor type is not supported the message Not available is displayed zie Raritan di 280 Chapter 7 Using the Command Line Interface config sensor e value is a numeric value that is assigned to the hysteresis for the specified inlet pole sensor See What is Deassertion Hysteresis on page 132 for the function of the deassertion hysteresis Example The following command sets the deassertion hysteresis of the pole 2 L2 current of the inlet 1 to 0 2A That is the current must drop by at least 0 2A below the upper threshold or rise by at least 0 2A above the lower threshold before any threshold crossing event is deasserted config f sensor inletpole 1 L2 current hysteresis 0 2 Setting the Inlet Pole s Assertion Timeout This command syntax configures the assertion timeout value of an inlet pole inletpo
209. ers above sea level config f pdu deviceAltitude 1500 Setting the Z Coordinate Format for Environmental Sensors This command syntax enables or disables the use of rack units for specifying the height Z coordinate of environmental sensors config f pdu externalSensorsZCoordinateFormat option Variables e option is one of the options rackUnits or freeForm Option Description rackUnits The height of the Z coordinate is measured in standard rack units When this is selected you can type a numeric value in the rack unit to describe the Z coordinate of any environmental sensors freeForm Any alphanumeric string can be used for specifying the Z coordinate Note After determining the format for the Z coordinate you can set a value for it See Setting the Z Coordinate on page 260 zie Raritan en Chapter 7 Using the Command Line Interface Example The following command determines that the unit of rack is used for specifying the Z coordinate of environmental sensors config pdu externalSensorsZCoordinateFormat rackUnits Networking Configuration Commands A number of network settings can be changed through the CLI such as the IP address transmission speed duplex mode and so on Setting the Networking Mode If your Dominion PX device is implemented with both of the wired and wireless networking mechanisms you must determine which mechanism is enabled for network connectivity before further configur
210. ertion Hysteresis on page 132 8 Toenable the assertion timeout for all thresholds type a numeric value other than zero in the Assertion Timeout samples field See What is Assertion Timeout on page 133 9 Click OK in the threshold setup dialog to retain the changes 10 To set the thresholds for other sensors repeat Steps 4 to 9 11 Click OK to save the changes Important The final step is required or the threshold changes are not saved Setting Circuit Breaker Thresholds Setting the circuit breaker thresholds enables the PDU to generate alerts when the circuit breaker crosses the thresholds gt To set the circuit breaker thresholds 1 Expand the Overcurrent Protectors folder to show all circuit breakers in the Dominion PX Explorer pane See Expanding the Tree on page 55 2 Click the desired circuit breaker in the Dominion PX Explorer pane and the page for this circuit breaker opens in the right pane Click Setup The Overcurrent Protector Setup dialog appears In the Threshold Configuration table click the sensor whose thresholds you want to configure 5 Click Edit A threshold setup dialog for the selected sensor appears Tip You can also double click the desired sensor in the Threshold Configuration table to trigger this dialog 6 Configure the Lower Critical Lower Warning Upper Warning and Upper Critical thresholds respectively To enable any threshold select the corresponding checkbo
211. es after customizing the device name See Naming the PDU on page 66 b Raritan Chapter 5 Using the Web Interface 2 Click External Sensors in the Dominion PX Explorer pane and the External Sensors page opens in the right pane External Sensors lel 3 4 Serial Number Type Channel Name Reading State 1 PRCO190292 69 Contact On Off 1 On Off 1 normal 2 PRCO190292 6 Contact On Off 2 On Off 2 normal 3 AEI7A00022 Temperature Temperature 1 256 C normal 4 AEI7A00022 Humidity Humidity 1 58 96 normal 3 Match the serial number from the tag to those listed in the sensor table Managing Environmental Sensors Dominion PX starts to retrieve an environmental sensor s reading and or state and records the state transitions after the environmental sensor is managed The Dominion PX device can manage a maximum of 16 environmental sensors When there are less than 16 managed sensors Dominion PX automatically brings detected environmental sensors under management You should only have to manually manage a sensor when it is not under management gt To manually manage an environmental sensor 1 Ifthe PDU folder is not expanded expand it to show all components and component groups See Expanding the Tree on page 55 Note The PDU folder is named my PX by default The name changes after customizing the device name See Naming the PDU on page 66 2 Click External Sensors in the Dominion PX Explorer
212. es on a replacement Dominion PX device add the certificate to your browser and so on gt To download the certificate and key files from a Dominion PX device Choose Device Settings gt Security gt SSL Certificate The Manage SSL Certificate dialog appears The Active SSL Certificate tab should open If not click it Click Download Key to download the private key file installed on the Dominion PX device You are prompted to open or save the file Click Save to save it on your computer Click Download Certificate to download the certificate file installed on the Dominion PX device You are prompted to open or save the file Click Save to save it on your computer Click Close to quit the dialog 105 Chapter 5 Using the Web Interface Setting Up LDAP Authentication For security purposes users attempting to log in to Dominion PX must be authenticated Dominion PX supports the access using one of the following authentication mechanisms e Local database of user profiles on the Dominion PX device e Lightweight Directory Access Protocol LDAP By default Dominion PX is configured for local authentication If you stay with this method you do not need to do anything other than create user profiles for each authorized user If you prefer to use an external LDAP server you must e Provide Dominion PX with information about the LDAP server e Create user profiles for users who are authenticated externally because a user
213. escription all This option shows all existing user profiles Tip You can also type the command without adding this option all to get the same data a specific user s name This option shows the profile of the specified user only SE Raritan Chapter 7 Using the Command Line Interface Displayed information e Without the parameter details only four pieces of user information are displayed user name enabled status SNMP v3 access privilege and role s e With the parameter details more user information is displayed such as the telephone number e mail address preferred temperature unit and so on Existing Roles This command shows the data of one or all existing roles show roles lt role_name gt Variables e role name is the name of the role whose permissions you want to query The variable can be one of the following options Option Description all This option shows all existing roles Tip You can also type the command without adding this option all to get the same data a specific role s name This option shows the data of the specified role only Displayed information e Role settings are displayed including the role description and privileges zie Raritan M 200 Chapter 7 Using the Command Line Interface Load Shedding Settings This section only applies to PDUs with the outlet switching function This command shows the load shedding settings show l
214. escription enable Enables the HTTPS access to the web interface disable Disables the HTTPS access to the web interface Example The following command disables the HTTPS access feature config f security enforceHttpsForWebAccess disable em SE Raritan Raritan Chapter 7 Using the Command Line Interface Login Limitation The login limitation feature controls login related limitations such as password aging simultaneous logins using the same user name and the idle time permitted before being forced to log out A login limitation command begins with security loginLimits You can combine multiple commands to modify the login limitation parameters at a time See Multi Command Syntax on page 318 Single Login Limitation This command syntax enables or disables the single login feature which controls whether multiple logins using the same login name simultaneously is permitted config security loginLimits singleLogin lt option gt Variables e option is one of the options enable or disable Option Description enable Enables the single login feature disable Disables the single login feature Example The following command disables the single login feature so that more than one user can log in using the same user name at the same time config security loginLimits singleLogin disable 241 Chapter 7 Using the Command Line Interface Password Aging This command syntax enables or disables
215. et mask accordingly Note Valid IP addresses range from 0 0 0 0 through 255 255 255 255 Make sure the IP addresses entered are within the Scope To create firewall rules Choose Device Settings Security IP Access Control The Configure IP Access Control Settings dialog appears Ensure the Enable IP Access Control checkbox is selected Create specific rules See the table for different operations Procedure Click Append The Append new Rule dialog appears Type an IP address and subnet mask in the IP Mask field Select Accept Drop or Reject from the drop down list in the Policy field Accept Accepts traffic from the specified IP address es Drop Discards traffic from the specified IP address es without sending any failure notification to the source host Reject Discards traffic from the specified IP address es and an ICMP message is sent to the source host for failure notification S Raritan Chapter 5 Using the Web Interface Action Procedure Click OK to save the changes The system automatically numbers the rule Insert a rule between two existing rules Select the rule above which you want to insert a new rule For example to insert a rule between rules 3 and 4 select 4 Click Insert The Insert new Rule dialog appears Type an IP address and subnet mask in the IP Mask field Select Accept Drop or Reject from the drop down list in the Policy field Accept Accepts traf
216. et the default state for all outlets 1 Click the PDU folder Note The PDU folder is named my PX by default The name changes after customizing the device name See Naming the PDU on page 66 Click Setup in the Settings section The Pdu Setup dialog appears In the Outlet state on device startup field click the drop down arrow and select an option from the list On Turns on all outlets when the Dominion PX device powers up SE Raritan 4 Chapter 5 Using the Web Interface Off Turns off all outlets when the Dominion PX device powers up last known Restores all outlets to their previous power states before the Dominion PX device was powered off Click OK to save the changes Setting the Outlet Specific Default State This section only applies to PDUs with the outlet switching function By default the power state of each outlet follows the PDU defined setting Setting the default state of a particular outlet to a value other than PDU defined overrides the PDU defined setting on that outlet 1 zie Raritan To set the default power state for a specific outlet If the Outlets folder is not expanded expand it to show all outlets See Expanding the Tree on page 55 Click the outlet you want in the Dominion PX Explorer pane The page specific to that outlet opens in the right pane Click Setup in the Settings section The setup dialog for the selected outlet appears Tip When the Outlet
217. ete detectors switches that can be plugged into DPX CC2 TR include those for e Door open closed detection e Door lock detection e Floor water detection e Smoke detection e Vibration detection Raritan does NOT provide these discrete detectors switches They are third party probes so you must test them with Raritan s DPX CC2 TR to ensure they work properly Integration and testing for third party detectors switches is the sole responsibility of the customer Raritan cannot assume any liability as a result of improper termination or failure incidental or consequential of third party detectors switches that customers provide and install Failure to follow installation and configuration instructions can result in false alarms or no alarms Raritan makes no statement or claim that all third party detectors switches will work with DPX CC2 TR Connecting Third Party Detectors Switches to DPX CC2 TR A DPX CC2 TR unit provides two channels for connecting two third party detectors switches There are four spring loaded termination points on the body of DPX CC2 TR the two to the right are associated with one channel as indicated by the LED number and the two to the left are associated with another channel You must plug the third party detectors switches into these termination points gt To connect third party detectors switches 1 Strip the insulation around 12mm from the end of each wire of two third party detectors switches 2 P
218. ew the first topic click the Home icon fat 4 To expand or collapse a topic that contains sub topics do the following To expand any topic click the white arrow P prior to the topic or double click that topic The arrow turns into a black gradient arrow 4 and sub topics appear below the topic To collapse any expanded topic click the black gradient arrow 4 prior to the topic or double click the expanded topic The arrow then turns into a white arrow D and all sub topics below that topic disappear 5 To search for specific information type the key word s or string s in the Search text box and press Enter or click the Search icon P to start the search 173 Chapter 5 Using the Web Interface f necessary select the Match partial words checkbox to include information matching part of the words entered in the Search text box The search results are displayed in the left pane 6 To have the left pane show the list of topics click the Contents tab at the bottom To show the Index page click the Index tab To email any URL link to the currently selected topic to any person click the Email this page icon Us in the toolbar 9 Toemail your comments or suggestions regarding the user guide to Raritan click the Send feedback icon 10 To print the currently selected topic click the Print this page icon 8 na Raritan Chapter 6 Using SNMP This SNMP section helps you set up Dominion PX fo
219. external authentication servers to control any access See Setting Up an SSL Certificate on page 101 and Setting Up LDAP Authentication on page 106 Forcing HTTPS Encryption HTTPS uses Secure Sockets Layer SSL technology to encrypt all traffic to and from the Dominion PX device so it is a more secure protocol than HTTP You can force users to access the Dominion PX web interface through the HTTPS protocol only By default this protocol is enabled gt To force HTTPS access to the web interface 1 Choose Device Settings Security Force HTTPS for Web Access 2 Amessage appears prompting you to confirm the operation Click Yes to enforce the HTTPS service 3 Choose Device Settings Security to verify the Force HTTPS for Web Access checkbox is selected as shown in this diagram Force HTTPS for Web Access If the checkbox is not selected repeat these steps After enabling the HTTPS protocol all access attempts using HTTP are redirected to HTTPS automatically Configuring the Firewall Dominion PX has a firewall that you can configure to prevent specific IP addresses and ranges of IP addresses from accessing the Dominion PX device By default the firewall is disabled gt To configure the firewall 1 Enable the firewall See Enabling the Firewall on page 91 2 Set the default policy See Changing the Default Policy on page 91 3 Create firewall rules specifying which addresses to accept and w
220. fic from the specified IP address es Drop Discards traffic from the specified IP address es without sending any failure notification to the source host Reject Discards traffic from the specified IP address es and an ICMP message is sent to the source host for failure notification Click OK to save the changes The system inserts the rule and automatically renumbers the following rules 4 When finished the rules appear in the Configure IP Access Control Settings dialog P Configure IP Access Control Settings x Enable IP Access Control Defaut Polcy ACCEPT v Rules PMask Policy 1 182 188 33 222 24 DROP 2 192 168 33 88 24 DROP 3 192 168 35 50 24 DROP amp 192 168 84 28S 24 ACCEPT RA Append insert Edt Delete Ok Cancel 5 Click OK to save the changes The rules are applied 93 Raritan 94 Chapter 5 Using the Web Interface Editing Firewall Rules When an existing firewall rule requires updates of IP address range and or policy modify them accordingly NOR ODN To modify a firewall rule Choose Device Settings gt Security gt IP Access Control The Configure IP Access Control Settings dialog appears Ensure the Enable IP Access Control checkbox is selected Select the rule to be modified in the rules list Click Edit or double click the rule The Edit Rule dialog appears Make changes to the information shown Click OK to save the changes Click OK to
221. for storing the history commands show history bufferlength Displayed information e The current history buffer length is displayed Examples This section provides examples of the show command Example 1 Basic PDU Information The diagram shows the output of the show pdu command show pdu PDU my PR Model P42 5260R Firmware version 2 2 0 1 26028 Example 2 In Depth PDU Information More information is displayed when typing the show pdu details command show pdu details PDU my PR Model PK2 5266R Firmware version 2 2 0 1 26020 Serial number PEG1234567 Default outlet state on startup Last known state Power cycle delay 18 seconds utlet power sequence default utlet sequence delays 1 12 8 s Inrush guard delay 200 ms Voltage rating 200 2480V Current rating A Frequency rating 50 68Hz Power rating 3 2 3 8kVR Sensor data retrieval Enabled Measurements per log entry 60 External sensor Z coordinate format Rack units Device altitude m H 203 Chapter 7 Using the Command Line Interface Example 3 Basic Security Information The diagram shows the output of the show security command Op ete cone de Disabled Role based access control Disabled Password aging Enabled Prevent concurrent user login No Strong passwords Disabled Enforce HTTPS for web access Yes Example 4 In Depth Security Information More information is displayed when typing t
222. g interval field type a polling interval to determine how often the Dominion PX is queried in the Cisco EnergyWise domain The polling interval ranges from 30 to 600 seconds Default is 180 seconds Click OK to save the changes For PX2 3nnn PX2 4nnn and PX2 5nnn series the parent child relationship is formed after the Cisco EnergyWise feature is enabled Raritan The PDU becomes a parent domain member All outlets become children of the PDU 81 Chapter 5 Using the Web Interface Rebooting the Dominion PX Device You can remotely reboot the Dominion PX device via the web interface gt To restart the device 1 Choose Maintenance gt Unit Reset The Reset Device dialog appears Reset Device Do you really want to reset the device 2 Click Yes to reboot Dominion PX 3 A message appears with a countdown timer showing the remaining time of the operation It takes about one minute to complete 4 When the reset is complete the Login page opens Now you can log back in to the Dominion PX device Note If you are not redirected to the Login page after the reset is complete click the underlined text this link in the message User Management Dominion PX is shipped with one built in user profile admin which is used for initial login and configuration This profile has full system and outlet permissions and should be reserved for the system administrator It cannot be deleted and its permiss
223. g user profiles See Creating a User Profile on page 82 Raritan Chapter 5 Using the Web Interface Network Diagnostics zie Raritan Dominion PX provides the following tools on the web interface for diagnose potential networking issues e Ping e Trace Route e List TCP Connections Tip These network diagnostic tools are also available through CLI See Network Troubleshooting on page 326 Pinging a Host The Ping tool is useful for checking whether a host is accessible through the network or Internet gt To ping a host 1 Choose Maintenance gt Network Diagnostics gt Ping The Ping Network Host dialog appears 2 Inthe Host Name field type the name or IP address of the host that you want to check 3 Inthe Number of Requests field type a number up to 10 or adjust the value by clicking either arrow This number determines how many packets are sent for pinging the host 4 Click Run Ping to start pinging the host A dialog appears displaying the Ping results 5 Click Close to quit the dialog Tracing the Network Route Trace Route lets you find out the route over the network between two hosts or systems gt To trace the route for a host 1 Choose Maintenance Network Diagnostics Trace Route The Trace Route to Host dialog appears 2 Typethe IP address or name of the host whose route you want to check in the Host Name field Click Run A dialog appears displaying the Tr
224. gh you typed only one word for the reset command the rest of the command appears after pressing Tab or Ctrl i 331 Chapter 7 Using the Command Line Interface Logging out of CLI After completing your tasks using the CLI always log out of the CLI to prevent others from accessing the CLI gt To log out of the CLI 1 Ensure you have entered the administrator mode and the prompt is displayed 2 Type exit and press Enter nm Raritan Chapter 8 Overview Inline Monitors The model name of a Dominion PX inline monitor follows this format PX2 3nnn where nis a number such as PX2 3172 Unlike most of Dominion PX devices each inlet of an inline monitor is connected to an outlet only so an inlet s rating is the same as an outlet s rating In This Chapter OV CIV WN ase Sate TK m 333 Inline Monitor s LED DISplay 2 act tet tt eot nae et e nas 333 Inline Monitor s Web Interface cccccccceceasessceeeeeseseeseseeeeeeeeaeeaeeesees 334 An inline monitor is implemented with the same number of inlets and outlets An inlet is connected to a power source for receiving electricity such as electric distribution panels or branch circuit receptacles An outlet is connected to a device that draws power such as a cooling or IT device Inlets are located at the side labeled Line and outlets are located at the side labeled Load Inline Monitor s LED Display zie Raritan
225. ghlighted Reading on page 60 Outlet Switching This section only applies to PDUs with the outlet switching function You can change the power status of one or multiple outlets with one click in the web interface To change the power state the PDU must be implemented with the outlet switching function and you must have the Switch Outlet permission Note If your Dominion PX device does not support outlet switching no outlets can be switched on off regardless of the permissions you have Switching Multiple or All Outlets This section only applies to PDUs with the outlet switching function The power state can be changed regardless of each outlet s current state That is you can turn the outlets on or off or power cycle them even if they are already in the selected state Power cycling the outlet s turns the outlet s off and then back on gt To turn on or off multiple or all outlets or cycle their power 1 Ifthe PDU folder is not expanded expand it to show all components and component groups See Expanding the Tree on page 55 Note The PDU folder is named my PX by default The name changes after customizing the device name See Naming the PDU on page 66 Click the Outlets folder and the Outlets page opens in the right pane Select the outlets whose power states you want to change and ensure their checkboxes are all selected To select all outlets select the top checkbox in the header row S Rarit
226. groups that are authenticated for accessing Dominion PX In this example we will create two user groups with different permissions Each group will consist of two user accounts available on the AD server User groups User accounts members PX User usera pxuser2 PX_Admin userb pxuser Group permissions The PX_User group will have neither system permissions nor outlet permissions The PX_Admin group will have full system and outlet permissions 347 348 Appendix D LDAP Configuration Illustration Step B Configure User Groups on the AD Server You must create the groups for Dominion PX on the AD server and then make appropriate users members of these groups In this illustration we assume e The groups for Dominion PX are named PX_Admin and PX_User e User accounts pxuser pxuser2 usera and userb already exist on the AD server gt To configure the user groups on the AD server 1 Onthe AD server create new groups PX Admin and PX User Note See the documentation or online help accompanying Microsoft AD for detailed instructions Add the pxuser2 and usera accounts to the PX User group Add the pxuser and userb accounts to the PX Admin group Verify whether each group comprises correct users PX Admin Properties i2 x General Members Member or Menaged By Members Active Directary Folder i pruser techadssl com Users fi userb techadssl com ServicesApps raritan General Members Memb
227. hat you want to configure e lt sensor type is one of the following sensor types Sensor type Description current Current sensor Note If the requested sensor type is not supported the message Not available is displayed e option is one of the options enable disable or a numeric value Option Description enable Enables the upper warning threshold for the specified circuit breaker sensor disable Disables the upper warning threshold for the specified circuit breaker sensor A numeric value Sets a value for the upper warning threshold of the specified circuit breaker sensor and enables this threshold at the same time S Raritan zie Raritan Chapter 7 Using the Command Line Interface Example The following command enables the Upper Warning threshold for the 3rd circuit breaker config sensor ocp 3 current upperWarning enable Setting the Lower Critical Threshold for a Circuit Breaker This command syntax configures the Lower Critical threshold of a circuit breaker config sensor ocp lt n gt lt sensor type gt lowerCritical lt option gt Variables e n is the number of the circuit breaker that you want to configure e sensor type is one of the following sensor types Sensor type Description current Current sensor Note If the requested sensor type is not supported the message Not available is displayed e option is one of the options enable disable or a numeric value
228. he Command Line Interface e lt sensor type is one of the following sensor types Sensor type Description current Current sensor voltage Voltage sensor activePower Active power sensor apparentPower Apparent power sensor powerFactor Power factor sensor activeEnergy Active energy sensor unbalancedCurrent Unbalanced load sensor Note If the requested sensor type is not supported the message Not available is displayed e option is one of the options enable disable or a numeric value Option Description enable Enables the lower critical threshold for the specified inlet pole sensor disable Disables the lower critical threshold for the specified inlet pole sensor A numeric value Sets a value for the lower critical threshold of the specified inlet pole sensor and enables this threshold at the same time Example The following command enables the Lower Critical threshold for the pole 2 L2 L3 voltage of the inlet 1 config f sensor inletpole 1 L2 voltage lowerCritical enable Setting the Lower Warning Threshold for an Inlet Pole This command syntax configures the Lower Warning threshold of an inlet pole zie Raritan di Chapter 7 Using the Command Line Interface config sensor inletpole lt n gt lt p gt lt sensor type gt lowerWarning lt option gt Variables e n is the number of the inlet whose pole sensors you want to configure e p is the label of the inlet pole that you want
229. he ID number and sensor reading such as the serial number and X Y and Z coordinates zie Raritan d Chapter 7 Using the Command Line Interface Outlet Sensor Threshold Information This command syntax shows the specified outlet sensor s threshold related information show sensor outlet lt n gt lt sensor type gt To show detailed information add the parameter details to the end of the command show sensor outlet n sensor type details Variables e n is the number of the outlet whose sensors you want to query e sensor type is one of the following sensor types Sensor type Description current Current sensor voltage Voltage sensor activePower Active power sensor apparentPower Apparent power sensor powerFactor Power factor sensor activeEnergy Active energy sensor Displayed information e Without the parameter details only the sensor reading state threshold deassertion hysteresis and assertion delay settings of the specified outlet sensor are displayed e With the parameter details more sensor information is displayed including location accuracy and range e fthe requested sensor type is not supported the message Not available is displayed iiic SE Raritan Chapter 7 Using the Command Line Interface Outlet Pole Sensor Threshold Information This command is available for an inline monitor only that is PX2 3nnn series where n is a number
230. he Page text box and press Enter to go to a specific page Select a log entry from the list and click Show Details or simply double click the log entry to view detailed information Note Sometimes when the dialog is too narrow the icon x takes the place of the Show Details button In that case click and select Show Details to view details Click PP to view the latest events 145 Chapter 5 Using the Web Interface Enlarge the dialog if necessary See Resizing a Dialog on page 62 You can re sort the list or change the columns displayed See Changing the View of a List on page 61 5 Click Close to quit the dialog Clearing Event Entries If it is not necessary to keep existing event history you can remove all of it from the local log gt To delete all event entries 1 Choose Maintenance gt View Event Log The Event Log dialog appears Click Clear Event Log Click Close to quit the dialog Viewing Connected Users You can see which users are being connected to the Dominion PX device and their status on the web interface Besides if you have the administrator privileges you can terminate any user s connection to the Dominion PX device gt To view connected users 1 Choose Maintenance gt Connected Users The Connected Users dialog appears showing a list of connected users with the following information Column Description User Name The login name used by each connected user IP
231. he Upper Warning Threshold for an Inlet Pole 274 Setting the Wireless Parameters 213 Setting the X Coordinate 258 Setting the Y Coordinate 258 Setting the Z Coordinate 211 259 Setting the Z Coordinate Format 153 Setting the Z Coordinate Format for Environmental Sensors 210 259 Setting Up an SSL Certificate 90 101 Setting Up LDAP Authentication 72 90 106 349 Setting Up Role Based Access Control Rules 97 Setting Up Roles 51 79 82 85 87 Setting Up User Login Controls 95 Setup Button 57 Show Commands 362 Showing Information 184 Showing the Network Connections 326 Single Login Limitation 241 SNMP Gets and Sets 177 SNMP Sets and Thresholds 179 Sorting Firewall Rules 94 Sorting Role Based Access Control Rules 100 Sorting the LDAP Access Order 109 Special Character Requirement 246 Specifications 5 335 Specifying Non Critical Outlets 199 208 Specifying the Asset Sensor Orientation 311 Specifying the Device Altitude xiii 78 210 Specifying the EnergyWise Domain 307 Specifying the EnergyWise Secret 307 Specifying the Number of Rack Units 310 Specifying the Rack Unit Numbering Mode 310 Specifying the Rack Unit Numbering Offset 311 Specifying the Sensor Type 257 States of Managed Sensors 156 Status Bar 57 Step A Determine User Accounts and Groups 345 Raritan Index Step B Configure User Groups on the A
232. he corresponding fields IP address Netmask Gateway Primary DNS server Secondary DNS server optional DNS Suffix optional 4 Click OK to save the changes 70 S Raritan Chapter 5 Using the Web Interface Note Dominion PX supports a maximum of 3 DNS servers If two IPv4 DNS servers and two IPv6 DNS servers are available Dominion PX only uses the primary IPv4 and IPv6 DNS servers Modifying the IPv6 Settings You must enable the IPv6 protocol before you can modify the IPv6 network settings See Selecting the Internet Protocol on page 69 gt To modify the IPv6 settings 1 Choose Device Settings Network The Network Configuration dialog appears Click the IPv6 Configuration tab In the IP Auto Configuration field click the drop down arrow and select the desired option from the list Option Description Automatic To auto configure Dominion PX select Automatic With this option selected you can enter a preferred host name which is optional Type the host name in the Preferred Hostname field The host name Consists of alphanumeric characters and or hyphens Cannot begin or end with a hyphen a Cannot contain more than 63 characters Cannot contain punctuation marks spaces and other symbols Select the Specify DNS server manually checkbox if necessary Then type the address of the primary DNS server in the Primary DNS Server field The secondary DNS server and DNS suffix are optio
233. he hierarchical tree the Dashboard page is overridden To return to the Dashboard page click the Dashboard icon When the Dashboard page is opened you can do the following to uncover or hide specific data gt Tocollapse any section 1 Locate the section you want to collapse 2 Click the upward arrow prior to the section title The data specific to the section is hidden gt To expand a collapsed section 1 Locate the section you want to expand 2 Click the downward arrow prior to the section title The data specific to the section appears Device Management Using the web interface you can retrieve basic hardware and software information give Dominion PX a new device name set the system date and time and modify network settings that were entered during the initial configuration process S Raritan Raritan Chapter 5 Using the Web Interface Displaying the PDU Information To display information specific to the Dominion PX device that you are using such as inlet or outlet types trigger the Device Information dialog gt To display the PDU specific information 1 Choose Maintenance gt Device Information The Device Information dialog appears Device Information Outlets Controlers Asset Strips PX2 5260R PEG1234567 200 240V 16A 3 2 3 BKVA 50 60Hz 192 168 84 70 00 0d 5d 07 ba 08 PNWCOSO160 2 2 0 1 26230 0x74 download download download Model Serial Number R
234. he setup dialog for the asset sensor appears Tip You can also trigger the same dialog by clicking Asset Management in the left pane and then clicking Asset Strip Setup or double clicking the asset sensor in the right pane To rename the asset sensor type a new name in the Name field Type the total number of rack units the connected asset sensor supports in the Channel Count field The web interface shows 48 rack units by default Determine how to number each rack unit by selecting an option in the Numbering Mode Top Down The rack units on the asset sensor are numbered in the ascending order from the highest to the lowest rack unit Bottom Up The rack units on the asset sensor are numbered in the descending order from the highest to the lowest rack unit In the Numbering Offset field select the starting number For example If you select 3 the first rack unit is numbered 3 the second is numbered 4 the third is numbered 5 and so on until the final number S Raritan zie Raritan Chapter 5 Using the Web Interface 8 Indicate how the asset sensor is mounted in the rack in the Orientation field For the latest version of asset sensors with a built in tilt sensor it is NOT necessary to configure the orientation setting manually The Dominion PX device can detect the orientation of the asset sensors and automatically configure it Top Connector This option indicates that the asset sensor is mounted with th
235. he show security details command show security details IP access control Disabled Role based access control Disabled Password aging Enabled Aging interval 68 days Prevent concurrent user login No Maximum number of failed logins 3 User block time 16 minutes User idle timeout 10 minutes Strong passwords Disabled Enforce HTTPS for web access Yes Configuring the Dominion PX Device and Network To configure the Dominion PX device or network settings through the CLI you must log in as the administrator d zie Raritan zie Raritan Chapter 7 Using the Command Line Interface Entering the Configuration Mode You must enter the configuration mode since configuration commands function in the configuration mode only gt To enter the configuration mode 1 Ensure you have entered the administrator mode and the prompt is displayed Note If you enter the configuration mode from the user mode you may have limited permissions to make configuration changes See Different CLI Modes and Prompts on page 184 2 Type config and press Enter The config prompt appears indicating that you have entered the configuration mode config _ 3 Now you can type any configuration command and press Enter to change the settings Important To apply new configuration settings you must issue the apply command before closing the terminal emulation program Closing the program does not save any configuration changes S
236. hea ae Fea utat ame ka rus dag ta neue 364 Show COMMANS s c or ode rand cope rie dee ae Feste eae a ai adai 364 CONTIGUFATIOM Command S E deeee 366 Other GOMMMANGS xui aaiocchsca dic tete sates epe a ux inae Peta ed ru Receta de etn ogee 367 xi zie Raritan Contents Index xii 369 S Raritan Applicable Models This user guide is applicable to the PX2 3nnn PX2 4nnn and PX2 5nnn series where n is a number Note For information on PX2 1nnn and PX2 2nnn series see the PX 1000 2000 Series User Guide or online help Raritan m What s New in the Dominion PX User Guide The following sections have changed or information has been added to the Dominion PX User Guide based on enhancements and changes to the equipment and or user documentation Product Features on page 1 Rack Mounting the PDU on page 5 Installing Cable Retention Clips on the Inlet Optional on page 15 Configuring Dominion PX on page 16 Connecting Environmental Sensors Optional on page 28 Outlets on page 37 Connection Ports on page 39 Modifying the Network Settings on page 69 Specifying the Device Altitude on page 78 Setting the EnergyWise Configuration on page 81 Setting the Outlet Specific Power On Delay on page 122 Creating Rules on page 137 Sensor Measurement Accuracy on page 156 Changing the Measurement Units on page 165 Downloading SNMP MIB on page 178 Using the Command Line Interface on page 181
237. hed The email can be up to 32 characters long a tis case sensitive Select the Enabled checkbox If not the user CANNOT log in to the Dominion PX device Select the Force password change on next login checkbox if you prefer a password change by the user when the user logs in for the first time after this checkbox is enabled Click the SNMPv3 tab to set the SNMPv3 access permission The permission is disabled by default a To permit the SNMPv3 access by this user select the Enable SNMPv3 access checkbox Otherwise leave the checkbox disabled Note The SNMPv3 protocol must be enabled for SNMPv3 access See Configuring the SNMP Settings on page 74 b Setup SNMPv3 parameters if enabling the SNMPv3 access permission Field Description Security Level Click the drop down arrow to select a preferred 83 Chapter 5 Using the Web Interface Field Use Password as Authentication Pass Phrase Authentication Pass Phrase Confirm Authentication Pass Phrase Use Authentication Pass Phrase as Privacy Pass Phrase Privacy Pass Phrase Confirm Privacy Pass Phrase Authentication Protocol 84 Description security level from the list a NoAuthNoPriv No authentication and no privacy AuthNoPriv Authentication and no privacy AuthPriv Authentication and privacy This is the default This checkbox is configurable only if AuthNoPriv or AuthPriv is selected When the checkbox is selected
238. hich ones to discard See Creating Firewall Rules on page 92 S Raritan Chapter 5 Using the Web Interface Changes made to firewall rules take effect immediately Any unauthorized IP activities cease instantly Note The purpose of disabling the firewall by default is to prevent users from accidentally locking themselves out of the device Enabling the Firewall The firewall rules if any take effect only after the firewall is enabled gt To enable the Dominion PX firewall 1 Choose Device Settings gt Security gt IP Access Control The Configure IP Access Control Settings dialog appears 2 Select the Enable IP Access Control checkbox This enables the firewall 3 Click OK to save the changes Changing the Default Policy After enabling the firewall the default policy is to accept traffic from all IP addresses This means only IP addresses discarded by a specific rule will NOT be permitted to access Dominion PX You can change the default policy to Drop or Reject in which case traffic from all IP addresses is discarded except the IP addresses accepted by a specific rule gt To change the default policy 1 Choose Device Settings gt Security gt IP Access Control The Configure IP Access Control Settings dialog appears Ensure the Enable IP Access Control checkbox is selected The default policy is shown in the Default Policy field To change it select a different policy from the drop down list
239. hroughout every page S Raritan Dominion PX o ir p t Deo Settings t Merwe Doremon PX Dqorer my x 1521688430 2 M Casttcart tettngs 4 Um PCI 10008 09 hire e n pios Qutet state om device startup Lo Daarut Prices Outat nation Gey on force icxtus Co Eee ternos Power off pered cung power cro 9 Li Armi Managerert 7 Aw Sio 1 D at sexe ce e Lost S ec ng facti Qitetr Pees Gud Debs Enternal persar Z 20 date formar Femoaie Vero MAC Adsrete Rating Beas e o M ett teat stearate ete Laat Lege mortit Number Menus Status bar eeoeoo e000 Data pane Setup button Logout button my Ox as known Js i04 200 cs s Daia 4rce 8 Rack tats 213 540 0002 2 07 67 5 1001204 16A J A OVA 0 t0n1 Q vio ie mi Web interface element Dominion PX Explorer pane Add Page icon The Setup button is not available on some pages such as the Dashboard page For detailed information about these web interface elements see the sections that follow zie Raritan 53 Chapter 5 Using the Web Interface Menus There is a menu bar across the top of the page You can click any menu to select the desired menu item from the drop down list Four menus are available for managing different tasks or showing information e User Management contains menu items for managing user profiles permissions roles and password e Device Settings deals
240. iagnostic commands for troubleshooting Diagnostic Commands The diagnostic command syntax varies from command to command Querying the DNS Servers This command syntax queries Internet domain name server DNS information of a network host diag nslookup host Variables e host is the name or IP address of the host whose DNS information you want to query Example The following command checks the DNS information regarding the host 192 168 84 222 diag nslookup 192 168 84 222 zie Raritan d 328 Chapter 7 Using the Command Line Interface Showing the Network Connections This command syntax displays network connections and or status of ports diag gt netstat lt option gt Variables e option is one of the options ports or connections Option Description ports Shows TCP UDP ports connections Shows network connections Example The following command displays the server connections to your Dominion PX device diag netstat connections S Raritan Chapter 7 Using the Command Line Interface Testing the Network Connectivity This command syntax sends the ICMP ECHO_REQUEST message to a network host for checking its network connectivity If the output shows the host is responding properly the network connectivity is good or the host is shut down or not being connected to the network diag gt ping lt host gt Variables e host is the host name or IP address whose
241. ialog appears Make necessary changes to the information shown c ROI Click OK to save the changes Deleting the LDAP Server Settings You can delete the authentication settings of a specific LDAP LDAPS server when the server is not available or used for remote authentication gt Toremove one or multiple LDAP LDAPS servers 1 Choose Device Settings Security Authentication The Authentication Settings dialog appears 2 Select the LDAP LDAPS server that you want to remove To make multiple selections press Ctrl click or Shift click to highlight multiple ones 3 Click Delete SE Raritan 4 5 Chapter 5 Using the Web Interface A message appears prompting you to confirm the operation Click Yes to confirm the deletion Click OK to save the changes Disabling the LDAP Authentication When the remote authentication service is disabled Dominion PX authenticates users against the local database stored on the Dominion PX device gt 1 To disable the LDAP authentication service Choose Device Settings gt Security gt Authentication The Authentication Settings dialog appears Select the Local Authentication radio button Click OK to save the changes Enabling LDAP and Local Authentication Services To make authentication function properly all the time even when external authentication is not available you can enable both the local and remote authentication services When
242. ified rule number 1 e rule number is the number of the existing rule which you want to insert the new rule above or below Example The following command adds a new IP access control rule and specifies its location in the list config f security ipAccessControl rule add 192 168 84 123 24 accept insertAbove 5 Hesults e Anew firewall control rule is added allowing all packets from the IP address 192 168 84 123 to be accepted e The newly added rule is inserted above the 5th rule That is the new rule becomes the 5th rule and the original 5th rule becomes the 6th rule Modifying a Firewall Rule Depending on what to modify in an existing rule the command syntax varies gt The command syntax to modify a rule s IP address and or subnet mask zE Raritan Chapter 7 Using the Command Line Interface config security ipAccessControl rule modify lt rule_number gt ipMask lt ip_mask gt gt The command syntax to modify a rule s policy config security ipAccessControl rule modify lt rule_number gt policy lt policy gt gt The command syntax to modify all contents of an existing rule config f security ipAccessControl rule modify rule number ipMask ip mask policy policy Variables e rule number is the number of the existing rule that you want to modify e lt ip_mask gt is the combination of the IP address and subnet mask values which are separated with a slash For example 192 1
243. iguring Event Rules on page 134 gt 1 To create event rules Choose Device Settings gt Event Rules The Event Rule Settings dialog appears On the Rules tab click New Rule In the Rule name field type a new name for identifying the rule The default name is New Rule number where number is a sequential number Select the Enabled checkbox to enable this event rule Click Event to select an event for which you want to trigger an action A pull down menu showing all types of events appears Select the desired event type from the pull down menu and if a submenu appears continue the navigation until the desired event is selected Note The option Any sub event gt refers to all events items listed on the same submenu Any slot refers to all slots Any server refers to all servers and Any user refers to all users According to the event you selected in the previous step the Trigger condition field containing three radio buttons may or may not appear 137 Chapter 5 Using the Web Interface Event types Radio buttons Numeric sensor Available radio buttons include Asserted threshold crossin Deasserted and Both g events or asset tag connections or disconnections Asserted Dominion PX takes the action only when the event occurs This means the status of the described event transits from FALSE to TRUE Deasserted Dominion PX takes the action only when the eve
244. imeout for thresholds The ability to remotely track the locations of IT devices on the rack through connected asset sensors The ability to turn off non critical servers and keep critical servers turned on when the connected UPS enters the battery powered mode Support for SNMP v1 v2 and v3 The ability to send traps using the SNMP protocol The ability to retrieve outlet specific data using SNMP including outlet state current voltage and power The ability to store a data log of all sensor measurements and retrieve it via SNMP Note Raritan s Power IQ or other external systems can retrieve the stored data samples from Dominion PX S Raritan Package Contents Raritan Chapter 1 Introduction The ability to configure and set values through SNMP including power threshold levels The ability to save one Dominion PX device s configuration settings and then deploy those settings to other Dominion PX devices Support for both of IPv4 and IPv6 networking Support for Baytech BSNMP Support for Cisco EnergyWise Support for RF Code energy monitoring system Local overcurrent protection OCP via branch circuit breakers or fuses on products rated over 20A to protect connected equipment against overload and short circuits A combination of outlet types for example C13 and C19 outlets in select models A combination of outlet voltages 120 and 208 volts in select models Support for high current devices such a
245. in electric shock personal injury and death WARNING Do not rely on this product s receptacle lamps receptacle relay switches or any other receptacle power on off indicator to determine whether power is being supplied to a receptacle Unplug a device connected to this product before performing repair maintenance or service on the device Failure to unplug a device before servicing it may result in electric shock fire personal injury and death WARNING Only use this product to power information technology equipment that has a UL IEC 60950 1 or equivalent rating Attempting to power non rated devices may result in electric shock fire personal injury and death WARNING Do not use this product to power inductive loads such as motors or compressors Attempting to power inductive loads may result in damage to the product WARNING Do not use this product to power critical patient care equipment fire or smoke alarm systems Use of this product to power such equipment may result in personal injury and death WARNING If this product is a model that requires assembly of its line cord or plug all such assembly must be performed by a licensed electrician and the line cord or plugs used must be suitably rated based on the product s nameplate ratings and national and local electrical codes Assembly by unlicensed electricians or failure to use suitably rated line cords or plugs may result in electric shock fire personal injury or death WARNING
246. indows operating systems prior to Windows Vista gt 1 To log in using HyperTerminal Connect your computer to the serial port on the Dominion PX device via a serial cable Launch HyperTerminal on your computer and open a console window When the window first opens it is blank Make sure serial port settings use this configuration Bits per second 115200 115 2Kbps Data bits 8 Stop bits 1 Parity None Flow control None Press Enter The Username prompt appears Username _ Type a name and press Enter The name is case sensitive so make sure you capitalize the correct letters Then you are prompted to enter a password Username admin Password _ Type a password and press Enter The password is case sensitive so make sure you capitalize the correct letters After properly entering the password the or gt system prompt appears See Different CLI Modes and Prompts on page 184 for details S Raritan zie Raritan 6 Chapter 7 Using the Command Line Interface Tip The Last Login information including the date and time is also displayed if the same user profile was once used to log in to the Dominion PX web interface or CLI You are now logged in to the command line interface and can begin administering the Dominion PX device With SSH or Telnet You can remotely log in to the command line interface using an SSH or Telnet client such as PuTTY Note PuTTY i
247. ing command causes the rack units to be numbered in an ascending order from top to bottom Therefore the rack unit that is most close to the RJ 45 connector is numbered 1 config assetStrip 1 rackUnitNumberingMode topDown Specifying the Rack Unit Numbering Offset This command syntax specifies the starting number of rack units on the asset sensors connected to the Dominion PX device config assetStrip lt n gt rackUnitNumberingOffset lt number gt Variables e n is the connected asset sensor s ID number shown on the Asset Management page e lt number gt is a starting number for rack units on the connected asset sensor This value is an integer number Example The following command specifies the starting number of rack units to be 5 That is the rack units are numbered 5 6 7 and so on from the first rack unit to the final one on the connected asset sensor config assetStrip 1 rackUnitNumberingOffset 5 Specifying the Asset Sensor Orientation This command syntax specifies the orientation of the asset sensors connected to the Dominion PX device config assetStrip lt n gt assetStripOrientation lt orientation gt Variables e n is the connected asset sensor s ID number shown on the Asset Management page e orientation is one of the options topConnector or bottomConnector Orientation Description topConnector This option indicates that the asset sensor is mounted with the RJ 45 connector lo
248. ing networking parameters This command syntax enables the wired or wireless networking mode config network mode lt mode gt Variables e mode is one of the modes wired or wireless Mode Description wired Enables the wired networking mode wireless Enables the wireless networking mode Note If you enable the wireless networking mode and Dominion PX does not detect any wireless USB LAN adapter or the connected wireless USB LAN adapter is not supported the message Supported Wireless device not found is displayed Example The following command enables the wired networking mode config network mode wired T sis Raritan Raritan Chapter 7 Using the Command Line Interface Configuring IP Protocol Settings By default only the IPv4 protocol is enabled You can enable the IPv6 protocol only or both for your Dominion PX device An IP protocol configuration command begins with network ip Enabling IPv4 or IPv6 This command syntax determines which IP protocol is enabled on Dominion PX config network ip protocol lt protocol gt Variables e protocol is one of the options v4Only v6Only or both Mode Description v4Only Enables IPv4 only on all interfaces This is the default v6ONIy Enables IPv6 only on all interfaces both Enables both IPv4 and IPv6 on all interfaces Example The following command determines that both of IPv4 and IPv6 protocols are enabled config network ip pro
249. inging Valid range is 1 to 1200 seconds Click OK to save the changes To add more IT devices repeat Steps 2 to 5 Click Close to quit the dialog Editing Ping Monitoring Settings You can edit the ping monitoring settings for any IT device whenever it requires changes gt 1 To modify the ping monitoring settings for an IT device Choose Device Settings Server Reachability The Server Reachability dialog appears Select the IT device whose settings you want to modify by clicking it Click Edit or double click the IT device The Edit Server XXX dialog appears where XXX is the IP address or host name of the IT device Make changes to the information shown Click OK to save the changes Deleting Ping Monitoring Settings When it is not necessary to monitor the accessibility of any IT device just remove it 1 To delete ping monitoring settings for an IT device Choose Device Settings Server Reachability The Server Reachability dialog appears Select the IT device whose ping monitoring settings you want to remove by clicking it To make multiple selections press Ctrl click or Shift click to highlight multiple ones Click Delete S Raritan 4 5 Chapter 5 Using the Web Interface A message appears prompting you to confirm the operation Click Yes to confirm the deletion Click Close to quit the dialog Checking Server Monitoring States Server monitoring results
250. io buttons include Unreachable Reachable and Both Unreachable Dominion PX takes the action only when any specified server becomes inaccessible Reachable Dominion PX takes the action only when any specified server becomes accessible Both Dominion PX takes the action when any specified server becomes either inaccessible or accessible Available radio buttons include Connected Disconnected and Both Connected Dominion PX takes the action only when an RF Code tag is physically connected to it Disconnected Dominion PX takes the action only when an RF Code tag is physically disconnected from it Both Dominion PX takes the action both when the RF Code tag is physically connected to it and when it is disconnected Available radio buttons include On Off and Both On Dominion PX takes the action only when the chosen outlet is turned ON Off Dominion PX takes the action only when the chosen outlet is turned OFF Both Dominion PX takes the action when the chosen outlet is either turned ON or turned OFF 7 Inthe Actions field click the drop down arrow select the desired action from the list and click the Add Action button aida action to add the action The added action will be listed in the list box to the right of the Actions filed To add additional actions repeat Step 7 To remove any added action select it from the list box and click the Remove selected Action button LE
251. ion enabled Enables the SNMP v3 access permission for the specified user disabled Disables the SNMP v3 access permission for the specified user idi Raritan Chapter 7 Using the Command Line Interface gt To determine the security level config user modify lt name gt securityLevel lt option2 gt Variables e name is the name of the user whose settings you want to change e option2 is one of the options noAuthNoPriv authNoPriv or authPriv noAuthNoPriv No authentication and no privacy authNoPriv Authentication and no privacy authPriv Authentication and privacy gt To determine whether the authentication passphrase is identical to the password config user modify lt name gt userPasswordAsAuthenticationPassPhrase lt option3 gt Variables e lt name gt is the name of the user whose settings you want to change e lt option3 gt is one of the options true or false true Authentication passphrase is identical to the password false Authentication passphrase is different from the password gt To determine the authentication passphrase zie Raritan ar Chapter 7 Using the Command Line Interface config user modify lt name gt authenticationPassPhrase lt authentication_passphrase gt Variables e name is the name of the user whose settings you want to change e authentication passphrase is a string used as an authentication passphrase comprising
252. ions are not user configurable except for the SNMP v3 permission All users must have a user profile which specifies a login name and password and contains additional optional information about the user Every user profile must have at least a role to determine the user s system and outlet permissions See Setting Up Roles on page 87 Tip By default multiple users can log in simultaneously using the same login name Creating a User Profile Creating new users adds a new login to Dominion PX gt To create a user profile 1 Choose User Management gt Users The Manage Users dialog appears S Raritan Raritan Chapter 5 Using the Web Interface 2 Click New The Create New User dialog appears 3 Type the information about the user in the corresponding fields Note that User Name Password and Confirm Password fields are required Field Type this User Name The name the user enters to log in to Dominion PX The name can be 4 to 32 characters long tis case sensitive Spaces are NOT permitted Full Name The user s first and last names Password The password the user enters to log in Type it first in the Password field and then again in the Confirm Confirm Password Password field The password can be 4 to 32 characters long tis case sensitive Spaces are permitted Telephone Number A phone number where the user can be reached eMail Address An email address where the user can be reac
253. iption show network Show network parameters show network ip all Show all IP configuration parameters show network Show all wireless parameters wireless details Perform this command only when you enable the wireless mode Tip You can also type show network wireless to display a shortened version of wireless settings 11 If all are correct type exit to log out of Dominion PX If any are incorrect repeat Steps 7 to 10 to change any network settings The IP address configured may take seconds to take effect Installing Cable Retention Clips on Outlets Optional If your Dominion PX device is designed to use a cable retention clip install the clip before connecting a power cord A cable retention clip prevents the connected power cord from coming loose or falling off The use of cable retention clips is highly recommended for regions with high seismic activities and environments where shocks and vibrations are expected These optional clips come in various sizes to accommodate diverse power cords used on IT equipment which are connected to C13 or C19 outlets You can request a cable retention kit containing different sizes of clips from you reseller Make sure you use a Clip that fits the power cord snugly to facilitate the installation or removal operation for servicing E Note Some NEMA sockets on PSE certified Dominion PX devices for Japan have integral locking capability and do not need cable retention clip
254. irms the operation power outlets lt numbers gt on y Variables e numbers is one of the options all an outlet number a list or a range of outlets Option Description all Switches ON all outlets A specific outlet Switches ON the specified outlet number A comma Switches ON multiple inconsecutive or separated list of consecutive outlets eee For example to specify 7 outlets 2 4 9 11 12 13 and 15 type outlets 2 4 9 11 13 15 A range of Switches ON multiple consecutive outlets seein an For example to specify 6 consecutive outlets 3 between 4 5 6 7 8 type outlets 3 8 If you entered the command without y a message appears prompting you to confirm the operation Then Type y to confirm the operation OR Type n to abort the operation MS Raritan Chapter 7 Using the Command Line Interface Example The following command turns on all outlets power outlets all on Turning Off the Outlet s This section only applies to PDUs with the outlet switching function This command syntax turns off one or multiple outlets power outlets lt numbers gt off To quicken the operation you can add the parameter y to the end of the command which confirms the operation power outlets numbers off y Variables e numbers is one ofthe options all an outlet number a list or a range of outlets Option Description all Switches OFF all ou
255. is useful The current critical threshold for the inlet is set to 19 amps A The current draw rises to 20A triggering a Current Critical alert The current then continues to fluctuate between 18 1A and 20A With the hysteresis set to 1A Dominion PX continues to indicate that the current on the inlet is above critical Without hysteresis that is the hysteresis is set to zero Dominion PX would de assert the condition each time the current dropped to 18 9A and re assert the condition each time the current reached 19A or higher With the fluctuating current this could result in a number of repeating SNMP traps and or an e mail account full of repeating SMTP alert notifications Example When to Disable Hysteresis This is an example of when you want to disable the use of hysteresis for outlets Hysteresis is disabled if its value is set to zero The upper warning threshold for current in Outlet 2 is set to 8A In normal usage Outlet 2 draws 7 6A of current A spike in demand causes the current to reach 9A triggering an alert The current then settles to the normal draw of 7 6A With the hysteresis disabled that is set to zero Dominion PX de asserts the condition once the current drops to 7 9A Otherwise the outlet would still be considered above the warning threshold as long as the current never dropped to 7 0A while the hysteresis was set to 1 The condition would not de assert even if the current draw returned to normal
256. k s front rails with your own screws bolts cage nuts or the like Raritan Chapter 3 Before You Begin zie Raritan Installation and Configuration This chapter explains how to install a Dominion PX device and configure it for network connectivity In This Chapter Before m dolorro oe Dm 13 Installing Cable Retention Clips on the Inlet Optional 15 Connecting the PDU to a Power Source sssssssseenee 15 Configuring Dominion PA uice eite nne rete ute ENEE 16 Installing Cable Retention Clips on Outlets Optional 26 Connecting Environmental Sensors Optional usssse 28 Connecting the Asset Management Sensor Optional 34 Before beginning the installation perform the following activities e Unpack the product and components e Prepare the installation site e Fill out the equipment setup worksheet e Check the branch circuit rating Unpacking the Product and Components 1 Remove the Dominion PX device and other equipment from the box in which they were shipped See Package Contents on page 3 for a complete list of the contents of the box 2 Compare the serial number of the equipment with the number on the packing slip located on the outside of the box and make sure they match 3 Inspect the equipment carefully If any of the equipment is damaged or missing contact Raritan s Technica
257. l Support Department for assistance 4 Verify that all circuit breakers on the Dominion PX device are set to ON If not turn them ON For a PDU with fuses ensure that all fuses are inserted and seated properly If there are any fuse covers ensure that they are closed Note Not all Dominion PX devices have overcurrent protection mechanisms 13 14 Chapter 3 Installation and Configuration Preparing the Installation Site 1 Make sure the installation area is clean and free of extreme temperatures and humidity Note If necessary contact Raritan Technical Support for the maximum operating temperature for your model See Maximum Ambient Operating Temperature on page 336 2 Allow sufficient space around the Dominion PX device for cabling and outlet connections 3 Review the Safety Instructions on page iii listed in the beginning of this user guide Filling Out the Equipment Setup Worksheet An Equipment Setup Worksheet is provided in this guide See Equipment Setup Worksheet on page 340 Use this worksheet to record the model serial number and use of each IT device connected to Dominion PX As you add and remove devices keep the worksheet up to date Checking the Branch Circuit Rating This section describes the rating of the branch circuit supplying power to the PDU The rating of the branch circuit shall be in accordance with national and local electrical codes For North American the
258. l commands see Multi Command Syntax on page 318 Note The measurement unit change only applies to the web interface and command line interface gt To set the preferred temperature unit config user modify name preferredTemperatureUnit lt optionl gt Variables e name is the name of the user whose settings you want to change e optioni is one of the options C or F Option Description C This option displays the temperature in Celsius F This option displays the temperature in Fahrenheit gt To set the preferred length unit config user modify lt name gt preferredLengthUnit lt option2 gt Variables e lt name gt is the name of the user whose settings you want to change e lt option2 gt is one of the options meter or feet Option Description meter This option displays the length or height in meters feet This option displays the length or height in feet zie Raritan 2 Chapter 7 Using the Command Line Interface config 302 gt To set the preferred pressure unit config user modify lt name gt preferredPressureUnit lt option3 gt Variables e lt name gt is the name of the user whose settings you want to change e lt option3 gt is one of the options pascal or psi Option Description pascal This option displays the pressure value in Pascals Pa psi This option displays the pressure value in psi Example The following command sets all measurement unit preferen
259. lable neasurenentsInletPoleSensorState neasurenentsInletPoleSensorUalue neasurenentsInletPoleSensorTimeStamp neasurenentsOutletsensor shvailabic neasurenentsOutletSensorState measurenentsOutletSensorvalue neasurenents utletSensorTimeStamp neasurements utletPoleSensorisfivailable RneasurenentsQutletPoleSensorState measurenents utletPoleSensorUalue mneasurenentst utletPoleSensorTineStamp neasurenentsQverCurrentProtectorSensorIsRvailable neasurenents verCurrentProtectorSensorState neasurements verCurrentProtectorSensorUalue neasurenents verCurrentProtectorSensorTimeStamp neasurenentsExternalSensorIsnveailable neasurenentsExternalSensorState neasurenentsExternalSensorUalue measurenentsExternalSensorTineStanp STATUS current DESCRIPTION A collection of objects providing the logging capabilities about the pdu zie Raritan ide Chapter 6 Using SNMP 180 For example the measurementsGroup group contains objects for sensor readings of Dominion PX as a whole One object listed under this group measurementsUnitSensorValue is described later in the MIB as The sensor value pduRatedCurrent part of the configGroup group describes the PDU current rating SNMP Sets and Thresholds Some objects can be configured from the SNMP manager using SNMP set commands Objects that can be configured have a MAX ACCESS level of read write in the MIB These objects include threshold objects causing Dominion P
260. ld type a new name for the action The default name is New Action number where number is a sequential number In the Action field click the drop down arrow and select the desired action from the list in response to the selected event Option Description Log event message This option records the selected events in the internal log Send SMTP message This option notifies one or multiple persons of the selected events by e mail Inthe Recipients email addresses field specify the email address es of the recipient s Use a comma to separate multiple email addresses To use the SMTP server specified in the SMTP Server Settings dialog select the Use Default SMTP Server checkbox To use a different SMTP server select the Use Custom SMTP Settings checkbox If the SMTP server settings are not configured yet click Configure See Configuring the SMTP Settings on page 80 for the information of each field 135 Chapter 5 Using the Web Interface Option Send SNMP trap Syslog message Switch outlet Description This option sends SNMP traps to one or multiple SNMP managers You can specify up to 3 SNMP managers in the Host x fields where x is a number between 1 and 3 Specify a port number for each SNMP manager in the Port x fields where xis a number between 1 and 3 Specify a community string for each SNMP manager in the Community x fields where x is a number between 1 and 3 This optio
261. le n p sensor type assertionTimeout value Variables e n is the number of the inlet whose pole sensors you want to configure e p is the label of the inlet pole that you want to configure Pole Label Current sensor Voltage sensor p 1 L1 L1 L1 L2 2 L2 L2 L2 L3 3 L3 L3 L3 L1 e sensor type is one of the following sensor types Sensor type Description current Current sensor voltage Voltage sensor activePower Active power sensor apparentPower Apparent power sensor powerFactor Power factor sensor activeEnergy Active energy sensor unbalancedCurrent Unbalanced load sensor S Raritan zie Raritan Chapter 7 Using the Command Line Interface Note If the requested sensor type is not supported the message Not available is displayed e value is a number in samples that is assigned to the assertion timeout for the specified inlet pole sensor See What is Assertion Timeout on page 133 Example The following command sets the assertion timeout value of the pole 2 L2 current of the inlet 1 to 4 samples That is at least 4 consecutive samples must cross a specific current threshold before that threshold crossing event is asserted config sensor inletpole 1 L2 current assertionTimeout 4 Commands for Circuit Breaker Sensors A sensor configuration command for circuit breakers begins with sensor ocp Setting the Upper Critical Threshold for a Circuit Breaker This comman
262. led yet config sensor outlet 5 current lowerCritical 10 Raritan Chapter 7 Using the Command Line Interface Setting the Outlet s Lower Warning Threshold This command syntax configures the Lower Warning threshold of an outlet config sensor outlet lt n gt lt sensor type gt lowerWarning lt option gt Variables e lt n gt is the number of the outlet that you want to configure e lt sensor type is one of the following sensor types Sensor type Description current Current sensor voltage Voltage sensor activePower Active power sensor apparentPower Apparent power sensor powerFactor Power factor sensor activeEnergy Active energy sensor unbalancedCurrent Unbalanced load sensor Note If the requested sensor type is not supported the message Not available is displayed e option is one of the options enable disable or a numeric value Option Description enable Enables the lower warning threshold for the specified outlet sensor disable Disables the lower warning threshold for the specified outlet sensor A numeric value Sets a value for the lower warning threshold of the specified outlet sensor and enables this threshold at the same time Example The following command disables the Lower Warning threshold for the outlet 5 RMS current config f sensor outlet 5 current lowerWarning disable zie Raritan xix Chapter 7 Using the Command Line Interface Setting the Outlet s Deassertion H
263. liseconds S Raritan Chapter 7 Using the Command Line Interface Example The following command sets the inrush guard delay to 1000 milliseconds config pdu inrushGuardDelay 1000 Specifying Non Critical Outlets This section only applies to PDUs with the outlet switching function This command syntax determines critical and non critical outlets It is associated with the load shedding mode See Setting Non Critical Outlets and Load Shedding Mode on page 123 config pdu nonCriticalOutlets lt outlets1 gt false lt outlets2 gt true Separate outlet numbers and their settings with a colon Separate each false and true setting with a semicolon Variables e outlets is one or multiple outlet numbers to be set as NON critical outlets Use commas to separate outlet numbers e outlets2 is one or multiple outlet numbers to be set as critical outlets User commas to separate outlet numbers Example The following command sets outlets 1 2 3 7 and 9 to be critical outlets and 4 5 6 8 10 11 and 12 to be non critical outlets on a 12 outlet PDU config pdu nonCriticalOutlets 1 3 7 9 false 4 6 8 10 12 true zie Raritan xii Chapter 7 Using the Command Line Interface 210 Enabling or Disabling Data Logging This command syntax enables or disables the data logging feature config pdu dataRetrieval option Variables e option is one of the options enable or disable Option Descri
264. lit Note The LED display returns to the Automatic Mode after 20 seconds elapse since the last time any button was pressed S Raritan zie Raritan Chapter 4 Using the PDU Reset Button The reset button is located inside the small hole near the two digit row The Dominion PX device can be reset to its factory default values using this button when a serial connection is available See Resetting to Factory Defaults on page 344 Without the serial connection pressing this reset button restarts the Dominion PX device s software without any loss of power to outlets The following images indicate the locations of the reset button on OU 1U and 2U models Roritan pueri oO EU Em uat ima wes n im cmt O o o NA o IE bweicaiwa Peri 45 46 Chapter 4 Using the PDU Circuit Breakers Dominion PX models rated over 20A North American or 16A international contain branch circuit breakers These circuit breakers automatically trip disconnect power when the current flowing through the circuit breaker exceeds its rating If the circuit breaker switches off power the LED display shows e CbE which means circuit breaker error in the three digit row e The lowest outlet number affected by the circuit breaker error in the two digit row You are still able to switch between outlets on the LED display when the circuit breaker error occurs Outlets affected by the error show CbE Unaffected outlets
265. lt reset gt To restart the Dominion PX device 1 Ensure you have entered the administrator mode and the prompt is displayed 2 Type either of the following commands to restart the Dominion PX device reset unit SOR reset unit y 3 If you entered the command without y in Step 2 a message appears prompting you to confirm the operation Type y to confirm the reset 4 Wait until the Username prompt appears indicating the reset is complete Resetting to Factory Defaults This command restores all settings of the Dominion PX device to factory defaults gt To reset Dominion PX settings use either command reset factorydefaults OR reset factorydefaults y See Using the CLI Command on page 345 for more information Network Troubleshooting Dominion PX provides 4 diagnostic commands for troubleshooting network problems ns ookup netstat ping and traceroute The diagnostic commands function as corresponding Linux commands and can get corresponding Linux outputs SE Raritan Chapter 7 Using the Command Line Interface Entering the Diagnostic Mode Diagnostic commands function in the diagnostic mode only gt To enter the diagnostic mode 1 Ensure you have entered the administrator mode and the prompt is displayed 2 Type diag and press Enter The diag prompt appears indicating that you have entered the diagnostic mode 3 Now you can type any d
266. lt color gt Variables e Color is the hexadecimal RGB value of a color in HTML format The lt color gt variable ranges from 000000 to FFFFFF Example This command syntax sets the LED color for all rack units to BLACK that is 000000 indicate the absence of a connected asset tag config f assetStripManagement LEDColorForDisconnectedTags 000000 Note Black color causes the LEDs to stay off Rack Unit Configuration A rack unit configuration command begins with rackUnit 315 Chapter 7 Using the Command Line Interface Setting the LED Operation Mode This command syntax determines whether a specific rack unit on the specified asset sensor follows the global LED color settings config rackUnit lt n gt lt rack_unit gt LEDOperationMode lt mode gt Variables e n is the connected asset sensor s ID number shown on the Asset Management page e rack unit is the ID number of the rack unit whose LED mode you want to configure The ID number is shown on the Asset Strip page e mode is one of the LED modes automatic or manual Mode Description automatic This option makes the LED of the specified rack unit follow the global LED color settings See Global LED Color Settings on page 314 This is the default manual This option enables selection of a different LED color and LED mode for the specified rack unit When this option is selected see Setting an LED Color for a Rack
267. mber in the chain or serial port number in the Proxy Index field ON aeg 355 356 Appendix E Integration Note If the PDU is not in this type of configuration leave the Proxy Index field blank 4 Ifthe PDU is a Dominion PX enter a valid Username and Password for the PDU in the Dominion PX Credentials section Re enter the password in the Password Confirm field 5 Select the SNMP Version For SNMP version 1 2c PDUs enter an SNMP Community String that has at least READ permissions to this PDU This enables polling the PDU for data Enter an SNMP community string that has both READ and WRITE permissions to the PDU to enable power control outlet renaming and buffered data retrieval For SNMP version 3 PDUs enter the Username and select an Authorization Level The authorization levels are noAuthNoPriv No Authentication Passkey No Encoding Passkey authNoPriv Authentication Passkey No Encoding Passkey authPriv Authentication Passkey Encoding Passkey a Depending on the Authorization Level selected you must enter additional credentials for Authorization and Privacy b Authorization Protocol Select MD5 or SHA c Enterthe PDU s Authorization Passkey then re enter the passkey in the Authorization Passkey Confirm field d Privacy Protocol Select DES or AES e Enter the PDU s Privacy Passkey then re enter the passkey in the Privacy Passkey Confirm field Note You must enable the SNMP agent
268. mm dd format for the date and the hh mm ss format for the time To set the date delete existing numbers in the Date field and type new ones or click the calendar icon 3 to select a date See How to Use the Calendar on page 77 for details The time is measured in 24 hour format so enter 13 for 1 00pm 14 for 2 00pm and so on You can enter the time by deleting existing numbers and typing new ones in the hour minute and second fields or clicking the arrows to adjust each number Tolet an NTP server set the date and time select the Synchronize with NTP Server radio button Then enter the IP address or host name of the primary NTP server in the Primary Time Server field A secondary NTP server is optional Note If the Dominion PX device s IP address is assigned through DHCP the NTP server addresses may be automatically discovered When this occurs the data you entered in the fields of primary and secondary time server will be overridden 5 Click OK to save the changes Important If you are using Raritan s Power IQ to manage Dominion PX you must configure Power IQ and Dominion PX to use the same NTP servers S Raritan zie Raritan Chapter 5 Using the Web Interface How to Use the Calendar The calendar icon 3 next to the Date field is a convenient tool to quickly change the year month and date 1999 12 31 Sto hi ES TS pA TTE eh 8 29 307 Te 1 3 eo P P 81780 ii 12 19 14 15 1
269. mple The following command enables the Upper Warning threshold of the outlet 5 RMS current config f sensor outlet 5 current upperWarning enable zie Raritan a Chapter 7 Using the Command Line Interface Setting the Outlet s Lower Critical Threshold This command syntax configures the Lower Critical threshold of an outlet config f sensor outlet n sensor type lowerCritical option Variables e n is the number of the outlet that you want to configure e sensor type is one of the following sensor types Sensor type Description current Current sensor voltage Voltage sensor activePower Active power sensor apparentPower Apparent power sensor powerFactor Power factor sensor activeEnergy Active energy sensor unbalancedCurrent Unbalanced load sensor Note If the requested sensor type is not supported the message Not available is displayed e option is one of the options enable disable or a numeric value Option Description enable Enables the lower critical threshold for the specified outlet sensor disable Disables the lower critical threshold for the specified outlet sensor A numeric value Sets a value for the lower critical threshold of the specified outlet sensor and enables this threshold at the same time Example The following command sets the Lower Critical threshold for the outlet 5 RMS current to 10A It also enables the lower critical threshold if this threshold has not been enab
270. n makes Dominion PX automatically forward event messages to the specified syslog server Inthe Syslog server field specify the IP address to which syslog is forwarded n the Port field specify an appropriate port number This option turns on off or power cycles a specific outlet a Inthe Outlet field select an outlet Inthe Operation field select an operation for the selected outlet Turn Outlet On Turns on the selected outlet Turn Outlet Off Turns off the selected outlet Cycle Outlet Cycles power to the selected outlet Note The Switch outlet option is NOT available for PDUs without the outlet switching function 6 Click Save to save the new action Note If you do not click Save before quitting the current settings page a message appears Then click Yes to save the changes Discard to abort the changes or Cancel to return to the current settings page 7 Tocreate additional actions repeat Steps 3 to 7 8 Click Close to quit the dialog 136 S Raritan Raritan Chapter 5 Using the Web Interface Creating Rules After required actions are available you can create event rules to determine what actions are taken to respond to specific events By default Dominion PX provides two built in event rules System Event Log Rule and System SNMP Trap Rule If the built in rules do not satisfy you needs create new ones Note For information on the built in event rules see Conf
271. n on the thresholds see Setting Power Thresholds on page 129 S Raritan zie Raritan Chapter 5 Using the Web Interface Changing the View of a List Some dialogs or data pages contain a list or table such as the Manage Users dialog shown below You may change the number of displayed columns or re sort the list for better viewing the data Note the column or sorting changes are not saved when quitting the dialog or data page Next time when the dialog or page re opens the list returns to the default view amp Manage Users x Active User Name Full Name Roles Zw Johnny Johnny TS Operator s admin Administrator Admin Manage Roles New Edit Close Note Not all dialogs support the sorting or column change functions Changing the Column You can hide some columns of a list or table or adjust a specific column s width gt To change displayed columns 1 Hover your mouse pointer over any column header A black triangle M appears to the far right of this column header Click the black triangle and a drop down menu appears Point to Columns A submenu showing all columns appears Click any column you want to deselect or select To hide a column have its checkbox deselected To show a column have its checkbox selected gt To change the column width 1 Hover the mouse pointer to the right border of the desired column 2 When the mouse pointer turns to a two way arrow drag the border horizontally t
272. n outlet number such as switchOutlet 1 switchOutlet 2 switchOutlet 3 or the like e A list of comma separated outlets such as switchOutlet 1 3 5 7 8 9 305 Chapter 7 Using the Command Line Interface Example The following command creates a new role and assigns privileges to the role config role create tester firmwareUpdate viewEventSetup Results e Anewrole tester is created e Two privileges are assigned to the role firmwareUpdate Firmware Update and viewEventSetup View Event Settings Modifying a Role You can modify diverse parameters of an existing role including its privileges gt To modify a role s description config f role modify name description description Variables e name is a string comprising up to 32 ASCII printable characters e lt description gt is a description comprising alphanumeric characters The description variable must be enclosed in quotes when it contains spaces gt To add more privileges to a specific role config role modify lt name gt addPrivileges privilegel privilege2 privilege3 If a specific privilege contains any arguments add a colon and the argument s after that privilege i Raritan Chapter 7 Using the Command Line Interface config role modify lt name gt addPrivileges lt privilegel gt lt argument1 gt lt argument2 gt lt privilege2 gt lt argument1 gt lt argument2 gt l
273. nal Static To manually assign an IP address select Static and enter the following information in the corresponding fields IP address Gateway Primary DNS server Secondary DNS server optional a DNS Suffix optional 4 Click OK to save the changes zie Raritan 72 Chapter 5 Using the Web Interface Note Dominion PX supports a maximum of 3 DNS servers If two IPv4 DNS servers and two IPv6 DNS servers are available Dominion PX only uses the primary IPv4 and IPv6 DNS servers Role of a DNS Server As Internet communications are carried out on the basis of IP addresses appropriate DNS server settings are required for mapping domain names host names to corresponding IP addresses or Dominion PX may fail to connect to the given host Therefore DNS server settings are important for LDAP authentication With appropriate DNS settings Dominion PX can resolve the LDAP server s name to an IP address for establishing a connection If the SSL encryption is enabled the DNS server settings become critical since only fully qualified domain name can be used for specifying the LDAP server For information on LDAP authentication see Setting Up LDAP Authentication on page 106 Modifying the Network Service Settings Dominion PX supports these network communication services HTTPS HTTP Telnet and SSH HTTPS and HTTP enable the access to the web interface and Telnet and SSH enable the access to the command lin
274. nd Line Interface Setting the SSID This command syntax specifies the SSID string config network wireless SSID lt ssid gt Variables e lt ssid gt is the name of the wireless access point which consists of Up to 32 ASCII characters No spaces ASCII codes 0x20 Ox7E Example The following command assigns myssid as the SSID config network wireless SSID myssid Setting the Authentication Method This command syntax sets the wireless authentication method to either PSK or Extensible Authentication Protocol EAP config network wireless authMethod lt method gt Variables e method is one of the authentication methods psk or eap Method Description psk The wireless authentication method is set to PSK eap The wireless authentication method is set to EAP Example The following command sets the wireless authentication method to PSK config f network wireless authMethod psk zie Raritan e Chapter 7 Using the Command Line Interface Setting the PSK If the Pre Shared Key PSK authentication method is selected you must assign a PSK passphrase by using this command syntax config network wireless PSK lt psk gt Variables e lt psk gt is a string or passphrase that consists of Up to 32 ASCII characters No spaces ASCII codes 0x20 Ox7E Example This command assigns encryp key as the PSK config network wireless PSK encryp key Setting the EAP Parameters When the
275. nd time are displayed to the right of the bar If positioning the mouse pointer over the system date and time the time zone information is also displayed 221 10 13 PM Sometimes a flag icon 7 may appear to the far right of the bar when a communication error between the Dominion PX device and the graphical user interface GUI occurs When the icon appears you can click the icon to view the communications log See Viewing the Communication Log on page 168 Add Page Icon The Add Page icon ie located on the top of the data pane lets you open data pages of multiple tree items without closing any opened page gt To open new data pages 1 Click the Add Page icon ie A new tab along with a blank data page appears 2 Click a tree item whose data page you want to open The data of the selected tree item is then displayed on the blank data page 3 Toopen more data pages repeat Steps 1 to 2 All tabs representing opened pages are shown across the top of the page SE Raritan Raritan Chapter 5 Using the Web Interface The following diagram shows a multi tab example Dashboard 3 my Px 192 168 84 68 InletI1 amp 9 Outets Overcurrent Protectors External Sensors amp 4 With multiple pages opened you can take these actions To return to any previous data page click the corresponding tab If there are too many tabs to be all shown two arrows del and gt appear at the left and right borde
276. nd to override the DHCP assigned DNS server with the one you specified config network ipv6 overrideDNS option Variables e option is one of the options enable or disable Option Description enable This option overrides the DHCP assigned DNS server with the primary secondary DNS server you assign disable This option resumes using the DHCP assigned DNSG server Example The following command overrides the DHCP assigned DNS server with the one you specified config f network ipv6 overrideDNS enabl Setting the LAN Interface Parameters A LAN interface configuration command begins with network interface The commands are case sensitive so ensure you capitalize them correctly Changing the LAN Interface Speed This command syntax determines the LAN interface speed config network interface LANInterfaceSpeed lt option gt Variables e lt option gt is one of the options auto 10Mbps and 100Mbps Option Description auto System determines the optimum LAN speed through auto negotiation d Raritan Chapter 7 Using the Command Line Interface Option Description 10Mbps The LAN speed is always 10 Mbps 100Mbps The LAN speed is always 100 Mbps Example The following command lets Dominion PX determine the optimal LAN interface speed through auto negotiation config network interface LANInterfaceSpeed auto Changing the LAN Duplex Mode This command syntax determines the LAN interface duplex mo
277. networking connectivity you want to check Options e You can include any or all of additional options listed below in the ping command Options Description count lt number1 gt Determines the number of messages to be sent lt number1 gt is an integer number size lt number2 gt Determines the packet size lt number2 gt is an integer number in bytes timeout lt number3 gt Determines the waiting period before timeout number3 is an integer number in seconds The command looks like this syntax when it includes all options diag ping host count lt numberl gt size number2 timeout number3 Example The following command checks the network connectivity of the host 192 168 84 222 by sending the ICMP ECHO REQUEST message to the host for 5 times diag ping 192 168 84 222 count 5 zie Raritan 330 Chapter 7 Using the Command Line Interface Tracing the Route This command syntax traces the network route between your Dominion PX device and a network host diag gt traceroute lt host gt Variables e host is the name or IP address of the host you want to trace Example The following command displays the existing network routing for the host 192 168 84 222 diag traceroute 192 168 84 222 Quitting the Diagnostic Mode gt To quit the diagnostic mode use this command diag gt exit The prompt appears after pressing Enter indicating that you have entered the administ
278. ng command causes a 10 outlet PDU to first power on the 8th to 6th outlets and then the rest of outlets in the ascending order after the PDU powers up config pdu outletSequence 8 6 1 5 9 10 Setting the Outlet Power On Sequence Delay This section only applies to PDUs with the outlet switching function This command syntax sets the delays in seconds for outlets when turning on all outlets in sequence S Raritan Chapter 7 Using the Command Line Interface config pdu outletSequenceDelay lt outlet1 gt lt delayl gt lt outlet2 gt lt delay2 gt lt outlet3 gt lt delay3 gt Raritan Separate outlet numbers and their delay settings with a colon Outlets followed by delays are separated with a semicolon Variables e lt outleti gt lt outlet2 gt lt outlet8 gt and the like are individual outlet numbers or a range of outlets e lt delay1 gt lt delay2 gt lt delay3 gt and the like are the delay time in seconds Example The following command determines that the outlet 1 s delay is 2 5 seconds outlet 2 s delay is 3 seconds and the delay for outlets 3 through 5 is 10 seconds config pdu outletSequenceDelay 1 2 5 2 3 3 5 10 Setting the PDU Defined Default Outlet State This section only applies to PDUs with the outlet switching function This command syntax determines the initial power condition of all outlets after powering up the PDU config pdu outletStateOnDeviceStartup lt
279. ng sensor types Sensor type Description current Current sensor voltage Voltage sensor activePower Active power sensor apparentPower Apparent power sensor powerFactor Power factor sensor activeEnergy Active energy sensor unbalancedCurrent Unbalanced load sensor Note If the requested sensor type is not supported the message Not available is displayed e option is one of the options enable disable or a numeric value Option Description enable Enables the upper critical threshold for the specified inlet sensor disable Disables the upper critical threshold for the specified inlet sensor A numeric value Sets a value for the upper critical threshold of the specified inlet sensor and enables this threshold at the same time Example The following command enables the Upper Critical threshold for the inlet 1 RMS current config sensor inlet 1 current upperCritical enable S Raritan zie Raritan Chapter 7 Using the Command Line Interface Setting the Inlet s Upper Warning Threshold This command syntax configures the Upper Warning threshold of an inlet config f sensor inlet n sensor type upperWarning option Variables e n is the number of the inlet that you want to configure For a single inlet PDU n is always the number 1 e sensor type is one of the following sensor types Sensor type Description current Current sensor voltage Voltage sensor activePower Active power
280. nion PX device to benefit from the latest enhancements improvements and features zie Raritan 170 Chapter 5 Using the Web Interface Updating the Dominion PX Firmware You must be the system administrator or log in to the user profile with the Firmware Update permission to update the Dominion PX device s firmware If applicable to your model download the latest firmware file from the Raritan website read the release notes then start the upgrade If you have any questions or concerns about the upgrade contact Raritan Technical Support BEFORE upgrading Warning Do NOT perform the firmware upgrade over a wireless connection gt To update the firmware 1 Choose Maintenance gt Update Firmware The Firmware Update dialog appears 2 Inthe Firmware File field click Browse to select an appropriate firmware file Click Upload A progress bar appears to indicate the upload status When the upload is complete version information of both the existing firmware and uploaded firmware is shown providing you a last chance to terminate the update 5 Toview the certificate of the uploaded firmware click View Certificate Optional 6 To proceed with the update click Update Firmware The update may take several minutes Warning Do NOT power off the Dominion PX device during the update During the firmware update Aprogress bar appears in the web interface indicating the update status On the Dominion
281. nitoring Circuit Breakers 127 Monitoring Server Accessibility e 146 Monitoring the Inlet e 127 More Information 59 More Information about AD Configuration 109 Mounting 1U or 2U Models 11 Mounting Zero U Models Using Button Mount 7 Mounting Zero U Models Using Claw Foot Brackets 9 Mounting Zero U Models Using L Brackets 6 Mounting Zero U Models Using Two Rear Buttons 10 Multi Command Syntax 236 240 243 248 291 293 295 299 316 N Naming an Asset Sensor 309 Naming Circuit Breakers 126 Naming Outlets 112 Naming the Inlet 126 Naming the PDU 55 56 57 66 78 114 116 118 120 121 122 123 125 150 151 153 155 158 Naming the Rack PDU in the KX II Port Page for Power Strips 356 S Raritan Network Configuration 184 Network Diagnostics 166 Network Service Settings 185 Network Troubleshooting 166 324 Networking Configuration Commands 211 Networking Mode 185 Numeric Character Requirement 246 O Other Commands 365 Outlet Configuration Commands 252 Outlet Information 187 Outlet Management 111 Outlet Monitoring 112 Outlet Page 333 Outlet Pole Sensor Threshold Information 192 Outlet Sensor Threshold Information 191 Outlet Switching 114 Outlets xiii 37 Overriding the DHCP Assigned DNS Server 223 226 227 Overview 331 P Package Contents 3 13 Panel Components 37 Password Aging 241 Passwor
282. ns press Ctrl click or Shift click to highlight multiple ones 4 Click Delete SE Raritan Chapter 5 Using the Web Interface 5 A message appears prompting you to confirm the operation Click Yes to confirm the deletion 6 Click OK to save the changes Setting Up an SSL Certificate Having an X 509 digital certificate ensures that both parties in an SSL connection are who they say they are To obtain a certificate for Dominion PX create a Certificate Signing Request CSR and submit it to a certificate authority CA After the CA processes the information in the CSR it provides you with an SSL certificate which you must install on the Dominion PX device Note See Forcing HTTPS Encryption on page 90 for instructions on forcing users to employ SSL when connecting to Dominion PX A CSR is not required in either of the following scenarios e You decide to generate a self signed certificate on the Dominion PX device e Appropriate valid certificate and key files have been available Certificate Signing Request When appropriate certificate and key files for Dominion PX are NOT available one of the alternatives is to create a CSR and private key on the Dominion PX device and send the CSR to a CA for signing the certificate Creating a Certificate Signing Request Follow this procedure to create the CSR for your Dominion PX device gt To create a CSR 1 Choose Device Settings gt Security gt SSL Certific
283. ns through the mounting holes then letting the device drop slightly This secures the Dominion PX device in place and completes the installation Mounting 1U or 2U Models Using the appropriate brackets and tools fasten the 1U or 2U Dominion PX device to the rack or cabinet If your PDU has circuit breakers implemented read Circuit Breaker Orientation Limitation on page 5 before mounting it gt To mount the Dominion PX device 1 Attach one rackmount bracket to one side of the Dominion PX device a Align two oval shaped holes of the rackmount bracket with two threaded holes on one side of the Dominion PX device b Secure the rackmount bracket with two of the Raritan provided Screws Note The appropriate oval shaped hole locations of the rackmount bracket may vary according to the threaded holes on you model zie Raritan 12 Chapter 2 Rack Mounting the PDU 2 Repeat Step 1 for securing the other rackmount bracket to the other side of Dominion PX 3 Insert one end of the cable support bar into the L shaped hole of the rackmount bracket and align the hole on the end of the bar with the threaded hole adjacent to the L shaped hole 4 Secure the cable support bar with one of the Raritan provided cap screws 5 Repeat Steps 3 to 4 to secure the other end of the cable support bar to the other rackmount bracket Mount the Dominion PX device on the rack by securing the rackmount brackets ears to the rac
284. ns the same gt To reset the handle type breakers 1 Lift the hinged cover over the breaker 2 Check if the colorful rectangle or triangle below the operating handle is GREEN indicating the breaker has tripped 3 Examine your Dominion PX device and the connected equipment to remove or resolve the cause that results in the overload or short circuit This step is required or you cannot proceed with the next step 4 Pull up the operating handle until the colorful rectangle or triangle turns RED zie Raritan i 48 Chapter 4 Using the PDU Beeper Dominion PX includes a beeper to issue an audible alarm when a significant situation occurs The beeper sounds an alarm within 3 seconds of a circuit breaker trip The beeper stops as soon as all circuit breakers have been reset SE Raritan Chapter 5 Using the Web Interface This chapter explains how to use the web interface to administer a Dominion PX device In This Chapter Supported Web Browsers sssssssssseseeeeeee eene 49 Logging in to the Web Interface ssssseeenee 50 Bes 52 Introduction to the Web Interface sesssseesseeseeeeee 53 Viewing the Dashboard iscsi eter tetigit te en p rema betur 64 Device Managelment ii nete ten eE EX R RE REF ae Re eed Ux rea auae 64 User Managemient ce cec nore unt Nee nena ER sa Kx ea Eu aE 82 Setting Up Roles reri ree ees e n x
285. nserve UPS battery life This feature is known as load shedding Activation of load shedding can be accomplished using the web interface or SNMP Outlets that are turned off when load shedding is activated are called non critical Outlets that are not affected by load shedding are called critical outlets When load shedding is deactivated the PDU will turn back on all non critical outlets By default all outlets are configured as critical until you configure them otherwise Marking All Outlets This section only applies to PDUs with the outlet switching function You can configure all critical and non critical outlets at a time gt To mark all outlets at a time 1 Click the PDU folder Note The PDU folder is named my PX by default The name changes after customizing the device name See Naming the PDU on page 66 2 Click Setup Non Critical Outlets in the Load Shedding section The Non critical Outlet Setup dialog appears 123 Chapter 5 Using the Web Interface Tip This dialog can be also triggered by clicking the Non critical 5 Outlet Setup button on the Outlets page when selecting the Outlets folder To mark an outlet as non critical select it from the list in the Critical outlets pane and click to move it into the Non critical outlets pane To make multiple selections press Ctrl click or Shift click to highlight multiple ones To mark an outlet as critical select it from the list in th
286. nt condition disappears This means the status of the described event transits from TRUE to FALSE Both Dominion PX takes the action both when the event occurs asserts and when the event condition disappears deasserts Discrete on off Available radio buttons include Alarmed No sensor state longer alarmed and Both change Alarmed Dominion PX takes the action only when the chosen sensor enters the alarmed state that is the abnormal state No longer alarmed Dominion PX takes the action only when the chosen sensor returns to normal Both Dominion PX takes the action both when the chosen sensor enters or quits the alarmed state Sensor Available radio buttons include Unavailable availability Available and Both Unavailable Dominion PX takes the action only when the chosen sensor is NOT detected and becomes unavailable Available Dominion PX takes the action only when the chosen sensor is detected and becomes available Both Dominion PX takes the action both when the chosen sensor becomes unavailable or available dis Raritan Chapter 5 Using the Web Interface Event types Radio buttons Network interface Available radio buttons include Link state is up link state Link state is down and Both Link state is up Dominion PX takes the action only when the network link state changes from down to up Link state is down Dominion PX takes the action only when the net
287. numeric value other than zero in the Assertion Timeout samples field See What is Assertion Timeout on page 133 Note The Upper Critical and Lower Critical values are points at which Dominion PX considers the operating environment critical and outside the range of the acceptable threshold 9 Click OK to save the changes 10 Repeat Steps 3 through 9 to configure additional environmental sensors zie Raritan m Chapter 5 Using the Web Interface Setting the Z Coordinate Format You can use either the number of rack units or a descriptive text to describe the vertical locations Z coordinates of environmental sensors gt To determine the Z coordinate format 1 Click the PDU folder Note The PDU folder is named my PX by default The name changes after customizing the device name See Naming the PDU on page 66 Click Setup in the Settings section The Pdu Setup dialog appears In the External sensors Z coordinate format field click the drop down arrow and select an option from the list Rack Units The height of the Z coordinate is measured in standard rack units When this is selected you can type a numeric value in the rack unit to describe the Z coordinate of any environmental sensors Free Form Any alphanumeric string can be used for specifying the Z coordinate 4 Click OK to save the changes m Raritan Raritan Chapter 5 Using the Web Interface Describing the Sensor Location U
288. o widen or shrink the column 61 Chapter 5 Using the Web Interface Changing the Sorting By default a list or table is sorted against the first column in the ascending order You can re sort the list in a reverse order or against a different column gt To re sort the list by doing either of the following e Click the column header against which you want to sort the list a The first click sorts the list in the ascending order indicated by a blue upward pointing triangle b The second click reverses the sorting to the descending order indicated by a blue downward pointing triangle e Select a sorting command from the column menu a Hover your mouse pointer over the column header against which you want to sort the list A black triangle appears to the far right of this column header b Click the black triangle and a drop down menu appears c Select Sort Ascending or Sort Descending The newly selected column header is marked with the upward or downward pointing triangle Resizing a Dialog Most dialogs cannot be resized except for a few ones such as the Event Log dialog which can be resized to display more information at a time gt To resize a dialog 1 Hover your mouse pointer over any border of the dialog 2 When the mouse pointer turns to a double headed arrow drag the border vertically or horizontally to make the dialog bigger or smaller S Raritan Raritan Chapter 5 Using the We
289. oadshedding Displayed information e The load shedding state is displayed along with non critical outlets Note The load shedding mode is associated with critical and non critical outlets To specify critical and non critical outlets through CLI see Specifying Non Critical Outlets on page 209 EnergyWise Settings This command shows the Dominion PX device s current configuration for Cisco EnergyWise show energywise Asset Management Settings This command shows the asset management settings including the total number of connected asset sensors and global LED color settings show assetStripManagement S Raritan zie Raritan Chapter 7 Using the Command Line Interface Asset Sensor Settings This command shows the asset sensor settings show assetStrip lt n gt Variables e n is one of the options all or a number Option Description all Displays all asset sensor information Tip You can also type the command without adding this option all to get the same data A specific asset Displays the settings of the specified asset sensor sensor number only For Dominion PX the valid number is always 1 Rack Unit Settings of an Asset Sensor This command shows the settings of a specific rack unit or all rack units on an asset sensor such as a rack unit s LED color and LED mode show rackUnit lt sensor_number gt lt rack_unit gt Variables e sensor numbers is
290. odels Lena Connecting the PDU to a Power Source 1 Verify that all circuit breakers on the Dominion PX device are set to ON If not turn them ON zie Raritan i Chapter 3 Installation and Configuration For a PDU with fuses ensure that all fuses are inserted and seated properly If there are any fuse covers ensure that they are closed Note Not all Dominion PX devices have overcurrent protection mechanisms Connect each Dominion PX device to an appropriately rated branch circuit See the label or nameplate affixed to your Dominion PX device for appropriate input ratings or range of ratings When a Dominion PX device powers up it proceeds with the power on self test and software loading for a few moments At this time the outlet LEDs cycle through different colors Note Outlet LEDs are not available on a model without the outlet switching feature When the software has completed loading the outlet LEDs show a steady color and the LED display illuminates Configuring Dominion PX There are two alternatives to initially configure a Dominion PX device Connect the Dominion PX device to a computer to configure it using a serial or USB connection between Dominion PX and the computer The computer must have a communications program such as HyperTerminal or PuTTY For a serial connection you need a null modem cable with DB9 connectors on both ends Raritan part number 254 01 0006 00 Connect the Dominion PX de
291. odels using button mount 1 Align the baseplates on the rear of the Dominion PX device Leave at least 24 inches between the baseplates for stability zie Raritan 7 Chapter 2 Rack Mounting the PDU 2 Make the baseplates grasp the Dominion PX device lightly Use the included L shaped hex key to loosen the hex socket screws until the baseplate is slightly fastened 3 Screw each mounting button in the center of each baseplate The recommended torque for the button is 1 96 N m 20 kgf cm lt gt Qe 4 Align the large mounting buttons with the mounting holes in the cabinet fixing one in place and adjusting the other 5 Loosen the hex socket screws until the mounting buttons are secured in their position 6 Ensure that both buttons can engage their mounting holes simultaneously 7 Pressthe Dominion PX device forward pushing the mounting buttons through the mounting holes then letting the device drop about 5 8 This secures the Dominion PX device in place and completes the installation S Raritan Chapter 2 Rack Mounting the PDU Mounting Zero U Models Using Claw Foot Brackets If your PDU has circuit breakers implemented read Circuit Breaker Orientation Limitation on page 5 before mounting it gt To mount Zero U models using claw foot brackets 1 Align the baseplates on the rear of the Dominion PX device 2 Secure the baseplates in place Use the included L shaped hex key to loosen the hex so
292. og 144 W Warning Icon 59 What is Assertion Timeout 130 131 133 152 266 272 279 285 290 What is Deassertion Hysteresis 129 130 131 132 144 152 265 271 278 284 289 What s New in the Dominion PX User Guide xiii Wired Network Settings 67 Wireless Configuration 185 Wireless Network Settings 67 With HyperTerminal 181 323 With SSH or Telnet 182 Z Zero U Products 3 376 S Raritan Raritan gt U S Canada Latin America Monday Friday 8 a m 6 p m ET Phone 800 724 8090 or 732 764 8886 For CommandCenter NOC Press 6 then Press 1 For CommandCenter Secure Gateway Press 6 then Press 2 Fax 732 764 8887 Email for CommandCenter NOC tech ccnoc raritan com Email for all other products tech raritan com gt China Beijing Monday Friday 9 a m 6 p m local time Phone 86 10 88091890 Shanghai Monday Friday 9 a m 6 p m local time Phone 86 21 5425 2499 GuangZhou Monday Friday 9 a m 6 p m local time Phone 86 20 8755 5561 gt India Monday Friday 9 a m 6 p m local time Phone 91 124 410 7881 gt Japan Monday Friday 9 30 a m 5 30 p m local time Phone 81 3 3523 5991 Email support japan raritan com gt Europe Europe Monday Friday 8 30 a m 5 p m GMT 1 CET Phone 31 10 2844040 Email tech europe raritan com United Kingdom Monday Friday 8 30 a m to 5 p m GMT Phone 44 0 20 7090
293. olicy allow Results e The role based IP access control feature is enabled e The default policy is set to accept Managing Role Based Access Control Rules You can add delete or modify role based access control rules A role based access control rule command begins with security roleBasedAccessControl rule Adding a Role Based Access Control Rule Depending on where you want to add a new rule in the list the command syntax for adding a rule varies gt To add anew rule to the bottom of the rules list use this command syntax config f security roleBasedAccessControl rule add start ip end ip role policy gt To add anew rule by inserting it above or below a specific rule use this command syntax config security roleBasedAccessControl rule add lt start_ip gt lt end_ip gt lt role gt lt policy gt lt insert gt lt rule_number gt Variables e cslart ip is the starting IP address e end ip is the ending IP address e role is the role for which you want to create an access control rule e policy is one of the options allow or deny Policy Description allow Accepts traffic from the specified IP address range when the user is a member of the specified role deny Drops traffic from the specified IP address range when the user is a member of the specified role Raritan Chapter 7 Using the Command Line Interface e insert is one of the options insertAbove or insertBel
294. om supporv online help Configuring Rack PDU Power Strip Targets The KX II allows you to connect rack PDUs power strips to KX II ports KX II rack PDU configuration is done from the KX II Port Configuration page Connecting a Rack PDU Rack PDUs are connected to the KX II using the D2CIM PWR CIM gt To connect the rack PDU 1 Connect the male RJ 45 of the D2CIM PWR to the female RJ 45 connector labeled FEATURE of the rack PDU 2 Connect the female RJ 45 connector of the D2CIM PWR to any of the available female system port connectors on the KX II using a straight through Cat5 cable 3 Attach an AC power cord to the target server and an available rack PDU outlet 4 Connect the rack PDU to an AC power source zie Raritan i Appendix E Integration 5 Power on the device saaaa wwwwwy ana ae Naming the Rack PDU in the KX II Port Page for Power Sirips Note PX rack PDUs power strips can be named in the PX as well as in KX Il Once a Raritan remote rack PDU is connected to the KX Il it will appear on the Port Configuration page Click on the power port name on that page to access it The Type and the Name fields are prepopulated Note The CIM Type cannot be changed The following information is displayed for each outlet on the rack PDU Outlet Number Name and Port Association Use this page to name the rack PDU and its outlets All names can be up to 32 alphanumeric cha
295. on PX Explorer pane and the page for this circuit breaker opens in the right pane s Raritan Chapter 5 Using the Web Interface Setting Power Thresholds Setting and enabling the thresholds causes Dominion PX to generate alert notifications when it detects that any component s power state crosses the thresholds Usually there are four thresholds for each sensor Lower Critical Lower Warning Upper Warning and Upper Critical e Upper and Lower Warning thresholds indicate the sensor reading enters the warning range before the critical threshold e Upper and Lower Critical thresholds indicate the sensor reading is at the critical level To avoid generating a large amount of alert events the deassertion hysteresis for each threshold is enabled You can change the default hysteresis value if necessary For more information on the deassertion hysteresis see What is Deassertion Hysteresis on page 132 Note After setting the thresholds remember to configure the event rules See Configuring Event Rules on page 134 Setting an Outlet s Thresholds You can set up the thresholds deassertion hysteresis and assertion timeout for a particular outlet The threshold values set for an individual outlet will override the bulk threshold values stored on that outlet gt To set the thresholds for an outlet 1 Ifthe Outlets folder is not expanded expand it to show all outlets See Expanding the Tree on page 55 2 Cli
296. on PX device By default strong passwords should be at least eight characters long and contain upper and lower case letters numbers and special characters such as or amp gt To force users to create strong passwords 1 Choose Device Settings Security Password Policy The Password Policy dialog appears 2 Select the Strong Passwords checkbox to activate the strong password feature The following are the default settings Minimum length 8 characters Maximum length 32 characters S Raritan zie Raritan 3 4 Chapter 5 Using the Web Interface At least one lowercase character Required At least one uppercase character Required At least one numeric character Required At least one special character Required Number of restricted passwords in history 5 Note The maximum password length accepted by Dominion PX is 32 characters Make necessary changes to the default settings Click OK to save the changes Enabling Password Aging Password Aging determines whether users are required to change passwords at regular intervals The default interval is 60 days 1 To force users to change passwords regularly Choose Device Settings Security Password Policy The Password Policy dialog appears Select the Password Aging checkbox to enable the password aging feature To determine how often users are requested to change their passwords select a number of days in the Password
297. onfigures the assertion timeout value of a circuit breaker config f sensor ocp n sensor type assertionTimeout value Variables e n is the number of the circuit breaker that you want to configure e sensor type is one of the following sensor types Sensor type Description current Current sensor zie Raritan idi Chapter 7 Using the Command Line Interface Note If the requested sensor type is not supported the message Not available is displayed e value is a number in samples that is assigned to the assertion timeout of the specified circuit breaker sensor See What is Assertion Timeout on page 133 Example The following command sets the the assertion timeout value of the RMS current of the 3rd circuit breaker to 4 samples That is at least 4 consecutive samples must cross a specific current threshold before that threshold crossing event is asserted config sensor ocp 3 current assertionTimeout 4 Commands for Environmental Sensors A sensor configuration command for environmental sensors begins with sensor externalsensor Setting the Sensor s Upper Critical Threshold This command syntax configures the Upper Critical threshold of a numeric environmental sensor config f sensor externalsensor n sensor type upperCritical option Variables e n is the ID number of the environmental sensor that you want to configure The ID number is assigned and shown in the Dominion P
298. onitor the accessibility of any IT equipment such as DB servers and remote authentication servers gt 1 To add IT equipment for ping monitoring Choose Device Settings Server Reachability The Server Reachability dialog appears Click New The Add New Server dialog appears By default the Enable Ping Monitoring for this Server checkbox is selected If not select it to enable the ping monitoring feature Provide the information required Field Description IP Address Hostname IP address or host name of the IT equipment whose accessibility you want to monitor Number of Successful The number of successful pings required to Pings to Enable enable this feature Valid range is 0 to 200 Feature Wait Time in The wait time before sending the next ping if seconds after the previous ping was successfully Successful Ping responded Valid range is 5 to 600 seconds 147 Chapter 5 Using the Web Interface 148 5 6 T Field Description Wait Time in The wait time before sending the next ping if seconds after the previous ping was not responded Valid Unsuccessful Ping range is 3 to 600 seconds Number of The number of consecutive pings without Consecutive any response before the IT equipment is Unsuccessful Pings declared unresponsive Valid range is 1 to for Failure 100 Wait Time in The wait time before resuming pinging after seconds before the IT equipment is declared unresponsive Resuming P
299. or Note If the requested sensor type is not supported the message Not available is displayed e option is one of the options enable disable or a numeric value Option Description enable Enables the lower warning threshold for the specified inlet sensor disable Disables the lower warning threshold for the specified inlet sensor A numeric value Sets a value for the lower warning threshold of the specified inlet sensor and enables this threshold at the same time Example The following command sets the Lower Warning threshold for the inlet 1 RMS current to 20A It also enables the lower warning threshold if this threshold has not been enabled yet config f sensor inlet 1 current lowerWarning 20 271 Chapter 7 Using the Command Line Interface Setting the Inlet s Deassertion Hysteresis This command syntax configures the deassertion hysteresis value of an inlet config sensor inlet lt n gt lt sensor type gt hysteresis lt value gt Variables e n is the number of the inlet that you want to configure For a single inlet PDU n is always the number 1 e sensor type is one of the following sensor types Sensor type Description current Current sensor voltage Voltage sensor activePower Active power sensor apparentPower Apparent power sensor powerFactor Power factor sensor activeEnergy Active energy sensor unbalancedCurrent Unbalanced load sensor Note If the requested sensor type is
300. or externalsensor 4 temperature hysteresis 2 Setting the Sensor s Assertion Timeout This command syntax configures the assertion timeout value of a numeric environmental sensor SE Raritan Chapter 7 Using the Command Line Interface config sensor externalsensor lt n gt lt sensor type gt assertionTimeout lt value gt Variables e n is the ID number of the environmental sensor that you want to configure The ID number is assigned and shown in the Dominion PX web interface It is an integer between 1 and 16 e sensor type is one of these sensor types temperature humidity airPressure or air Flow Note If the specified sensor type does not match the type of the specified environmental sensor this error message appears Specified sensor type XXX does not match the sensor s type lt sensortype gt where XXX is the specified sensor type and sensortype is the correct sensor type e value is a number in samples that is assigned to the assertion timeout for the specified environmental sensor See What is Assertion Timeout on page 133 Example The following command sets the assertion timeout of the environmental temperature sensor with the ID number 3 to 4 samples That is at least 4 consecutive samples must cross a specific current threshold before that threshold crossing event is asserted config sensor externalsensor 3 temperature assertionTimeout 4 User Configuration
301. orresponds to a rack unit and can be used to locate the IT devices on a specific rack or cabinet For each rack you can attach up to 6 asset sensors consisting of one MASTER and five SLAVE asset sensors x Number Item 1 8U MASTER asset sensor with 8 tag ports 2 8U SLAVE asset sensor with 8 tag ports e 5U SLAVE asset sensor with 5 tag ports gt To attach asset sensors to a rack 1 Connect a MASTER asset sensor to an 8U SLAVE asset sensor S Raritan Chapter 3 Installation and Configuration Plug the white male DIN connector of the slave asset sensor into the white female DIN connector of the master asset sensor Make sure that the U shaped sheet metal adjacent to the male DIN connector is inserted into the rear slot of the master asset sensor It is recommended to screw up the U shaped sheet metal to reinforce the connection 2 Connect another 8U slave asset sensor to the one being attached to the master asset sensor in the same manner as Step 1 3 Repeat Step 2 to connect more slave asset sensors The maximum length of the combined asset sensors can be 45U or 48U The final asset sensor can be 8U or 5U depending on the height of your rack 4 Vertically attach the asset sensor assembly to the rack next to the IT equipment making each tag port on the asset sensor horizontally align with a rack unit The asset sensors are automatically attracted to the rack because of magnetic stripes on the
302. ow Option Description insertAbove Inserts the new rule above the specified rule number Then new rule s number the specified rule number insertBelow Inserts the new rule below the specified rule number Then new rule s number the specified rule number 1 e rule number is the number of the existing rule which you want to insert the new rule above or below Example The following command creates a new role based access control rule and specifies its location in the list config security roleBasedAccessControl rule add 192 168 78 50 192 168 90 100 admin deny insertAbove 3 Results e Anewrole based access control rule is added dropping all packets from any IP address between 192 168 78 50 and 192 168 90 100 when the user is a member of the role admin e The newly added rule is inserted above the 3rd rule That is the new rule becomes the 3rd rule and the original 3rd rule becomes the 4th rule Modifying a Role Based Access Control Rule Depending on what to modify in an existing rule the command syntax varies gt To modify a rule s IP address range use this command syntax config security roleBasedAccessControl rule modify lt rule_number gt startIpAddress start ip endIpAddress end ip gt To modify a rule s role use this command syntax config ft security roleBasedAccessControl rule modify rule number role role gt To modify a rule s policy use this command syntax zie
303. ow PX2 3000 4000 Series These models are not implemented with the outlet switching feature so all outlets are always in the ON state Outlet LEDs are not available PX2 5000 Series These models are implemented with the outlet switching feature A small LED is adjacent to each outlet to indicate the outlet or PDU state The PDU is shipped from the factory with all outlets turned ON The table below explains how to interpret different outlet LED states Outlet status What it means The outlet is not connected to power or the control Powered OFF circuitry s power supply is broken ON and LIVE LIVE power The outlet is on and power is available The current flowing through the outlet is greater ON and EVE than the upper warning non critical threshold The outlet is turned off and power is available when Cer and LIVE the outlet is turned on The outlet is turned off and power is not available SESS E E because the circuit breaker has tripped The outlet is turned on but power is not available ON ana NOT LIVE because a circuit breaker has tripped The Dominion PX device has just been plugged in and its management software is loading n a OR A firmware upgrade is being performed on the device Note When a Dominion PX device powers up it proceeds with the power on self test and software loading for a few moments At this time the outlet LEDs cycle through different colors When the software has complete
304. ow Accepts traffic from the specified IP address range when the user is a member of the specified role Deny Drops traffic from the specified IP address range when the user is a member of the specified role Click OK to save the changes The system automatically numbers the rule Action Do this Add a rule to the end of the rules list Insert a rule between two existing rules Select the rule above which you want to insert a new rule For example to insert a rule between rules 3 and 4 select 4 Click Insert The Insert new Rule dialog appears Type a starting IP address in the Starting IP Address field Type an ending IP address in the Ending IP Address field Select a role from the drop down list in the Role field This rule applies to members of this role only Select Allow or Deny from the drop down list in the Policy field Allow Accepts traffic from the specified IP address range when the user is a member of the specified role Deny Drops traffic from the specified IP address range when the user is a member of the specified role Click OK to save the changes The system inserts the rule and automatically renumbers the following rules 4 Click OK to save the changes Raritan 99 100 Chapter 5 Using the Web Interface Editing Role Based Access Control Rules You can modify existing rules when these rules do not meet your needs To modify a role based access control
305. p you must determine which IP address is used when the DNS resolver returns both of IPv4 and IPv6 addresses Pv4 Address Use the IPv4 addresses returned by the DNS server Pv6 Address Use the IPv6 addresses returned by the DNS server 5 Click OK to save the changes 69 Chapter 5 Using the Web Interface Modifying the IPv4 Settings You must enable the IPv4 protocol before you can modify the IPv4 network settings See Selecting the Internet Protocol on page 69 gt To modify the IPv4 settings 1 Choose Device Settings Network The Network Configuration dialog appears Click the IPv4 Configuration tab In the IP Auto Configuration field click the drop down arrow and select the desired option from the list Option Description DHCP To auto configure Dominion PX select DHCP With DHCP selected you can enter a preferred DHCP host name which is optional Type the host name in the Preferred Hostname field The host name Consists of alohanumeric characters and or hyphens Cannot begin or end with a hyphen Cannot contain more than 63 characters Cannot contain punctuation marks spaces and other symbols Select the Specify DNS server manually checkbox if necessary Then type the address of the primary DNS server in the Primary DNS Server field The secondary DNS server and DNS suffix are optional Static To manually assign an IP address select Static and enter the following information in t
306. pted SNMP v3 communication S Raritan Chapter 6 Using SNMP Configuring SNMP Traps Dominion PX automatically keeps an internal log of events that occur See Configuring Event Rules on page 134 These events can also be used to send SNMP traps to a third party manager To configure Dominion PX to send SNMP traps Choose Device Settings gt Event Rules The Event Rule Settings dialog appears On the Rules tab select the System SNMP Trap Rule Select the Enabled checkbox to enable this event rule Click Save to save the changes a fF oO DN Click the Actions tab if you have not configured the SNMP trap actions Select System SNMP Trap Action to set up the trap destinations Type an IP address in the Host 1 field This is the address to which traps are sent by the SNMP system agent Type the communication port number in the Port 1 field Type the name of the SNMP community in the Community field The community is the group representing Dominion PX and all SNMP management stations 10 To specify more than one SNMP trap destination repeat Steps 8 to 10 for additional destinations A maximum of 3 destinations can be specified 11 Click Save to save the changes 12 Click Close to quit the dialog Note You should update the MIB used by your SNMP manager when updating to a new Dominion PX release This ensures your SNMP manager has the correct MIB for the release you are using See Downloading SNMP MIB on p
307. ption enable Enables the data logging feature disable Disables the data logging feature For more information see Setting Data Logging on page 79 Example The following command enables the data logging feature config fd pdu dataRetrieval enabl Setting the Data Logging Measurements Per Entry This command syntax defines the number of measurements accumulated per log entry config f pdu measurementsPerLogEntry number Variables e number is an integer between 1 and 600 The default is 60 samples per log entry For more information see Setting Data Logging on page 79 Example The following command determines that 66 measurements are accumulated per log entry for internal sensors that is 66 seconds config f pdu measurementsPerLogEntry 66 SE Raritan Chapter 7 Using the Command Line Interface Specifying the Device Altitude This command syntax specifies your Dominion PX device s altitude above sea level in meters You must specify the Dominion PX device s altitude above sea level if a Raritan differential air pressure sensor is attached This is because the device s altitude is associated with the altitude correction factor See Altitude Correction Factors on page 363 config pdu deviceAltitude lt altitude gt Variables e lt altitude gt is an integer between 1 and 3000 meters Example The following command determines that the Dominion PX device is located at 1500 met
308. r Down button to enter the Manual Mode so that a particular outlet line or circuit breaker can be selected to show specific readings gt To operate the LED display 1 Press the Up or Down button until the desired outlet line or circuit breaker number is selected in the two digit row Or you can press either button to select an inlet s active power shown as AP Pressing the A UP button moves up one selection Pressing the V DOWN button moves down one selection 2 Current of the selected component is shown in the three digit row Simultaneously the CURRENT A LED is lit See LEDs for Measurement Units on page 42 3 When selecting an outlet or a line you can press the Up and Down buttons simultaneously to switch between voltage active power and current readings 43 44 Chapter 4 Using the PDU The voltage appears in this format XXX V It is displayed for about five seconds after which the current reading re appears When the voltage is displayed the VOLTAGE V LED is lit The active power appears in one of the formats X XX XX X and XXX kW It is displayed for about five seconds after which the current reading re appears When the active power is displayed the POWER kW LED is lit 4 When selecting the inlet AP or xP it displays the active power reading The active power appears in one of the formats X XX XX X and XXX kW When the active power is displayed the POWER kW LED is
309. r Subtype field Contact The detector switch is designed to detect the door lock or door open closed status Smoke Detection The detector switch is designed to detect the appearance of smoke Water Detection The detector switch is designed to detect the appearance of water on the floor Vibration The detector switch is designed to detect the vibration in the floor Type a new name in the Name field Describe the sensor s location by assigning alphanumeric values to the X Y and Z coordinates See Describing the Sensor Location on page 155 Note When the term Rack Units appears inside the parentheses in the Z location field indicating that the Z coordinate format is set to Rack Units you must type an integer number 8 Ifthe selected environmental sensor is a numeric sensor its threshold settings are displayed in the dialog Click Edit or double click the Threshold Configuration table to adjust the threshold deassertion hysteresis and assertion timeout settings To enable any threshold select the corresponding checkbox To disable a threshold deselect the checkbox After any threshold is enabled type an appropriate numeric value in the accompanying text box To enable the deassertion hysteresis for all thresholds type a numeric value other than zero in the Deassertion Hysteresis field See What is Deassertion Hysteresis on page 132 To enable the assertion timeout for all thresholds type a
310. r sensor powerFactor Power factor sensor activeEnergy Active energy sensor unbalancedCurrent Unbalanced load sensor Note If the requested sensor type is not supported the message Not available is displayed e option is one of the options enable disable or a numeric value Option Description enable Enables the lower critical threshold for the specified inlet sensor disable Disables the lower critical threshold for the specified inlet sensor A numeric value Sets a value for the lower critical threshold of the specified inlet sensor and enables this threshold at the same time Example The following command disables the Lower Critical threshold for the inlet 1 RMS current config f sensor inlet 1 current lowerCritical disable S Raritan zie Raritan Chapter 7 Using the Command Line Interface Setting the Inlet s Lower Warning Threshold This command syntax configures the Lower Warning threshold of an inlet config f sensor inlet n sensor type lowerWarning option Variables e n is the number of the inlet that you want to configure For a single inlet PDU n is always the number 1 e sensor type is one of the following sensor types Sensor type Description current Current sensor voltage Voltage sensor activePower Active power sensor apparentPower Apparent power sensor powerFactor Power factor sensor activeEnergy Active energy sensor unbalancedCurrent Unbalanced load sens
311. r use with an SNMP manager Dominion PX can be configured to send traps to an SNMP manager as well as receive GET and SET commands in order to retrieve status and configure some basic settings In This Chapter Enabling SNMP EM 175 Configuring Users for Encrypted SNMP V2 cceeeeereeeseeeeeeneeteeeees 176 Configuring SNMP Traps retra id tiasacbd sabes Ghedeaaie aba e ror ta rez E 177 SNMP Gets ard Sets tiir ecelesie ble ainni aaa ERE Ha x EIE 178 Enabling SNMP To communicate with an SNMP manager you must first enable the SNMP agent on the Dominion PX device gt To enable SNMP 1 Choose Device Settings gt Network Services gt SNMP The SNMP Settings dialog appears SNMP Settings x General Trape SNMP v1 v2c Settings SNMP v1 vac enable Read Community String pubic White Community String private SNMP v3 Settings SNMP v3 CO enable MIB H System Group sysCantact sysName sysLacation pum Download MIB 7 ge P 2 Select the enable checkbox in the SNMP v1 v2c field to enable communication with an SNMP manager using SNMP v1 or v2c protocol zie Raritan He 176 Chapter 6 Using SNMP N gg gu o Type the SNMP read only community string in the Read Community String field Usually the string is public Type the read write community string in the Write Community String field Usually the string is private
312. racters and it must be enclosed in quotes Example The following command sets the value The 2nd cabinet to the X coordinate of the environmental sensor with the ID number 4 config f externalsensor 4 xlabel The 2nd cabinet Setting the Y Coordinate This command syntax specifies the Y coordinate of an environmental sensor config f externalsensor n ylabel lt coordinate gt Variables e n is the ID number of the environmental sensor that you want to configure The ID number is assigned and shown in the Dominion PX web interface It is an integer between 1 and 16 e coordinate is a string comprising up to 24 ASCII printable characters and it must be enclosed in quotes Example The following command sets the value The 4th row to the Y coordinate of the environmental sensor with the ID number 4 config f externalsensor 4 ylabel The 4th row 259 Chapter 7 Using the Command Line Interface 260 Setting the Z Coordinate This command syntax specifies the Z coordinate of an environmental sensor config externalsensor lt n gt zlabel lt coordinate gt Variables e n is the ID number of the environmental sensor that you want to configure The ID number is assigned and shown in the Dominion PX web interface It is an integer between 1 and 16 e Depending on the Z coordinate format you set there are two types of values for the coordinate variable Type Description Free form
313. racters and can include special characters Note When a rack PDU is associated with a target server port the outlet name is replaced by the target server name even if you assigned another name to the outlet gt Toname the rack PDU and outlets Note CommandCenter Service Gateway does not recognize rack PDU names containing spaces 1 Enter the Name of the rack PDU if needed 2 Change the Outlet Name if desired Outlet names default to the outlet SE Raritan Raritan Appendix E Integration 3 Click OK Home gt Device Settings gt Port Configuration gt Port PowerStrip Outlets s v o Port Association Dominion Port1 1 Dominion Port7 e Ww y La eg F amp a 3 co 74 4A 359 360 Appendix E Integration Associating Outlets with Target Servers on KX Il The Port page opens when you click on a port on the Port Configuration page From this page you can make power associations change the port name to something more descriptive and update target server settings if you are using the D2CIM VUSB CIM The CIM Type and the Port Name fields are prepopulated note that the CIM type cannot be changed A server can have up to four power plugs and you can associate a different rack PDU power strip with each From this page you can define those associations so that you can power on power off and power cycle the server from the Port A
314. rameter details to the end of the command show inlets lt n gt details Variables e n is one of the options all or a number Option Description all Displays the information for all inlets Tip You can also type the command without adding this option all to get the same data A specific inlet Displays the information for the specified inlet only pumoer An inlet number may need to be specified only when there are more than 1 inlet on your PDU Displayed information e Without the parameter details only the inlet s RMS current value s and inlet name are displayed e With the parameter details more inlet information is displayed in addition to the RMS current values such as the inlet s RMS current voltage and active power zie Raritan Chapter 7 Using the Command Line Interface Circuit Breaker Information This command is only available for PDUs with overcurrent protection mechanism implemented This command syntax shows the circuit breaker information show ocp lt n gt To show detailed information add the parameter details to the end of the command show ocp lt n gt details Variables e n is one of the options all or a number Option Description all Displays the information for all circuit breakers Tip You can also type the command without adding this option all to get the same data A specific circuit Displays the inform
315. rating of the branch circuit may be up to 125 greater than the rating of the PDU unless prohibited by national or local electrical codes 20A for PDUs rated at 16A input current 30A for PDUs rated at 24A input current 40A for PDUs rated at 32A input current 50A for PDUs rated at 35A input current 50A for PDUs rated at 40A input current 60A for PDUs rated at 45A input current n North America external overcurrent protectors shall be certified by UL CSA or equivalent certification In other regions or countries make sure they comply with national and local electrical codes S Raritan Chapter 3 Installation and Configuration Installing Cable Retention Clips on the Inlet Optional If your Dominion PX device is designed to use a cable retention clip install the clip before connecting a power cord A cable retention clip prevents the connected power cord from coming loose or falling off The use of cable retention clips is highly recommended for regions with high seismic activities and environments where shocks and vibrations are expected gt To install and use a cable retention clip on the inlet 1 Locate two tiny holes adjacent to the inlet 2 Install the cable retention clip by inserting two ends of the clip into the tiny holes Zero U models 1U 2U models eS 3 Connect the power cord to the inlet and press the clip toward the power cord until it holds the cord firmly Zero U models 1U 2U m
316. rator mode S Raritan Chapter 7 Using the Command Line Interface Querying Available Parameters for a Command If you are not sure what commands or parameters are available for a particular type of CLI command you can have the CLI show them by adding a space and then a question mark to the end of that command A list of available parameters and their descriptions will be displayed The following shows a few query examples gt To query available parameters for the show command the syntax is show To query available network configuration parameters the syntax is config network To query available role configuration parameters the syntax is config role Retrieving Previous Commands If you would like to retrieve any command that was previously typed in the same connection session press the Up arrow M on the keyboard until the desired command is displayed Automatically Completing a Command zie Raritan A CLI command always consists of several words For some unique CLI commands such as the reset command you can easily complete them by pressing the Tab or Ctrl i instead of typing the whole command word by word gt 1 To have a unique command completed automatically Type initial letters or words of the command For example type the first word of the reset factorydefaults command that is reset Press Tab or Ctrl i until the complete command appears For example althou
317. re are different commands for changing different user blocking parameters These commands begin with security userBlocking gt To determine the maximum number of failed logins before blocking a user use this command syntax config security userBlocking maximumNumberOfFailedLogins lt valuel gt Raritan gt To determine how long a user s login is blocked use this command syntax config security userBlocking blockTime lt value2 gt Variables e valuet is an integer between 3 and 10 or unlimited which sets no limit on the maximum number of failed logins and thus disables the user blocking function e value2 is a numeric value in minutes Tip You can combine multiple commands to modify the user blocking parameters at a time See Multi Command Syntax on page 318 243 Chapter 7 Using the Command Line Interface Example The following command sets up two user blocking parameters config security userBlocking maximumNumberOfFailedLogins 5 blockTime 30 Results e The maximum number of failed logins is set to 5 e The user blocking time is set to 30 minutes Strong Passwords The strong password commands determine whether a strong password is required for login and what a strong password should contain at least A strong password command begins with security strongPasswords You can combine multiple strong password commands to modify different parameters at a time See Multi Command Synt
318. ress and hold down the tiny rectangular buttons above the termination points on the body of DPX CC2 TR S Raritan Chapter 3 Installation and Configuration Note Each button controls the spring of each corresponding termination point 3 Fully insert each wire of both third party detectors switches into each termination point Plug both wires of a detector switch into the two termination points to the left Plug both wires of another detector switch into the two termination points to the right 4 Release the tiny rectangular buttons after inserting four wires into four termination points 5 Verify that these wires are firmly fastened Configuring a Contact Closure Sensor Before using DPX CC2 TR to detect the contact closure status water smoke or vibration you must determine the normal state by adjusting its dip switch which controls the LED state on the body of DPX CC2 TR A dip switch is associated with a channel gt To adjust the dip switch setting 1 Place the detectors switches connected to DPX CC2 TR to the position where you want to detect a specific environmental situation 2 Uncover the dip switch on the body of DPX CC2 TR 3 To set the Normal state for channel 1 locate the dip switch labeled 1 4 Use a pointed tip such as a pen to move the slide switch to the end labeled NO Normally Open or NC Normally Closed zie Raritan B 32 Chapter 3 Installation and Configuration
319. rnet hardware gt To make a wireless connection Do one of the following Plug a 802 11n wireless USB LAN adapter into the USB A port on your Dominion PX device Connect a USB docking station to the USB A port on the Dominion PX device and plug the 802 11n wireless USB LAN adapter into the appropriate USB port on the docking station Supported Wireless LAN Configuration If you select the wireless connection ensure that both of your wireless USB LAN adapter and wireless network configuration meet the following requirements Network type 802 11n Protocol WPA2 RSN Key management WPA PSK Encryption CCMP AES Important Currently only Raritan provided wireless USB LAN adapters are supported You may contact Raritan Technical Support for this information 19 20 Chapter 3 Installation and Configuration Initial Network Configuration After the Dominion PX device is connected to your network you must provide it with an IP address and some additional networking information This section describes the initial configuration via a serial connection only Note To configure Dominion PX via the LAN see Using the Web Interface on page 49 for using the web interface gt 1 To configure Dominion PX Go to the computer that you connected to the Dominion PX device and open a communications program such as HyperTerminal or PuTTY Select the appropriate serial port and make sure the port set
320. rns to normal The event rule is set like this e Event Events gt Inlet gt Inlet 11 gt Sensor gt Any sub event e Trigger condition both e Actions System SNMP Trap Action gt To create the above event rule 1 Select Events Inlet to indicate we are specifying an event at the inlet level 2 Select Inlet 11 from the submenu because that is the inlet in question Select Sensor to refer to sensor readings Select Any sub event because we want to specify all events related to all types of inlet sensors and thresholds such as current voltage upper critical threshold upper warning threshold lower critical threshold lower warning threshold and so on 5 Select System SNMP Trap Action to send SNMP traps to respond to the specified event 6 Select the both radio button so that the SNMP traps are sent both when any sensor reading of Inlet 11 moves past any threshold into the warning or critical range and when the sensor reading returns to normal For example when the Inlet I1 s voltage crosses into the upper warning range the SNMP traps are sent and when the voltage drops below the upper warning threshold the SNMP traps are sent again S Raritan Chapter 5 Using the Web Interface Modifying an Event Rule You can change an event rule s event action trigger condition and other settings if any Exception Events and actions selected in the built in event rules are not changeable including S
321. rs of the pane Click either or both arrows to navigate through all tabs To close any data page click the Close button aX in the corresponding tab Logout Button Click the logout button when you want to log out of the web interface G logout Data Pane The right pane shows the data page of the selected tree item The data page includes the item s current status settings and a Setup button if available The tab above the pane indicates the current selection of the data page You can change the width of the pane to make the area larger or smaller gt To adjust the pane s width 1 Move the mouse pointer to the left border of the right pane 2 When the mouse pointer turns into a two way arrow drag the border horizontally to widen or shrink the pane More Information This section explains additional web interface elements or operations that are useful Warning Icon If the value you entered in a specific field is invalid a red warning icon appears to the right and the field in question is surrounded by a red frame as shown in this illustration hel maso When this occurs position your mouse pointer over the warning icon to view the reason and modify the entered value accordingly 59 60 Chapter 5 Using the Web Interface The Yellow or Red Highlighted Reading When a numeric sensor s reading crosses any upper or lower threshold the background color of the whole row turns to yellow or re
322. rt on the computer connection from the PDU s USB B port to the computer s USB A port Note that not all serial to USB converters work properly with the Dominion PX device 3 Ensure the computer s serial port settings meet the following Bits per second 115200 115 2Kbps Data bits 8 Stop bits 1 Parity None Flow control None Note If you plan to use the serial connection to log in to the command line interface leave the cable connected after the configuration is complete Connecting Dominion PX to Your Network To use the web interface to administer Dominion PX you must connect the Dominion PX device to your local area network LAN Dominion PX can be connected to a wired or wireless network Note If your PDU is not implemented with the wireless networking feature make a wired connection gt To make a wired connection 1 Connect a standard Category 5e 6 UTP cable to the ETHERNET port on the Dominion PX device 2 Connect the other end of the cable to your LAN i Raritan zie Raritan Chapter 3 Installation and Configuration See this diagram for the ETHERNET port location on Zero U models For 1U 2U models the ETHERNET port is usually located on the back except for a few models This diagram shows the port on the back SENSOR 1 uh ETHERNET SENSOR 2 FEATURE Warning Accidentally plugging an RS 232 RJ 45 connector into the ETHERNET port can cause permanent damages to the Ethe
323. rver select this checkbox 13 Bind DN Specify the DN of the user who is permitted to search the LDAP directory in the defined search base This information is required only when the Use Bind Credentials checkbox is selected 14 Bind Password and Confirm Bind Password Enter the Bind password in the Bind Password field first and then the Confirm Bind Password field This information is required only when the Use Bind Credentials checkbox is selected 15 Base DN for Search Enter the name you want to bind against the LDAP LDAPS up to 31 characters and where in the database to begin searching for the specified Base DN An example Base Search value might be cn Users dc raritan dc com Consult your authentication server administrator for the appropriate values to enter into these fields 16 Type the following information in the corresponding fields LDAP needs this information to verify user names and passwords Login name attribute also called AuthorizationString User entry object class User search subfilter also called BaseSearch Hs Raritan zie Raritan Chapter 5 Using the Web Interface Note Dominion PX will preoccupy the login name attribute and user entry object class with default values which should not be changed unless required 17 Active Directory Domain Type the name of the Active Directory Domain For example testradius com Consult with your Active Directory Administrator for a specific
324. s gt To install and use a cable retention clip on the outlet 1 Locate two tiny holes adjacent to the outlet S Raritan Raritan Chapter 3 Installation and Configuration 2 Install the cable retention clip by inserting two ends of the clip into the tiny holes 3 Connect the power cord to the outlet and press the clip toward the power cord until it holds the cord firmly The clip s central area holding the plug should face downwards toward the ground like an inverted U This allows gravity to keep the clip in place 4 Repeatthe same steps to install clips and power cords on the other outlets 27 Chapter 3 Installation and Configuration Connecting Environmental Sensors Optional To enable Dominion PX to detect environmental conditions connect one or more Raritan environmental sensors to the Dominion PX device The maximum distance for all sensor cabling plugged into the product s sensor port should not exceed 30 meters 100 feet Contact Raritan Technical Support if you have questions You can connect up to 16 environmental sensors to a Dominion PX device by using a Raritan sensor hub For example a DPX T2H2 counts as 4 sensors and a DPX T3H1 counts as 4 sensors Warning For proper operation wait for 15 30 seconds between each connection operation or each disconnection operation of environmental sensors gt To directly connect one or multiple environmental sensors e Plug the connector
325. s Blade Servers in select models The ability to diagnose the network such as pinging a host or listing TCP connections The ability to monitor sever accessibility Full disaster recovery option in case of a catastrophic failure during a firmware upgrade The ability to display temperatures in Celsius or Fahrenheit height in meters or feet and pressure in Pascal or psi according to user credentials The following sub topics describe the equipment and other material included in the product package Zero U Products Dominion PX device Screws brackets and or buttons for Zero U A null modem cable with DB9 connectors on both ends Raritan number 254 01 0006 00 optional Cable retention clips for the inlet for some models only Cable retention clips for outlets for some models only Chapter 1 Introduction 1U Products e Dominion PX device e 1U bracket pack and screws e Anull modem cable with DB9 connectors on both ends Raritan number 254 01 0006 00 optional e Cable retention clips for the inlet for some models only 2U Products e Dominion PX device e 2U bracket pack and screws e Anull modem cable with DB9 connectors on both ends Raritan number 254 01 0006 00 optional e Cable retention clips for the inlet for some models only S Raritan Chapter 2 Rack Mounting the PDU This chapter describes how to rackmount a Dominion PX device Only the most common rackmount method is displayed
326. s a free program you can download from the Internet See PuTTY s documentation for details on configuration 1 2 To log in using SSH or Telnet Ensure SSH or Telnet has been enabled See Modifying the Network Service Settings on page 72 Launch an SSH or Telnet client and open a console window A login prompt appears login as 3 Type a name and press Enter The name is case sensitive so make sure you capitalize the correct letters Note If using the SSH client the name must NOT exceed 25 characters Otherwise the login fails Then you are prompted to enter a password login as admin admin 192 168 84 86 s password 4 Type a password and press Enter The password is case sensitive so make sure you capitalize the correct letters After properly entering the password the or gt system prompt appears See Different CLI Modes and Prompts on page 184 for details Tip The Last Login information including the date and time is also displayed if the same user profile was once used to log in to the Dominion PX web interface or CLI You are now logged in to the command line interface and can begin administering the Dominion PX device 183 184 Chapter 7 Using the Command Line Interface Help Command Different CLI Modes and Prompts Depending on the login name you use and the mode you enter the system prompt in the CLI varies User Mode When you log in as a normal
327. s button in the Edit User XXX dialog Select the role you want to modify by clicking it Click Edit or double click the role The Edit Role XXX dialog appears where XXX is the role name Tip You can also access the Edit Role XXX dialog by clicking the Edit Role button in the Edit User XXX dialog Modify the text shown in the Description field if necessary To change the permissions click the Privileges tab Note You cannot change the Admin role s permissions To delete any permissions do this a Select the permission you want to remove by clicking it To make multiple selections press Ctrl click or Shift click to highlight multiple ones b Click Delete To add any permissions do this S Raritan zie Raritan 9 Chapter 5 Using the Web Interface a Click Add The Add Privileges to Role XXX dialog appears where XXX is the role name b Select the permission you want from the Privileges list c Ifthe permission you selected contains any argument setting the Arguments list is shown to the right Then select one or multiple arguments For example if the Switch Outlet permission is selected the Arguments list shows all outlets for you to determine which outlets this role can control Select the desired outlets checkboxes or select the checkbox labeled all if you want to select all outlets d Click Add to add the selected permission and arguments if any e Repeat Steps a to d until you ad
328. s folder is selected you can also trigger the same dialog by highlighting the outlet on the Outlets page and then clicking Setup In the State on device startup field click the drop down arrow and select an option from the list on Turns on this outlet when the Dominion PX device powers up Off Turns off this outlet when the Dominion PX device powers up last known Restores this outlet to the previous power state before the Dominion PX device was powered off PDU defined The outlet s default power state is determined by the PDU defined state See Setting the PDU Defined Default State on page 116 Tip The information in parentheses following the option PDU defined indicates the current PDU defined selection Click OK to save the changes 117 118 Chapter 5 Using the Web Interface Changing the Cycling Power Off Period This section only applies to PDUs with the outlet switching function Power cycling the outlet s turns the outlet s off and then back on You can adjust the length of the time it takes for the outlets to turn back on after they are switched OFF during the power cycle The power off period of power cycle can be set for all outlets or for an individual outlet Note that the value set for an individual outlet always overrides the value set for all outlets Changing the PDU Defined Cycling Power Off Period This section only applies to PDUs with the outlet switching function The PD
329. s you want to change e option6 is one of the options DES or AES 128 Option Description DES DES privacy protocol is applied AES 128 AES 128 privacy protocol is applied Example The following command sets three SNMPv3 prameters of the user May 299 Chapter 7 Using the Command Line Interface config 300 user modify May snmpV3Access enabled securityLevel authNoPriv userPasswordAsAuthenticationPassPhrase true Results e The user s SNMPv3 access permission is enabled e The SNMPv3 security level is authentication only no privacy e The authentication passphrase is identical to the user s password Changing the Role s This command syntax changes the role s of a specific user config user modify lt name gt roles lt roles gt Variables e lt name gt is the name of the user whose settings you want to change e lt roles gt is a role or a list of comma separated roles assigned to the specified user profile Example The following command assigns two roles to the user May config user modify May roles admin tester Results e The user May has the union of all privileges of admin and tester SE Raritan Chapter 7 Using the Command Line Interface Changing the Measurement Units You can change the measurement units displayed for temperatures length and pressure Different measurement unit commands can be combined so that you can set all measurement units at a time To combine al
330. se the X Y and Z coordinates to describe each sensor s physical location You can use these location values to track records of environmental conditions in fixed locations around your IT equipment The X Y and Z values act as additional attributes and are not tied to any specific measurement scheme If you choose to you can use non measurement values For example X Brown Cabinet Row Y Third Rack Z Top of Cabinet Values for the X Y and Z coordinates may consist of e For X and Y Any combination of alphanumeric characters The coordinate value can be 0 to 32 characters long e For Z when the Z coordinate format is set to Rack Units any numeric value ranging from 0 to 60 e For Z when the Z coordinate format is set to Free Form any alphanumeric characters from 0 to 32 characters Tip To configure and retrieve these coordinate values over SNMP see the Dominion PX MIB To configure and retrieve these values over the CLI see Using the Command Line Interface on page 187 Viewing Sensor Data Readings of the environmental sensors will display in the web interface after these sensors are properly connected and managed The Dashboard page shows the information for managed environmental sensors only while the External Sensors page shows the information for both of managed and unmanaged ones gt To view managed environmental sensors only 1 Click the Dashboard icon in the Dominion PX Explorer pane and the Dashboar
331. ser Name field and password in the Password field Note Both the user name and password are case sensitive so make sure you capitalize them correctly If you typed them incorrectly click Clear to clear either the inputs or any error message that appears 4 Click Login or press Enter The Dominion PX page opens S Raritan Raritan Chapter 5 Using the Web Interface Note Depending on your hardware configuration elements shown on the Dominion PX page may appear slightly different from this image EE Raritan Dominion PX Com z giin FH Cumeet PMS vokages niv Acting Pomer ow Nrparent Power ova Pomer tater Acte Energy Daai soa na maang suvwh Outlets Nerrber of Outlets On it Marrias af Overs Off 1 tatemal Sessor 6 manageit 0 unmanegrd fase naen i natr 2 E Crom 2 Tergem t noe Tere 2 iiiili 2 my ruin taza B amri won Ch Last urge GI 2 Pu Quom Changing Your Password Normal users can change their own passwords if they have the Change Own Password permission See Setting Up Holes on page 87 If you are the administrator admin the Dominion PX web interface automatically prompts you to change the password if this is your first time to log in to Dominion PX gt To change your password 1 Choose User Management gt Change Password The Change User XXX Password dialog appears where XXX is the user s login name j Change User admin
332. sertion timeout for the specified inlet sensor See What is Assertion Timeout on page 133 Example The following command sets the assertion timeout value of the inlet 1 RMS current to 4 samples That is at least 4 consecutive samples must cross a specific current threshold before that threshold crossing event is asserted config sensor inlet 1 current assertionTimeout 4 Commands for Inlet Pole Sensors A sensor configuration command for inlet poles begins with sensor inletpole This type of command is available on a three phase PDU only 273 Chapter 7 Using the Command Line Interface Setting the Upper Critical Threshold for an Inlet Pole This command syntax configures the Upper Critical threshold of an inlet pole config sensor inletpole lt n gt lt p gt lt sensor type gt upperCritical lt option gt Variables e n is the number of the inlet whose pole sensors you want to configure e lt p gt is the label of the inlet pole that you want to configure Pole Label Current sensor Voltage sensor p 1 L1 L1 L1 L2 2 L2 L2 L2 L3 3 L3 L3 L3 L1 e sensor type is one of the following sensor types Sensor type Description current Current sensor voltage Voltage sensor activePower Active power sensor apparentPower Apparent power sensor powerFactor Power factor sensor activeEnergy Active energy sensor unbalancedCurrent Unbalanced load sensor Note If the requested sensor type is not suppor
333. shold deassertion hysteresis and assertion delay settings of the specified environmental sensor are displayed e With the parameter details more sensor information is displayed including location accuracy and range e fthe requested sensor type is not supported the message Not available is displayed Note For a discrete on off sensor the threshold related and accuracy related data is NOT available zie Raritan d 198 Chapter 7 Using the Command Line Interface Security Settings This command shows the security settings of the Dominion PX device show security To show detailed information add the parameter details to the end of the command show security details Displayed information e Without the parameter details the information including IP access control role based access control password policy and HTTPS encryption is displayed e With the parameter details more security information is displayed such as user blocking time and user idle timeout Existing User Profiles This command shows the data of one or all existing user profiles show user lt user_name gt To show detailed information add the parameter details to the end of the command show user lt user_name gt details Variables e lt user_name gt is the name of the user whose profile you want to query The variable can be one of the options all or a user s name Option D
334. sor You need to set a rack unit s LED mode only when the LED operation mode of this rack unit has been set to manual config rackUnit lt n gt lt rack_unit gt LEDMode lt mode gt Variables e n is the connected asset sensor s ID number shown on the Asset Management page e rack unit is the ID number of the rack unit whose LED mode you want to configure The ID number is shown on the Asset Strip page e mode is one of the LED modes on off or blink Mode Description on This mode has the LED stay lit permanently off This mode has the LED stay off permanently 317 Chapter 7 Using the Command Line Interface Mode Description blinkSlow This mode has the LED blink slowly blinkFast This mode has the LED blink quickly Example The following command causes the LED of the rack unit 25 on the asset sensor 1 to blink quickly config rackUnit 1 25 LEDMode blinkFast Setting the History Buffer Length This command syntax changes the history buffer length The default length is 25 config history length lt n gt Variables e n is an integer number between 0 and 256 e f you leave the n variable blank when using the command the history buffer is set to 25 by default Multi Command Syntax To shorten the configuration time you can combine various configuration commands in one command and perform all of them at a time A multi command syntax looks like this setting 1
335. sse 66 Modifying the Network Service Settings sssssssssssessssseeeeneee enne 72 Setting the Date and Meer 75 Specifying the Device Altitude inerte eene ett ederet need Race ket etaed eder 78 Setting Data Logging es 79 Configuring the SMTP SOtinGS uia rte ete ninth tt exuere sepatu se Pest edu eu dae 80 Setting the EnergyWise Configuration essent 81 Rebooting the Dominion PX IDGviCe sseni annann erba ea corse ndun ra eet d 82 User MarnagemiFriL uc thee toe Bae eue eia ene dehet Renate xara apud Sekt pdt urnas ks ka de etna E oux nud x Eee 82 Creating a User Profile oett dere de rende derer sex it adest raus pega 82 Mocditying a User Profile uiii oaia dept rene nee ret eden deret d 86 Deleting a User Profile sss eene nnne paana nnns 86 Changing the User List VIGW eerte tente reete Beeren Etna ek retenta dac Peter Atria ea 87 Seiting UD RO OS edet etudes obese metes neret ees aaee aeaoe a aaae Sai 87 Creating a Role crc Sce ca ecc cata aian ie teen xan svat na iatri eaaa tit ANTE a suet aiaia tate Aaea R dees 87 Moding A Ol FEE CE TEE TEE DETIENE 88 Deleting a Role mem PEE 89 Changing the Role List View essssessssssssesesesenee enne enne tenens nnne 89 ACCESS Security Control iiir eere acerbe ndn niega cuudda badd Marea oa na d dpa cones 90 Forcing PES ENCO Nosen cete etae et reer taedet terre tear tren eer rr 90
336. syntax for adding a rule varies gt To add a new rule to the bottom of the rules list use this command syntax config security ipAccessControl rule add lt ip_mask gt lt policy gt gt To add a new rule by inserting it above or below a specific rule use this command syntax config security ipAccessControl rule add lt ip_mask gt lt policy gt lt insert gt lt rule_number gt OR config security ipAccessControl rule add lt insert gt lt rule_number gt lt ip_mask gt lt policy gt Variables Raritan e ip mask is the combination of the IP address and subnet mask values which are separated with a slash For example 192 168 94 222 24 e policy is one of the options accept drop or reject Policy Description accept Accepts traffic from the specified IP address es 237 Chapter 7 Using the Command Line Interface Policy Description drop Discards traffic from the specified IP address es without sending any failure notification to the source host reject Discards traffic from the specified IP address es and an ICMP message is sent to the source host for failure notification e insert is one of the options insertAbove or insertBelow Option Description insertAbove Inserts the new rule above the specified rule number Then new rule s number the specified rule number insertBelow Inserts the new rule below the specified rule number Then new rule s number the spec
337. t delay3 gt pdu outletStateOnDeviceStartup lt option gt N N Y Other Commands v o NN lt This table indicates the applicability of CLI commands other than the show and configuration commands e Y applicable e N NOT applicable All power outlets commands All reset pdu commands nslookup host netstat option ping host traceroute host zie Raritan xdi Index 1 1U Products 4 2 2U Products 4 A A Note about Enabling Thresholds 179 A Note about Firmware Upgrade Time 170 A Note about Untriggered Rules 144 About Contact Closure Sensors 30 About the Interface 180 Access Security Control 90 Accessing the Help 171 Activating or Deactivating the Load Shedding Mode 125 Add Page Icon 55 58 Adding a Firewall Rule 236 Adding a Role Based Access Control Rule 249 Adding IT Devices for Ping Monitoring 146 Adding PDUs to Power IQ Management 353 Adding the LDAP Server Settings 107 Additional Dominion PX Information xiii 361 Adjusting the Pane 57 All Privileges 302 305 Altitude Correction Factors 78 210 361 Applicable Models xii Asset Management 159 Asset Management Commands 309 Asset Management Settings 199 Asset Sensor Management 309 Asset Sensor Settings 199 Associating Outlets with Target Servers on KX Il 358 Attaching Asset Sensors to a Rack 34 Automatic Mode 43 3
338. t n gt is the number of the outlet that you want to configure e lt sensor type is one of the following sensor types Sensor type Description current Current sensor voltage Voltage sensor activePower Active power sensor apparentPower Apparent power sensor powerFactor Power factor sensor activeEnergy Active energy sensor unbalancedCurrent Unbalanced load sensor Note If the requested sensor type is not supported the message Not available is displayed e value is a number in samples that is assigned to the assertion timeout for the specified outlet sensor See What is Assertion Timeout on page 133 Example The following command sets the assertion timeout value of the outlet 5 RMS current to 4 samples That is at least 4 consecutive samples must cross a specific current threshold before that threshold crossing event is asserted config sensor outlet 5 current assertionTimeout 4 Commands for Inlet Sensors A sensor configuration command for inlets begins with sensor inlet zie Raritan d Chapter 7 Using the Command Line Interface 268 Setting the Inlet s Upper Critical Threshold This command syntax configures the Upper Critical threshold of an inlet config sensor inlet lt n gt lt sensor type gt upperCritical lt option gt Variables e lt n gt is the number of the inlet that you want to configure For a single inlet PDU n is always the number 1 e sensor type is one of the followi
339. t privilege3 gt lt argument1 gt lt argument2 gt Variables e lt name gt is a string comprising up to 32 ASCII printable characters e privilege1 lt privilege2 gt lt privilege3 gt and the like are names of the privileges assigned to the role Separate each privilege with a semi colon See All Privileges on page 304 e argumenti lt argument2 gt and the like are arguments set for a particular privilege For example the switchOutlet privilege requires arguments Separate a privilege and its argument with a colon gt Toremove specific privileges from a role config f role modify name removePrivileges privilegel privilege2 privilege3 If a specific privilege contains any arguments add a colon and the argument s after that privilege config role modify lt name gt removePrivileges lt privilegel gt lt argument1 gt lt argument2 gt lt privilege2 gt lt argument1 gt lt argument2 gt lt privilege3 gt lt argument1 gt lt argument2 gt Note When removing privileges from a role make sure the specified privileges and arguments if any exactly match those assigned to the role Otherwise the command fails to remove specified privileges that are not available Variables e lt name gt is a string comprising up to 32 ASCII printable characters e privilege1 privilege2 lt privilege3 gt and the like are names of the privileges assigned to the role
340. t the thresholds for other sensors repeat Steps 4 to 9 Click OK to save the changes Important The final step is required or the threshold changes are not saved Setting Inlet Thresholds You can set the inlet thresholds so that the alerts are generated when the inlet current and or voltage crosses the thresholds 1 To set the inlet thresholds If the PDU folder is not expanded expand it to show all components and component groups See Expanding the Tree on page 55 Click Inlet 1 in the Dominion PX Explorer pane and the Inlet l1 page opens in the right pane Click Setup The Inlet 1 Setup dialog appears In the Threshold Configuration table click the sensor whose thresholds you want to configure Click Edit A threshold setup dialog for the selected sensor appears Tip You can also double click the desired sensor in the Threshold Configuration table to trigger this dialog Configure the Lower Critical Lower Warning Upper Warning and Upper Critical thresholds respectively To enable any threshold select the corresponding checkbox To disable a threshold deselect the checkbox S Raritan zie Raritan Chapter 5 Using the Web Interface After any threshold is enabled type an appropriate numeric value in the accompanying text box 7 Toenable the deassertion hysteresis for all thresholds type a numeric value other than zero in the Deassertion Hysteresis field See What is Deass
341. t when the Dominion PX device powers up lastKnownState Restores the outlet to the previous status before the Dominion PX device powered down when powering up the PDU pduDefined Determines the outlet s default state according to the PDU defined setting Note Setting the outlet s default state to an option other than pduDefined overrides the PDU defined default state on that outlet See Setting the PDU Defined Default Outlet State on page 207 Example The following command makes the outlet 8 return to the last power state before powering down the PDU after you power it up again config f outlet 8 stateOnDeviceStartup lastKnownState is Raritan zie Raritan Chapter 7 Using the Command Line Interface Setting an Outlet s Cycling Power Off Period This section only applies to PDUs with the outlet switching function This command syntax determines the power off period of the power cycling operation for a specific outlet config outlet lt n gt cyclingPowerOffPeriod lt timing gt Variables e n is the number of the outlet that you want to configure e timing is the time of the cycling power off period in seconds which is an integer between 0 and 3600 Note This setting overrides the PDU defined cycling power off period on a particular outlet See Setting the PDU Defined Cycling Power Off Period on page 206 Example The following command sets the power off period of outlet 8 to 3 seconds wh
342. tal sensor xternalsensor lt n gt lt sensor type gt lowerCritical lt option gt Variables e n is the ID number of the environmental sensor that you want to configure The ID number is assigned and shown in the Dominion PX web interface It is an integer between 1 and 16 e sensor type is one of these sensor types temperature humidity airPressure or air Flow Note If the specified sensor type does not match the type of the specified environmental sensor this error message appears Specified sensor type XXX does not match the sensor s type lt sensortype gt where XXX is the specified sensor type and lt sensortype gt is the correct sensor type e option is one of the options enable disable or a numeric value Option Description enable Enables the lower critical threshold for the specified environmental sensor disable Disables the lower critical threshold for the specified environmental sensor A numeric value Sets a value for the lower critical threshold of the specified environmental sensor and enables this threshold at the same time SE Raritan Chapter 7 Using the Command Line Interface Example The following command sets the Lower Critical threshold of the environmental humidity sensor with the ID number 1 to 15 It also enables the lower critical threshold if this threshold has not been enabled yet config sensor externalsensor 1 humidity lowerCritical 15 Setting
343. ted the message Not available is displayed e option is one of the options enable disable or a numeric value Option Description enable Enables the upper critical threshold for the specified inlet pole sensor disable Disables the upper critical threshold for the specified inlet pole sensor di Raritan config sensor zie Raritan Chapter 7 Using the Command Line Interface Option Description A numeric value Sets a value for the upper critical threshold of the specified inlet pole sensor and enables this threshold at the same time Example The following command disables the Upper Critical threshold for the pole 3 L3 L1 voltage of the inlet 1 config sensor inletpole 1 L3 voltage upperCritical disable Setting the Upper Warning Threshold for an Inlet Pole This command syntax configures the Upper Warning threshold of an inlet pole inletpole lt n gt lt p gt lt sensor type gt upperWarning lt option gt Variables lt n gt is the number of the inlet whose pole sensors you want to configure lt p gt is the label of the inlet pole that you want to configure Pole Label lt p gt 1 L1 2 L2 3 L3 Current sensor Voltage sensor L1 L1 L2 L2 L2 L3 L3 L3 L1 sensor type is one of the following sensor types Sensor type current voltage activePower apparentPower powerFactor activeEnergy unbalancedCurrent Description Current sensor Voltage sensor
344. tep 4 it is NOT recommended and this capability may be removed in the future 79 Chapter 5 Using the Web Interface Configuring the SMTP Settings Dominion PX can be configured to send alerts or event messages to a specific administrator by email To do this you have to configure the SMTP settings and enter an IP address for your SMTP server and a sender s email address Note See Configuring Event Rules on page 134 for information on creating event rules to send email notifications gt 1 9 10 80 To set the SMTP server settings Choose Device Settings SMTP Server The SMTP Server Settings dialog appears Type the name or IP address of the mail server in the Server Name field Type the port number for the SMTP server in the Port field The default is 25 Type an email address for the sender in the Sender Email Address field Type the number of email retries in the Number of Sending Retries field The default is 2 retries Type the time interval between email retries in the Time Interval Between Sending Retries in minutes field The time is measured in minutes The default is 2 minutes If your SMTP server requires password authentication do this a Select the Server Requires Authentication checkbox b Type auser name in the User Name field c Type a password in the Password field Now that you have set the SMTP settings you can test it to ensure it work properly Do the following
345. the CA ensure this checkbox is NOT selected Type a password The password is used to protect the certificate or CSR This information is optional and the value should be 4 to 64 characters long The password is case sensitive so ensure you capitalize the letters correctly Type the same password again for confirmation 4 Click Create New SSL Key to create both the CSR and private key This may take several minutes to complete 5 To download the newly created CSR to your computer click Download Certificate Signing Request a You are prompted to open or save the file Click Save to save it on your computer b After the file is stored on your computer submit it to a CA to obtain the digital certificate c If desired click Delete Certificate Signing Request to remove the CSR file permanently from the Dominion PX device 6 Tostore the newly created private key on your computer click Download Key You are prompted to open or save the file Click Save to save it on your computer S Raritan Chapter 5 Using the Web Interface 7 Click Close to quit the dialog Installing a CA Signed Certificate After the CA provides a signed certificate according to the CSR you submitted you must install it on the Dominion PX device gt To install the certificate 1 Choose Device Settings gt Security gt SSL Certificate The Manage SSL Certificate dialog appears Click the New SSL Certificate tab In the Certifi
346. the ID number of a specific asset sensor The ID number of the asset sensor can be found on the Dominion PX web interface e rack unit is one of the options all or a specific rack unit s number Option Description all Displays the settings of all rack units on the specified asset sensor Tip You can also type the command without adding this option all to get the same data A specific Displays the settings of a specified rack unit on the number specified asset sensor 201 Chapter 7 Using the Command Line Interface Reliability Data This command shows the reliability data show reliability data Reliability Error Log This command shows the reliability error log show reliability errorlog lt n gt Variables e n is one of the options all or a number Option Description all Displays all entries in the reliability error log Tip You can also type the command without adding this option all to get the same data A specific Displays the specified number of last entries in the number reliability error log Command History This command syntax shows the command history for current connection session show history Displayed information e Alistof commands that were previously entered in the current session is displayed n sis Raritan zie Raritan Chapter 7 Using the Command Line Interface History Buffer Length This command syntax shows the length of the history buffer
347. the LDAP LDAPS server A certificate file is required when enabling the encryption 7 Port The default Port is 389 Either use the standard LDAP TCP port or specify another port 107 Chapter 5 Using the Web Interface 8 SSL Port The default is 636 Either use the default port or specify another port This field is enabled when the LDAP over SSL checkbox is selected 9 Use only trusted LDAP Server Certificates Select this checkbox if you would like to use a trusted LDAP server certificate file that is a certificate file signed by the CA When NOT selected you can use all LDAP LDAPS server certificates including a self signed certificate file 10 Server Certificate Consult your authentication server administrator to get the CA certificate file for the LDAP LDAPS server Use the Browse button to navigate to the certificate file This field is required when the LDAP over SSL checkbox is selected 11 Anonymous Bind For OpenLDAP use this checkbox to enable or disable anonymous bind To use anonymous bind select this checkbox When a Bind DN and password are required to bind to the external LDAP LDAPS server deselect this checkbox 12 Use Bind Credentials For Microsoft Active Directory use this checkbox to enable or disable anonymous bind To use anonymous bind deselect this checkbox By default it is deselected When a Bind DN and password are required to bind to the external LDAP LDAPS se
348. the Sensor s Lower Warning Threshold This command syntax configures the Lower Warning threshold of a numeric environmental sensor config sensor externalsensor lt n gt lt sensor type gt lowerWarning lt option gt Variables e n is the ID number of the environmental sensor that you want to configure The ID number is assigned and shown in the Dominion PX web interface It is an integer between 1 and 16 e sensor type is one of these sensor types temperature humidity airPressure or air Flow Note If the specified sensor type does not match the type of the specified environmental sensor this error message appears Specified sensor type XXX does not match the sensor s type lt sensortype gt where XXX is the specified sensor type and lt sensortype gt is the correct sensor type e option is one of the options enable disable or a numeric value Option Description enable Enables the lower warning threshold for the specified environmental sensor disable Disables the lower warning threshold for the specified environmental sensor A numeric value Sets a value for the lower warning threshold of the specified environmental sensor and enables this threshold at the same time zie Raritan ode 290 Chapter 7 Using the Command Line Interface config sensor Example The following command disables the Lower Warning threshold of the environmental humidity sensor with the ID number 3
349. the command syntax config f network ipv4 preferredHostName lt name gt Variables e name is a host name which Consists of alphanumeric characters and or hyphens Cannot begin or end with a hyphen Cannot contain more than 63 characters Cannot contain punctuation marks spaces and other symbols 221 Chapter 7 Using the Command Line Interface Example The following command sets the preferred host name to my host config f network ipv4 preferredHostName my host Setting the IP Address After selecting the static IP configuration mode you can use this command syntax to assign a permanent IP address to the Dominion PX device config f network ipv4 ipAddress ip address gt Variables e ip address is the IP address being assigned to your Dominion PX device The value ranges from 0 0 0 0 to 255 255 255 255 Example The following command assigns the static IPv4 address 192 168 84 222 to the Dominion PX device config network ipv4 ipAddress 192 168 84 222 Setting the Subnet Mask After selecting the static IP configuration mode you can use this command syntax to define the subnet mask config network ipv4 subnetMask lt netmask gt Variables e netmask is the subnet mask address The value ranges from 0 0 0 0 to 255 255 255 255 Example The following command sets the subnet mask to 192 168 84 0 config f network ipv4 subnetMask 192 168 84 0 Raritan Chapter 7 Using
350. the password aging feature which controls whether the password should be changed at a regular interval config security loginLimits passwordAging lt option gt Variables e option is one of the options enable or disable Option Description enable Enables the password aging feature disable Disables the password aging feature Example The following command enables the password aging feature config security loginLimits passwordAging enable Password Aging Interval This command syntax determines how often the password should be changed config security loginLimits passwordAgingInterval lt value gt Variables e value is a numeric value in days set for the password aging interval The interval ranges from 7 to 365 days Example The following command sets the password again interval to 90 days config security loginLimits passwordAgingInterval 90 E SE Raritan Chapter 7 Using the Command Line Interface Idle Timeout This command syntax determines how long a user can remain idle before that user is forced to log out of the Dominion PX web interface config security loginLimits idleTimeout lt value gt Variables e value is a numeric value in minutes set for the idle timeout The timeout ranges from 1 to 1440 minutes 24 hours Example The following command sets the idle timeout to 10 munites config security loginLimits idleTimeout 10 User Blocking The
351. the user gt To change the default policy 1 Choose Device Settings gt Security gt Role Based Access Control The Configure Role Based Access Control Settings dialog appears 2 Make sure the Enable Role Based Access Control checkbox is selected 3 Select the action you want from the Default Policy drop down list Allow Accepts traffic from all IP addresses regardless of the user s role Deny Drops traffic from all IP addresses regardless of the user s role 4 Click OK to save the changes Creating Role Based Access Control Rules Role based access control rules accept or drop traffic based on the user s role and IP address Like firewall rules the order of rules is important since the rules are executed in numerical order gt Tocreate role based access control rules 1 Choose Device Settings Security Role Based Access Control The Configure Role Based Access Control Settings dialog appears 2 Make sure the Enable Role Based Access Control checkbox is selected 3 Create specific rules S Raritan Chapter 5 Using the Web Interface Click Append The Append new Rule dialog appears Type a starting IP address in the Starting IP Address field Type an ending IP address in the Ending IP Address field Select a role from the drop down list in the Role field This rule applies to members of this role only Select Allow or Deny from the drop down list in the Policy field All
352. thentication Click Browse to select a valid certificate file To view the contents of the selected certificate file click Show If the selected certificate file is invalid click Remove Then select a new file Click OK to save the changes S Raritan Raritan Chapter 5 Using the Web Interface Modifying the Network Settings Dominion PX was configured for network connectivity during the installation and configuration process See Configuring Dominion PX on page 16 If necessary you can modify any network settings using the web interface Selecting the Internet Protocol The Dominion PX device supports two types of Internet protocols IPv4 and IPv6 You can enable either or both Internet protocols After enabling the desired Internet protocol s all but not limited to the following protocols will be compliant with the enabled Internet protocol s e LDAP e NTP e SMTP e SSH e Telnet e FTP e SSL e SNMP e SysLog gt To select the appropriate Internet Protocol 1 Choose Device Settings gt Network The Network Configuration dialog appears Click the IP Protocol tab Select one checkbox according to the Internet protocol s you want to enable Pv4 only Enables IPv4 only on all interfaces This is the default Pv6 only Enables IPv6 only on all interfaces Pv4 and IPv6 Enables both IPv4 and IPv6 on all interfaces 4 Ifyou selected the IPv4 and IPv6 checkbox in the previous ste
353. timeout values for any sensor associated with the following items Outlets Inlets Inlet poles for three phase PDUs only Circuit breakers Environmental sensors It is permitted to assign a new value to the threshold at any time regardless of whether the threshold is being enabled Commands for Outlet Sensors A sensor configuration command for outlets begins with sensor outlet zie Raritan dd Chapter 7 Using the Command Line Interface Setting the Outlet s Upper Critical Threshold This command syntax configures the Upper Critical threshold of an outlet config f sensor outlet n sensor type upperCritical option Variables e n is the number of the outlet that you want to configure e sensor type is one of the following sensor types Sensor type Description current Current sensor voltage Voltage sensor activePower Active power sensor apparentPower Apparent power sensor powerFactor Power factor sensor activeEnergy Active energy sensor unbalancedCurrent Unbalanced load sensor Note If the requested sensor type is not supported the message Not available is displayed e option is one of the options enable disable or a numeric value Option Description enable Enables the upper critical threshold for the specified outlet sensor disable Disables the upper critical threshold for the specified outlet sensor A numeric value Sets a value for the upper critical threshold of th
354. tings are configured as follows Bits per second 115200 115 2Kbps Data bits 8 Stop bits 1 Parity None Flow control None Press Enter Dominion PX prompts you to log in Note that both of user name and password are case sensitive a Atthe Username prompt type admin and press Enter b Atthe Password prompt type raritan and press Enter You are prompted to change the password if this is the first time you log in to the Dominion PX device Follow the onscreen instructions to type your new password The prompt appears when you log in successfully Type config and press Enter To configure network settings type appropriate commands and press Enter All commands are case sensitive a Toset the networking mode type this command network mode lt mode gt where mode is either wired for wired connection default or wireless for wireless connection b Forthe wired network mode you may configure the LAN interface settings In most scenarios the default setting auto works well and should not be changed unless required S Raritan Raritan Chapter 3 Installation and Configuration To set Use this command LAN interface network interface speed LANInterfaceSpeed lt option gt where option is auto 10Mbps or 100Mbps LAN interface network interface duplex mode LANInterfaceDuplexMode mode where mode is half full or auto Tip You can combine multiple comm
355. tion where option is enable or disable See the table below for the IPv6 commands for manually specifying DNS servers 24 S Raritan Raritan Chapter 3 Installation and Configuration For the static IPv6 configuration you should configure the following parameters Note that the IP address must follow the IPv6 format To set Static IPv6 address Gateway Primary DNS server Secondary DNS server optional Use this command network ipv6 ipAddress ip address where ip address is the IP address you want to assign network ipv6 gateway ip address where ip address is the IP address of the gateway network ipv6 primaryDNSServer ip address where ip address is the IP address of the primary DNS server network ipv6 secondaryDNSServer ip address where ip address is the IP address of the secondary DNS server To quit the configuration mode with or without saving the changes type either command and press Enter Command apply cancel Description Save all configuration changes and quit the configuration mode Abort all configuration changes and quit the configuration mode The prompt appears indicating that you have quit the configuration mode To verify whether all settings are correct type the following commands one by one Current network settings are displayed 25 26 Chapter 3 Installation and Configuration Command Descr
356. tion c Amessage appears prompting you to confirm the operation Click Yes to confirm the deletion Click Close to quit the dialog SE Raritan Chapter 5 Using the Web Interface A Note about Untriggered Rules In some cases a measurement exceeds a threshold causing Dominion PX to generate an alert The measurement then returns to a value within the threshold but Dominion PX does not generate an alert message for the Deassertion event Such scenarios can occur due to the hysteresis tracking Dominion PX uses See What is Deassertion Hysteresis on page 132 Managing Event Logging zie Raritan By default Dominion PX captures certain system events and saves them in a local internal event log Viewing the Local Event Log You can view up to 2 000 historical events that occurred to the Dominion PX device in the local event log When the log already contains 2 000 entries each new entry overwrites the oldest entry gt To display the local log 1 Choose Maintenance View Event Log The Event Log dialog appears Each event entry in the local log consists of Date and time of the event Type of the event A description of the event D number of the event 2 The dialog shows the final page by default You can Switch between different pages by doing one of the following Click I4 or PI to go to the first or final page Click 4 or P to go to the prior or next page Type a number in t
357. tion Commands This table indicates the configuration commands applicability e Y applicable e N NOT applicable CLI commands PX2 3k PX2 4k PX2 5k All network commands Y Y Y All security commands All inlet commands All ocp commands All externalsensor commands All sensor outlet commands All sensor inlet commands All sensor inletpole commands All sensor ocp commands All sensor externalsensor commands All user commands All role commands All energywise commands All asset management related commands All loadshedding commands history length lt n gt network mode lt mode gt outlet n cyclingPowerOffPeriod timing lt z lt z lt lt lt lt l z lt 2 lt lt lt lt lt lt outlet lt n gt name lt name gt S Raritan Appendix F Additional Dominion PX Information outlet lt n gt stateOnDeviceStartup lt option gt pdu cyclingPowerOffPeriod timing pdu dataRetrieval option pdu deviceAltitude altitude pdu externalSensorsZCoordinateFormat option pdu inrushGuardDelay timing pdu measurementsPerLogEntry number pdu name lt name gt Y Y pdu nonCriticalOutlets lt outlets1 gt false lt outlets2 gt true pdu outletSequenceDelay Y lt outlet1 gt lt delayl gt lt outlet2 gt lt delay2 gt lt outlet3 gt l
358. tion sets the time limit to X hours where X is a number 1d This option sets the time limit to 1 day 6 Click OK to save the changes 95 96 Chapter 5 Using the Web Interface Enabling Login Limitations Login limitations determine whether more than one person can use the same login name at the same time and how long users are permitted to stay idle before being forced to log out gt To enable login limitations 1 Choose Device Settings gt Security gt Login Settings The Login Settings dialog appears Locate the Login Limitations section To prevent more than one person from using the same login at the same time select the Prevent concurrent login with same username checkbox 4 To adjust how long users can remain idle before they are forcibly logged out by Dominion PX select a time option in the Idle Timeout Period field The default is 10 minutes X min This type of option sets the time limit to X minutes where X is a number X h This type of option sets the time limit to X hours where X is a number 1d This option sets the time limit to 1 day 5 Click OK to save the changes Tip Keep the idle timeout to 20 minutes or less if possible This reduces the number of idle sessions connected and the number of simullaneous commands sent to Dominion PX Enabling Strong Passwords Use of strong passwords makes it more difficult for intruders to crack user passwords and access the Domini
359. tiple Raritan differential air pressure sensors if necessary gt To connect differential air pressure sensors 1 Plug one end of a Raritan provided phone cable to the SENSOR port of the Dominion PX device 2 Plug the other end of this phone cable to the IN port of the differential air pressure sensor 3 Toconnect additional Raritan differential air pressure sensors do the following a Plug one end of a Raritan provided phone cable to the OUT port of the previously connected differential air pressure sensor b Plug the other end of this phone cable to the IN port of the newly added differential air pressure sensor c Repeat Steps a and b to cascade more differential air pressure sensors 1 Dominion PX device e Raritan differential air pressure sensors zie Raritan Chapter 3 Installation and Configuration Connecting the Asset Management Sensor Optional You can remotely track the locations of up to 48 IT devices in the rack by connecting an asset management sensor asset sensor to the Dominion PX device after these IT devices are tagged electronically To use this asset management feature you need the following items e Raritan asset sensors An asset sensor transmits the tagging and positioning information to the Dominion PX device e Raritan asset tags An asset tag electronically tags the IT device where it is attached Attaching Asset Sensors to a Rack Each tag port on the asset sensors c
360. tlets A specific outlet Switches OFF the specified outlet number A comma Switches OFF multiple inconsecutive or separated list of consecutive outlets auel For example to specify 7 outlets 2 4 9 11 12 13 and 15 type outlets 2 4 9 11 13 15 A range of Switches OFF multiple consecutive outlets P a an For example to specify 6 consecutive outlets 3 betwaah 4 5 6 7 8 type outlets 3 8 If you entered the command without y a message appears prompting you to confirm the operation Then Type y to confirm the operation OR Type n to abort the operation zie Raritan s Chapter 7 Using the Command Line Interface Example The following command turns off the outlet 6 power outlets 6 off Power Cycling the Outlet s This section only applies to PDUs with the outlet switching function This command syntax power cycles one or multiple outlets power outlets lt numbers gt cycle To quicken the operation you can add the parameter y to the end of the command which confirms the operation power outlets numbers cycle y Variables e numbers is one ofthe options all an outlet number a list or a range of outlets Option Description all Power cycles all outlets A specific outlet Power cycles the specified outlet number A comma Power cycles multiple inconsecutive or separated list of consecutive outlets puel For example to specify 7 outlets
361. to configure Pole Label Current sensor Voltage sensor p 1 L1 L1 L1 L2 2 L2 L2 L2 L3 3 L3 L3 L3 L1 e sensor type is one of the following sensor types Sensor type Description current Current sensor voltage Voltage sensor activePower Active power sensor apparentPower Apparent power sensor powerFactor Power factor sensor activeEnergy Active energy sensor unbalancedCurrent Unbalanced load sensor Note If the requested sensor type is not supported the message Not available is displayed e option is one of the options enable disable or a numeric value Option Description enable Enables the lower warning threshold for the specified inlet pole sensor disable Disables the lower warning threshold for the specified inlet pole sensor A numeric value Sets a value for the lower warning threshold of the specified inlet pole sensor and enables this threshold at the same time vi SE Raritan Chapter 7 Using the Command Line Interface Example The following command sets the Lower Warning threshold for the pole 3 L3 L1 voltage of the inlet 1 to 190V It also enables the lower warning threshold if this threshold has not been enabled yet config sensor inletpole 1 L3 voltage lowerWarning 190 Setting the Inlet Pole s Deassertion Hysteresis This command syntax configures the deassertion hysteresis value of an inlet pole config sensor inletpole lt n gt lt p gt lt sensor type gt hyst
362. to normal To do that we would set up an event rule like this e Event Events gt Outlet gt Outlet 3 gt Sensor gt Any sub event e Trigger condition both e Actions System SNMP Trap Action gt Tocreate the above event rule 1 Select Events gt Outlet to indicate we are specifying an event at the outlet level 2 Select Outlet 3 from the submenu because that is the outlet in question 141 Chapter 5 Using the Web Interface 142 3 Select Sensor to refer to sensor readings 4 Select Any sub event because we want to specify all events related to all types of outlet sensors and thresholds such as current voltage upper critical threshold upper warning threshold lower critical threshold lower warning threshold and so on 5 Select System SNMP Trap Action to send SNMP traps to respond to the specified event 6 Select the both radio button so that the SNMP traps are sent both when any sensor reading of outlet 3 moves past any threshold into the warning or critical range and when the sensor reading returns to normal For example when the outlet 3 s voltage crosses into the upper warning range the SNMP traps are sent and when the voltage drops below the upper warning threshold the SNMP traps are sent again Sample Inlet Level Event Rule In this example we want Dominion PX to send SNMP traps to the SNMP manager both when any sensor reading of the Inlet 11 crosses any threshold and when it retu
363. to the CLI by typing the user name admin and its password See Step 4 of Initial Network Configuration on page 20 345 Appendix C Resetting to Factory Defaults 4 After the system prompt appears type either of the following commands and press Enter reset factorydefaults HOR reset factorydefaults y 5 f you entered the command without y in Step 4 a message appears prompting you to confirm the operation Type y to confirm the reset 6 Wait until the Username prompt appears indicating the reset is complete ui Raritan Appendix D Step A Determine zie Raritan LDAP Configuration Illustration This section provides an LDAP example for illustrating the configuration procedure using Microsoft Active Directory AD To configure LDAP authentication four main steps are required a b C d Determine user accounts and groups intended for Dominion PX Create user groups for Dominion PX on the AD server Configure LDAP authentication on the Dominion PX device Configure roles on the Dominion PX device In This Chapter Step A Determine User Accounts and Groups ssssssss 347 Step B Configure User Groups on the AD Server 348 Step C Configure LDAP Authentication on the Dominion PX Device 349 Step D Configure User Groups on the Dominion PX Device 351 User Accounts and Groups Determine the user accounts and
364. tocol both 213 Chapter 7 Using the Command Line Interface Selecting IPv4 or IPv6 Addresses This command syntax determines which IP address is used when the DNS server returns both of IPv4 and IPv6 addresses You need to configure this setting only after both of IPv4 and IPv6 protocols are enabled on Dominion PX config f network ip dnsResolverPreference address Variables e lt address gt is one of the options v4Addresses or v6Addresses Mode Description v4Addresses Use the IPv4 addresses returned by the DNS server v6Addresses Use the IPv6 addresses returned by the DNS server Example The following command determines that only IPv4 addresses returned by the DNS server are used config network ip dnsResolverPreference v4Addresses Setting the Wireless Parameters You must configure wireless parameters including Service Set Identifier SSID authentication method and so on Pre Shared Key PSK and Basic Service Set Identifier BSSID after the wireless networking mode is enabled A wireless configuration command begins with network wireless Note If current networking mode is not wireless the SSID PSK and BSSID values are not applied until the networking mode is changed to wireless In addition a message appears indicating that the active network interface is not wireless The commands are case sensitive so ensure you capitalize them correctly m sis Raritan Chapter 7 Using the Comma
365. tput Transmit data 4 DTR Output Data terminal ready 5 GND Signal ground 6 DSR Input Data set ready 7 RTS Output Request to send 8 CTS Input Clear to send 9 RI Input Ring indicator Sensor RJ 12 Port Pinouts RJ 12 Pin signal definition Pin No Signal Direction Description 1 12V Power 500mA fuse protected GND Signal Ground 3 RS485 bi direction Data Line Data al 4 RS485 r Data Line a p SE Raritan Appendix A Specifications RJ 12 Pin signal definition Data GND Signal Ground 6 1 wire Used for Feature Port zie Raritan Appendix B Equipment Setup Worksheet Dominion PX Series Model Dominion PX Series Serial Number OUTLET 1 OUTLET 2 OUTLET 3 MODEL MODEL HOUSE SERIAL NUMBER SERIAL NUMBER SERIAL NUMBER USE USE USE OUTLET 4 OUTLET 5 OUTLET 6 MODEL MODEL MODEL SERIAL NUMBER SERIAL NUMBER zie Raritan SERIAL NUMBER 340 Appendix B Equipment Setup Worksheet OUTLET 7 OUTLET 8 OUTLET 9 MODEL MODEL MODEL SERIAL NUMBER SERIAL NUMBER SERIAL NUMBER USE USE USE OUTLET 10 OUTLET 11 OUTLET 12 MODEL MODEL MODEL SERIAL NUMBER SERIAL NUMBER SERIAL NUMBER USE USE USE OUTLET 13 OUTLET 14 OUTLET 15 MODEL MODEL MODEL SERIAL NUMBER SERIAL NUMBER SERIAL NUMBER zie Raritan 341 Appendix B Equipment Setup Worksheet OUTLET 16
366. u can specify the DNS servers manually See Overriding the DHCP Assigned DNS Server on page 228 config f network ipv6 primaryDNSServer ip address gt Variables e ip address is the IP address of the primary DNS server This value uses the IPv6 address format Example The following command determines that the primary DNS server is 2103 288 8201 1 14 config network ipv6 primaryDNSServer 2103 288 8201 1 14 Setting the Secondary DNS Server After selecting the static IP configuration mode you can use this command syntax to specify the secondary DNS server It is required to enable the overriding of the auto assigned DNS server before you can specify the DNS servers manually See Overriding the DHCP Assigned DNS Server on page 228 config f network ipv6 secondaryDNSServer ip address gt Variables e ip address is the IP address of the secondary DNS server This value uses the IPv6 address format Note Dominion PX supports a maximum of 3 DNS servers If two IPv4 DNS servers and two IPv6 DNS servers are available Dominion PX only uses the primary IPv4 and IPv6 DNS servers Example The following command determines that the secondary DNS server is 2103 288 8201 1 700 config f network ipv6 secondaryDNSServer 2103 288 8201 1 700 227 Chapter 7 Using the Command Line Interface Overriding the DHCP Assigned DNS Server After specifying the primary secondary DNS server you can use this comma
367. ude correction factor See Altitude Correction Factors on page 363 The default altitude measurement unit is meter You can have the measurement unit vary between meter and foot according to user credentials See Changing the Measurement Units on page 165 gt To specify the altitude of the Dominion PX device 1 Click the PDU folder Note The PDU folder is named my PX by default The name changes after customizing the device name See Naming the PDU on page 66 Click Setup in the Settings section The Pdu Setup dialog appears Type an integer number in the Altitude field Depending on the measurement unit displayed the range of valid numbers differs For meters m the value ranges between 0 and 3000 For feet ft the value ranges between 0 and 9842 4 Click OK to save the changes Raritan zie Raritan Chapter 5 Using the Web Interface Setting Data Logging Dominion PX can store 120 measurements for each sensor in a memory buffer This memory buffer is known as the data log Sensor readings in the data log can be retrieved using SNMP You can configure how often measurements are written into the data log using the Measurements Per Log Entry field Since Dominion PX s internal sensors are measured every second specifying a value of 60 for example would cause measurements to be written to the data log once every minute Since there are 120 measurements of storage per sensor specifying a value of
368. up to 32 ASCII printable characters gt To determine whether the privacy passphrase is identical to the authentication passphrase config f user modify name useAuthenticationPassPhraseAsPrivacyPassPhrase lt option4 gt Variables e name is the name of the user whose settings you want to change e option4 is one of the options true or false Option Description true Privacy passphrase is identical to the authentication passphrase false Privacy passphrase is different from the authentication passphrase gt To determine the privacy passphrase e Raritan Chapter 7 Using the Command Line Interface config user modify lt name gt privacyPassPhrase lt privacy_passphrase gt Raritan Variables lt name gt is the name of the user whose settings you want to change privacy passphrase is a string used as a privacy passphrase comprising up to 32 ASCII printable characters gt To determine the authentication protocol config user modify lt name gt authenticationProtocol lt option5 gt Variables e name is the name of the user whose settings you want to change e option5 is one of the options MD5 or SHA 1 Option Description MD5 MD5 authentication protocol is applied SHA 1 SHA 1 authentication protocol is applied gt To determine the privacy protocol config user modify lt name gt privacyProtocol lt option6 gt Variables e name is the name of the user whose setting
369. urity ipAccessControl enabled lt option gt gt To determine the default firewall control policy use this command syntax config security ipAccessControl defaultPolicy lt policy gt Variables e lt option gt is one of the options true or false Option Description true Enables the IP access control feature false Disables the IP access control feature e policy is one of the options accept drop or reject Option Description accept Accepts traffic from all IP addresses drop Discards traffic from all IP addresses without sending any failure notification to the source host reject Discards traffic from all IP addresses and an ICMP message is sent to the source host for failure notification Tip You can combine both commands to modify all firewall control parameters at a time See Multi Command Syntax on page 318 xdi Raritan Chapter 7 Using the Command Line Interface Example The following command sets up two parameters of the IP access control feature config security ipAccessControl enabled true defaultPolicy accept Results e The IP access control feature is enabled e The default policy is set to accept Managing Firewall Rules You can add delete or modify firewall rules using the CLI commands A firewall control rule command begins with security ipAccessControl rule Adding a Firewall Rule Depending on where you want to add a new firewall rule in the list the command
370. user who does not have full permissions to configure the Dominion PX device the gt prompt appears Administrator Mode When you log in as an administrator who has full permissions to configure the Dominion PX device the prompt appears Configuration Mode You can enter the configuration mode from the administrator mode In this mode the prompt changes to config and you can change Dominion PX device and network configurations See Entering the Configuration Mode on page 205 Diagnostic Mode You can enter the diagnostic mode from the administrator mode In this mode the prompt changes to diag gt and you can perform the network troubleshooting commands such as the ping command See Entering the Diagnostic Mode on page 327 Closing a Serial Connection Close the window or terminal emulation program when you finish accessing a Dominion PX device over the serial connection When accessing or upgrading multiple Dominion PX devices do not transfer the serial cable from one device to another without closing the serial connection window first The help command shows a list of main CLI commands This is helpful when you are not familiar with the commands gt The help command syntax is help Press Enter after typing the command and a list of main commands is displayed Tip You can check what parameters are available for a specific CLI command by adding a question mark to the end of the command See Querying Av
371. vice is disabled Example The following command enables the SSH service config network services ssh enabled true Changing the SSH Port This command syntax changes the SSH port config network services ssh port lt n gt Variables e lt n gt isa TCP port number between 1 and 65535 The default SSH port is 22 Example The following command syntax sets the TCP port for SSH to 555 config network services ssh port 555 Setting the SNMP Configuration You can enable or disable the SNMP v1 v2c or v3 agent configure the read and write community strings or set the MIB II parameters such as sysContact using the CLI commands An SNMP command begins with network services snmp S Raritan Chapter 7 Using the Command Line Interface Enabling or Disabling SNMP v1 v2c This command syntax enables or disables the SNMP v1 v2c protocol config network services snmp vl v2c option Variables e option is one of the options enable or disable Option Description enable The SNMP v1 v2c protocol is enabled disable The SNMP v1 v2c protocol is disabled Example The following command enables the SNMP v1 v2c protocol config f network services snmp vl v2c enable Enabling or Disabling SNMP v3 This command syntax enables or disables the SNMP v3 protocol config f network services snmp v3 option Variables e option is one of the options enable or disable Option Description enable The SN
372. vice to a TCP IP network that supports DHCP The DHCP assigned IP address of the PDU can be retrieved through the PDU s MAC address You can contact your LAN administrator for assistance See MAC Address on page 363 A Category 5e 6 UTP cable is required for a wired connection S Raritan Raritan Chapter 3 Installation and Configuration Connecting the PDU to a Computer To configure Dominion PX using a computer it must be connected to the computer with an RS 232 serial interface These diagrams show the serial port location on different types of PDUs Zero U models i 1 vs mee o oo cs ost un E o unex RH The Dominion PX device can enumerate a USB to serial converter If your computer does not have a serial port you can use a regular USB cable to connect the PDU to the computer for this configuration Depending on the availability of serial ports on your computer there are two ways to make a connection to the computer gt To make a serial connection 1 Connect one end of the null modem cable to the RS 232 port labeled CONSOLE MODEM on the Dominion PX device 2 Connect the other end of the null modem cable to the serial port COM on the computer 17 Chapter 3 Installation and Configuration gt To make a USB connection 1 Connect one end of a regular USB cable to the USB B port on the Dominion PX device 2 Connect the other end of the USB cable to the USB A po
373. ware and hardware mentioned in this document are registered trademarks or trademarks of and are the property of their respective holders FCC Information This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a commercial installation This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions may cause harmful interference to radio communications Operation of this equipment in a residential environment may cause harmful interference VCCI Information Japan CORES HARLBLESE RRS AEREAS VCC OR SEDC VFAZAGRRHRECT COREE RER CHEATS CBR MEES SMCFCEPHVET TNA 5B 3E I BELDBKENSCEPHVETF Raritan is not responsible for damage to this product resulting from accident disaster misuse abuse non Raritan modification of the product or other events outside of Raritan s reasonable control or not arising under normal operating conditions CE us e LISTED Contents Safety Guidelines ii Safety Instructions iii Applicable Models xiii What s New in the Dominion PX User Guide xiv Chapter 1 Introduction 1 Product Models os 1 gie ted rui o 1 PACK AGS GT0 a S30 TERRENI E EET EO QT EET E 3 P4 p osBucoelim
374. with device related settings such as the device name network settings security settings and system time e Maintenance provides tools that are helpful for maintaining the Dominion PX device such as the event log hardware information firmware upgrade and so on e Help displays information regarding the firmware and all open source packages embedded on the Dominion PX device In addition you can access the user guide from this menu Dominion PX Explorer Pane The hierarchical tree to the left displays the Dominion PX device you are accessing as well as all physical components embedded on or connected to this PDU such as inlets outlets and environmental sensors In addition an icon named Dashboard is available for displaying the PDU summary information The tree structure comprises three hierarchical levels First level Second level Third level Dashboard None None PDU folder Inlet I1 None Outlets folder 1 to n Overcurrent Protectors folder C1 to Cn External Sensors folder A list of connected environmental sensors S Raritan Chapter 5 Using the Web Interface First level Second level Third level Asset Asset Strip 1 None Management The PDU folder is named my PX by default The name changes after customizing the device name See Naming the PDU on page 66 n represents the final number of that component gt To navigate through the tree 1 To expand any folders see Expanding the Tree on page 55
375. work link state changes from up to down Both Dominion PX takes the action whenever the network link state changes Function enabled Available radio buttons include Enabled or disabled Disabled and Both Enabled Dominion PX takes the action only when the chosen function is enabled Disabled Dominion PX takes the action only when the chosen function is disabled Both Dominion PX takes the action when the chosen function is either enabled or disabled User login or Available radio buttons include Logged in logout Logged out and Both Logged in Dominion PX takes the action only when the selected user logs in Logged out Dominion PX takes the action only when the selected user logs out Both Dominion PX takes the action both when the selected user logs in and logs out Server monitoring Available radio buttons include Monitoring started event Monitoring stopped and Both Monitoring started Dominion PX takes the action only when the monitoring of any specified server starts Monitoring stopped Dominion PX takes the action only when the monitoring of any specified server stops Both Dominion PX takes the action when the monitoring of any specified server starts or stops zie Raritan dii Chapter 5 Using the Web Interface Event types Server reachability RF Code tag connection or disconnection Outlet power state change Radio buttons Available rad
376. x To disable a threshold deselect the checkbox After any threshold is enabled type an appropriate numeric value in the accompanying text box 7 To enable the deassertion hysteresis for all thresholds type a numeric value other than zero in the Deassertion Hysteresis field See What is Deassertion Hysteresis on page 132 131 Chapter 5 Using the Web Interface 8 To enable the assertion timeout for all thresholds type a numeric value other than zero in the Assertion Timeout Samples field See What is Assertion Timeout on page 133 9 Click OK to save the changes What is Deassertion Hysteresis The hysteresis setting determines when a threshold condition is reset This diagram illustrates how hysteresis values relate to thresholds Hysteresis Hysteresis Hysteresis Hysteresis Upper Critical Threshold Upper Critical Reset Upper Warning Threshold Upper Warning Reset Lower Warning Reset Lower Warning Threshold Lower Critical Reset Lower Critical Threshold The hysteresis values define a reset threshold For upper thresholds the measurement must fall past this reset threshold before a deassertion event is generated For lower thresholds the measurement must rise above this reset threshold before a deassertion event is generated 132 3ie Raritan Chapter 5 Using the Web Interface Example When Hysteresis is Useful This example demonstrates when a deassertion hysteresis
377. x Re RR eno kata de EE 87 Access Security COnLfo secuta semet a KEENE RN 90 Setting Up an SSL Certificate 101 Setting Up LDAP Authentication ssssseeee 106 Outlet Management iur ei tenere Tease ee n aKa KEE Eiaa 111 Inlet and Circuit Breaker Management 126 Setting Power Thresholds 0 cccccccssceceseceeeeeeeeseeeeenaeeeeaeeeenaeeneaaeseenees 129 Gonfiguring Event Hules uii ee otc tl iari cx rte tenue 134 Managing Event Logging iiiter terret Ducere re etn nece etai 145 Viewing Connected Users sssssssssssseeeeee eene 146 Monitoring Server Accessibility eene 147 Environmental Sensors iiia dieere do xe tei taana ead Ere seda satan 149 Asset Management cr etai cte enc etai te tale dE Du xa aug ERES 160 Copying Configurations with Bulk Configuration 163 Changing the Measurement Units sess 165 Network Diagnostics eroi idee ce nce ere eee eda daa 167 Viewing the Communication Log sese 168 Downloading Diagnostic Information eeeeeeee 169 Firmware parade cin arret aceti e rer een Ee aaa ees 169 Accessing the Help cops iex rena dta t ids eae aa uidet ugue en 172 Supported Web Browsers zie Raritan The following web browsers can be used to access the Dominion PX web interface e Internet Explorer 7 IE7 and Internet Explorer 8 IE8 e
378. y PX by default The name changes after customizing the device name See Naming the PDU on page 66 2 Click External Sensors in the Dominion PX Explorer pane and the External Sensors page opens in the right pane 3 Click the sensor you want to unmanage 4 Click Release After a sensor is removed from management the ID number assigned to the sensor is released and can be automatically assigned to any newly detected sensor 159 160 Chapter 5 Using the Web Interface Asset Management Con figure the asset management settings only when an asset sensor is physically connected to the Dominion PX device Note To set up an asset management system see Connecting the Asset Management Sensor Optional on page 34 Configuring the Asset Sensor Dominion PX CANNOT detect how many rack units a connected asset sensor supports so you must provide this information manually gt 1 To configure an asset sensor asset sirip If the Asset Management folder is not expanded expand it to show the asset sensor See Expanding the Tree on page 55 Click the asset sensor in the left pane The asset sensor s page opens in the right pane Note The asset sensor is named Asset Strip 1 by default The name changes after being customized Tip The same asset sensor s page can be also opened by clicking Asset Management in the left pane and then double clicking the asset sensor in the right pane Click Setup T
379. ystem Event Log Rule and System SNMP Trap Rule gt To modify an event rule 1 Choose Device Settings gt Event Rules The Event Rule Settings dialog appears 2 Onthe Rules tab select the event rule that you want to modify in the left pane To disable the event rule deselect the Enabled checkbox To change the event click the desired tab in the Event field and select a different item from the pull down menu or submenu For example in a user activity event rule for the admin user you can click the admin tab to display a pull down submenu showing all user names and then select a different user name or all user names referred to as Any user 5 If radio buttons are available you may select a radio button other than the current selection to change the rule triggering condition 6 Tochange the action s do any of the following in the Actions field To add a new action click the drop down arrow select the action from the list and click the Add Action button Add Action To remove any added action select it from the list box and click the Remove selected Action button Remove selected Action 7 Click Save to save the changes Note If you do not click Save before quitting the current settings page a message appears Then click Yes to save the changes Discard to abort the changes or Cancel to return to the current settings page 8 Click Close to quit the dialog zie Raritan n 144 Chapter
380. ysteresis This command syntax configures the deassertion hysteresis value of an outlet config sensor outlet lt n gt lt sensor type gt hysteresis lt value gt Variables e lt n gt is the number of the outlet that you want to configure e lt sensor type is one of the following sensor types Sensor type Description current Current sensor voltage Voltage sensor activePower Active power sensor apparentPower Apparent power sensor powerFactor Power factor sensor activeEnergy Active energy sensor unbalancedCurrent Unbalanced load sensor Note If the requested sensor type is not supported the message Not available is displayed e value is a numeric value that is assigned to the hysteresis for the specified outlet sensor See What is Deassertion Hysteresis on page 132 for the function of the deassertion hysteresis Example The following command sets the deassertion hysteresis of the outlet 5 RMS current to 0 2A That is the current must drop by at least 0 2A below the upper threshold or rise by at least 0 2A above the lower threshold before any threshold crossing event is deasserted config f sensor outlet 5 current hysteresis 0 2 nee Raritan Chapter 7 Using the Command Line Interface Setting the Outlet s Assertion Timeout This command syntax configures the assertion timeout value of an outlet config sensor outlet lt n gt lt sensor type gt assertionTimeout lt value gt Variables e l

PX2-3000/4000/5000 User Guide

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents